EsPCEx.1. Apostila de Inglês - GramáticaLalineWinter

INGLÊS
GRAMÁTICA
ter
in
eW
in
al
-L
7
-1
1
84
9.
10
7.
06
F
CP
7ª EDIÇÃO - 2019
CP
F
06
7.
10
9.
84
1-1
7
-L
al
in
eW
in
t er
BASIC LEVEL 3
Prezado aluno do Curso de Inglês

Agradecimentos O conhecimento, o entendimento e o perfeito domínio
do Inglês, em suas diversas muitas vertentes, são
ferramentas essenciais para o sucesso em qualquer
Em primeiro lugar, meu agradecimento especial e minha concurso – especialmente no âmbito da carreira militar,
consideração a dois professores extraordinários – com provas cada dia mais seletivas que abordam
aqueles que me levaram a gostar de ensinar com diversas particularidades e singularidades do nosso
excelência – Dometildes Tinoco e Euzébio Cidade. (Olá, Inglês.
Mamãe e Papai!)
Tendo em vista, essencial e prioritariamente, o sucesso
Um agradecimento sincero aos meus queridos alunos e de seus alunos, o Curso Cidade, por intermédio de sua
a excelente e dedicada equipe de professores da Cadeira equipe da Cadeira de Inglês, apresenta este material.
de Inglês, liderada pelo Professor João, profissional Confeccionado a partir de um sólido embasamento
ímpar, e que reúne as qualidades de um verdadeiro
er
teórico, calcado na Bibliografia do concurso. A presente
líder. Coordena com esmero a cadeira de humanas do
t
apostila traz muitos exercícios gabaritados, com o intuito
in
Curso Cidade, com seu trabalho de incomensurável valor de fortalecer e solidificar a teoria aprendida em sala,
eW
pedagógico reconhecido pela Direção do Curso, pela trabalhada na apostila e praticada nos simulados
equipe que coordena e pelos demais alunos que já se semanais, cujo objetivo é ajudar a pensar com fluidez,
prepararam em nosso Curso. Agradeço também ao
prestativo colaborador de todas as horas e inestimável
in
sem recorrer a estratégias mnemônicas ineficazes e
al
ideias generalizadas, desprovidas de lógica.
amigo Prof. Leandro, que procedeu a atualização dos
-L
conteúdos para o corrente ano. Um agradecimento Aproveite! O material é seu: faça um ótimo uso dele!
especial a Laura Maciel pela coordenação da equipe de Temos certeza de que aquele que se dedicar com afinco
7
TI que executou excelente trabalho de formatação e

-1
à resolução das questões aqui apresentadas irá melhorar

diagramação deste material. sobremaneira o seu desempenho nos exames vindouros.
1
Nosso principal objetivo, com este material, é contribuir

84
Esperamos que você utilize esta obra, exercitando com

atenção cada item apresentado e pesquisando na para melhorar o desempenho de todo candidato que, de
9.
bibliografia àqueles que apresentaram maior grau de fato, queira aprender.

10
dificuldade. Traga para a aula as dúvidas das questões Estamos aqui torcendo e trabalhando pelo seu sucesso!
cuja resposta não esteja de acordo com seu
7.
conhecimento ou envie-as por e-mail para seu professor. Bom trabalho e bom estudo!
06
Aceite nossa companhia nesta viagem de treinamento Equipe de Inglês

F
Rumo à EsFCEx.
CP
Bons Estudos!!
Luiz Cidade
Diretor
3
BASIC LEVEL 4
Professores dos Concursos
EQUIPE Sormany Fernandes – História Geral e do Brasil

Djalma Augusto – História Geral e do Brasil
Atila Abiorana – Língua Portuguesa
Diretor Geral Valber Freitas Santos – Gramática (EAD)
Luiz Alberto Tinoco Cidade Adriana Bitencourt – Redação e Literatura
Drº Adriano Andrade – Geografia geral e do Brasil
Diretora Executiva Enio Botelho – Geografia Geral e do Brasil
Drª Janaina Mourão – Geografia Geral e do Brasil (EAD)
Clara Marisa May Ms Rubia de Paula Rubio – Geografia Geral e do Brasil
Luiz Alberto Tinoco Cidade – Espanhol
Diretor de Artes Drº Daniel Soares Filho – Espanhol (EAD)
Fabiano Rangel Cidade Maristella Mattos Silva – Espanhol (EAD)
Monike Cidade – Espanhol e Alemão (EAD)
er
Gerente Operacional Ivana Mara Ferreira Costa - Inglês
t
Márcia Mattos da Silva – Francês (EAD)
in
Laura Maciel Cruz
Marcos Henrique – Francês
eW
Coordenação Geral dos Cursos Preparatórios Edson Antonio S. Gomes – Administração de Empresas
Tomé de Souza – Administração de Empresas (EAD)
Profº Luiz Alberto Tinoco Cidade
in
Alexandre Santos de Oliveira – Direito
Drº Evilásio dos Santos Moura – Direito
al
Coordenação dos Cursos de Idiomas EAD Rafael – Direito
-L
Profº Dr. Daniel Soares Filho Cirelene E. Martins - Direito

Genilson Vaz Silva Sousa – Ciências Contábeis
7
Secretaria Rodrigo Flórido Brum – Ciências Contábeis

-1
Evilin Drunoski Mache Ricardo Sant'Ana – Informática

1
Fausto Santos – Informática

84
Suporte Técnico Rômulo Santos – Informática

Cintia Lobo César – Enfermagem
9.
Fernnanda Moreira Teodoro

Maria Luiza - Enfermagem
10
Lídia Maciel Cruz

Marcelo Herculano – Enfermagem
Lacerda – Enfermagem
7.
Editoração Gráfica Murilo Roballo – Matemática

06
Edilva de Lima do Nascimento Fernando Cunha Córes - Matemática

Marcos Massaki – Física I, II e III
F
Fonoaudióloga e Psicopedagoga Andrei Buslik – Física e Matemática

CP
Mariana Ramos – CRFa 12482-RJ/T-DF Mauro – Química

Antenor Nagi Passamani – Química
Assessoria Jurídica
Luiza May Schmitz – OAB/DF – 24.164
Assessoria de Línguas Estrangeiras

Monike Rangel Cidade (Poliglota-Suíça)
4
BASIC LEVEL 5
Conteúdo
BASIC LEVEL ..................................................................................................................... 9
1. ALPHABET ................................................................................................................................................ 9
2. NUMBERS ................................................................................................................................................. 9
2.1 NUMERALS ............................................................................................................................................. 9
2.2. ORDINALS ............................................................................................................................................ 11
3. ARTICLE .................................................................................................................................................. 14
3.1. INDEFINITE ARTICLE: A or AN ........................................................................................................... 14
3.2. DEFINITE ARTICLE: THE .................................................................................................................... 15
t er
in
4. PLURAL ................................................................................................................................................... 21
eW
4.1. MAIN RULE ........................................................................................................................................... 21
4.2. OTHER SPECIFIC USES ..................................................................................................................... 22
4.3. COMPOUND NOUNS ........................................................................................................................... 23
in
4.4. SOME IRREGULARS ........................................................................................................................... 24
al
4.5. THE SAME AS IN LATIN OR GREEK .................................................................................................. 24
-L
4.6. THE SAME AS SINGULAR .................................................................................................................. 25

7
5. PRONOUNS ............................................................................................................................................. 28
-1
5.1 SUBJECT PRONOUNS ......................................................................................................................... 28

1
5.2. OBJECT PRONOUNS .......................................................................................................................... 29

84
5.3. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS (AND ADJECTIVES) ....................................................................... 29

5.4. QUANTIFIERS (QUANTITATIVE ADJECTIVES) ................................................................................. 30
9.
5.5. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS AND POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES ......................................................... 31

10
5.6. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS .................................................................................................................... 31

5.7. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS (AND ADVERBS) ............................................................................. 32
7.
06
6. NOUNS ..................................................................................................................................................... 38
6.1. GENRE ................................................................................................................................................. 38
F
6.2. CATEGORY .......................................................................................................................................... 38

CP
6.3. FORMS ................................................................................................................................................. 39
7. ADJECTIVES ........................................................................................................................................... 40
7.1. COMPARATIVE DEGREE .................................................................................................................... 40
7.2. SUPERLATIVE DEGREE ..................................................................................................................... 41
8. ORDER AND CATEGORY OF ADJECTIVES ........................................................................................ 44
9. VERB TO BE............................................................................................................................................ 46
9.1. PRESENT ............................................................................................................................................. 46
9.2. PAST ..................................................................................................................................................... 46
9.3. FUTURE ................................................................................................................................................ 47
10. PRESENT TENSE ................................................................................................................................ 48

10.1. SIMPLE PRESENT CONTINUOUS.................................................................................................... 48
10.2. SIMPLE PRESENT ............................................................................................................................. 48
10.3. PRESENT PERFECT ......................................................................................................................... 49
10.4. PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS ................................................................................................ 50
5
BASIC LEVEL 6
11. PAST TENSE ....................................................................................................................................... 55

11.1. SIMPLE PAST ..................................................................................................................................... 55
11.2. PAST CONTINUOUS ......................................................................................................................... 56
11.3. PAST PERFECT ................................................................................................................................. 58
11.4. PAST PERFECT CONTINUOUS ........................................................................................................ 59
12. FUTURE ............................................................................................................................................... 63

12.1. SIMPLE FUTURE ............................................................................................................................... 64
12.2. FUTURE CONTINUOUS .................................................................................................................... 65
12.3. FUTURE PERFECT ............................................................................................................................ 66
12.4. FUTURE PERFECT CONTINUOUS .................................................................................................. 67
INTERMEDIATE LEVEL ................................................................................................... 74
t er
in
1. ADVERBS ................................................................................................................................................ 74
eW
1.1. FREQUENCY........................................................................................................................................ 74
1.2. MANNER ............................................................................................................................................... 74
in
1.3. TIME ...................................................................................................................................................... 75
1.4. PLACE .................................................................................................................................................. 76
al
1.5. DEGREE OR INTENSITY ..................................................................................................................... 76
-L
1.6. DOUBT .................................................................................................................................................. 76

EXERCISES ................................................................................................................................................. 80
7
-1
2. PREPOSITIONS....................................................................................................................................... 82
1
2.1. GENERAL PREPOSITIONS ................................................................................................................. 83

84
2.2 PREPOSITIONS OF PLACE ................................................................................................................. 88

9.
2.3. PREPOSITIONS OF DIRECTION ........................................................................................................ 88

2.4. PREPOSITIONS OF TIME ................................................................................................................... 89
10
2.5. PREPOSITIONS OF POSSESSION .................................................................................................... 89

7.
2.6. PREPOSITIONS OF WAY .................................................................................................................... 89

06
2.7. OTHER PREPOSITIONS ..................................................................................................................... 89

F
3. CONJUNCTIONS ..................................................................................................................................... 90
CP
3.1. COORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS .................................................................................................... 90

3.2. SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS .................................................................................................. 92
4. MODAL VERBS ....................................................................................................................................... 95

4.1. MODAL EXPRESSIONS ...................................................................................................................... 97
EXERCISES ................................................................................................................................................. 99
5. WISH ...................................................................................................................................................... 102

EXERCISES ............................................................................................................................................... 103
6. IF CLAUSES AND/OR CONDITIONAL CLAUSES .............................................................................. 106

EXERCISES ............................................................................................................................................... 107
7. ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICES .......................................................................................................... 109

7.1. ACTIVE VOICE ................................................................................................................................... 109
7.2. PASSIVE VOICE................................................................................................................................. 110
EXERCISE ................................................................................................................................................. 113
8. DIRECT AND INDIRECT SPEECHES................................................................................................... 114

8.1. DIRECT SPEECH ............................................................................................................................... 114
6
BASIC LEVEL 7
8.2. INDIRECT SPEECH ........................................................................................................................... 114

8.3. INDIRECT QUESTIONS ..................................................................................................................... 116
EXERCISES ............................................................................................................................................... 117
9. APPOSITIVE .......................................................................................................................................... 119

EXERCISE ................................................................................................................................................. 119
ADVANCED LEVEL ........................................................................................................ 120
1. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE ................................................................................................................ 120

1.1. SUBJECT ............................................................................................................................................ 120
1.2. PREDICATE........................................................................................................................................ 122
er
1.3. SUBJECT COMPLEMENT ................................................................................................................. 123
t
in
2. OBJECTS OF SENTENCE .................................................................................................................... 123
eW
2.1. DIRECT OBJECT ................................................................................................................................ 123
2.2 INDIRECT OBJECT ............................................................................................................................. 124
in
2.3. OBJECTS OF PREPOSITIONS ......................................................................................................... 124
al
3. VERBALS: INFINITIVES, GERUNDS AND PARTICIPLES ................................................................. 125
-L
3.1. INFINITIVE .......................................................................................................................................... 125

3.2. GERUNDS .......................................................................................................................................... 128
7
3.3. PARTICIPLES ..................................................................................................................................... 131

1 -1
4. COMPARING GERUNDS, PARTIPLES AND INFINITIVES ................................................................. 135

84
EXERCISES ............................................................................................................................................... 140

9.
5. MAIN CLAUSE....................................................................................................................................... 142

10
EXERCISES ............................................................................................................................................... 142

7.
06
6. SUBORDINATE CLAUSE ..................................................................................................................... 143

6.1. NOUN CLAUSE .................................................................................................................................. 143
F
EXERCISES ............................................................................................................................................... 145

CP
6.2. ADJECTIVE CLAUSE ......................................................................................................................... 146

EXERCISES ............................................................................................................................................... 149
6.3. ADVERB CLAUSE .............................................................................................................................. 151
6.3.2. ACTIVE VOICE ................................................................................................................................ 153
6.3.3. PASSIVE VOICE.............................................................................................................................. 153
EXERCISES ............................................................................................................................................... 153
7. IRREGULAR VERBS LIST .................................................................................................................... 155
G A B A R I T O S ........................................................................................................... 160
BASIC LEVEL ............................................................................................................................................... 160

2.2. ORDINALS .......................................................................................................................................... 160
3. ARTICLE ................................................................................................................................................ 161
4. PLURAL ................................................................................................................................................. 162
5. PRONOUNS .......................................................................................................................................... 163
6. PRONOUNS .......................................................................................................................................... 166
7. ADJECTIVES ......................................................................................................................................... 167
7
BASIC LEVEL 8
10. PRESENT TENSE ............................................................................................................................... 169

11. PAST TENSE ....................................................................................................................................... 170
12. FUTURE ............................................................................................................................................... 171
INTERMEDIATE LEVEL ............................................................................................................................... 173

1. ADVERBS .............................................................................................................................................. 173
2. PREPOSITIONS ................................................................................................................................... 174
4. MODAL VERBS ..................................................................................................................................... 175
5. WISH ...................................................................................................................................................... 177
6. IF CLAUSES AND/OR CONDITIONAL CLAUSES ............................................................................... 178
7. ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICES .......................................................................................................... 178
8. DIRECT AND INDIRECT SPEECHES .................................................................................................. 179
9. APPOSITIVE .......................................................................................................................................... 180
er
ADVANCED LEVEL ...................................................................................................................................... 181
t
in
4. COMPARING GERUNDS, PARTIPLES AND INFINITIVES ................................................................. 181
5. MAIN CLAUSE ....................................................................................................................................... 181
eW
6. SUBORDINATE CLAUSE ...................................................................................................................... 182
in
PROVAS COMENTADAS DE INGLÊS ........................................................................................................ 183
al
2016/2017 .................................................................................................................................................. 183
-L
GABARITO COMENTADO ........................................................................................................................ 184

2015/2016 .................................................................................................................................................. 186
7
-1
2014/2015 .................................................................................................................................................. 190

1
84
2013/2014 .................................................................................................................................................. 195

9.
2012/2013 .................................................................................................................................................. 199

10

2011/2012 .................................................................................................................................................. 204
7.

06
2010/2011 .................................................................................................................................................. 211

F
2009/2010 .................................................................................................................................................. 216

CP

2008/2009 .................................................................................................................................................. 221
2007/2008 .................................................................................................................................................. 227
2006/2007 .................................................................................................................................................. 232
8
BASIC LEVEL 9
BASIC LEVEL
1. ALPHABET
Each single letter has a specific, unique and characteristic sound, although this sound can differ when combined
with other letters in order to form a word. Nevertheless, it is fundamental to know how to pronounce the
English alphabet correctly. It will be needed when someone asks you to spell your name or any other word.
Cada letra tem um som específico, característico e único, embora este som possa diferir quando combinado com outras letras,
de modo a formar uma palavra. No entanto, é fundamental saber pronunciar o alfabeto inglês corretamente. Será necessário
er
quando alguém perguntar como se soletra o seu nome ou qualquer outra palavra.
t
in
eW
A = ei E=i I = ai M = em Q = kiu U = iu Y = uai
in
al
B = bi F = ef J = djei N = em R = ar V = vi Z = zi
-L
C = ci G = dgi K = kei O = ou S = ess W = dabliu

7
1 -1
D = di H = eitch L = el P = pi T = ti X = ecs
84
9.
10
* In British English (BrE), the Z sounds like zed.

7.
* Em inglês britânico (BrE), o Z tem som de “zed”.

06
F
CP
2. NUMBERS
2.1 NUMERALS
Herein under we can see the first twenty (20) numbers:
Aqui abaixo podemos ver os primeiros vinte números:
0 – zero 4 – four 8 – eight 12 – twelve 16 – sixteen
1 – one 5 – five 9 – nine 13 – thirteen 17 – seventeen
2 – two 6 – six 10 – ten 14 – fourteen 18 – eighteen
3 – three 7 – seven 11 – eleven 15 – fifteen 19 – nineteen
20 – twenty
9
10
After twenty, for each of the tens, we add the numbers from one to nine.
Depois do vinte, para cada uma das dezenas, acrescentamos os números de um a nove.
Examples: 21 – twenty-one; 22 – twenty-two; 25 – twenty-five; 29 – twenty-nine.
After number ten, all the tens are always ended with TY.
Depois do número dez, todas as dezenas terminam com TY.
Examples: 20 – twenty; 30 – thirty; 40 – forty; 50 – fifty; 60 – sixty; 70 – seventy; 80 – eighty; 90 – ninety.
er
Hundreds, thousands and millions are written with the correspondent number in front of the words HUNDRED,
t
in
THOUSAND or MILLION.
eW
Centenas, milhares e milhões são escritas com o número correspondente na frente (antes) das palavras HUNDRED,
THOUSANDor MILLION.
in
al
-L
Examples:
7
100 – a/one hundred; 200 – two hundred; 300 – three hundred;

1 -1
500 – five hundred; 700 – seven hundred; 900 – nine hundred;

84
1,000 – a/one thousand; 4,000 – four thousand; 6,000 – six thousand

9.
10
8,000 – eight thousand; 9,000 – nine thousand; 10,000 – ten thousand

7.
23,000 – twenty three thousand; 56,000 – fifty six thousand

06
365,017 – three hundred sixty five thousand and seventeen

F
CP
1,000,000 – a/one million; 7,000,000 – seven million
FIQUE LIGADO!
◘ Em Inglês, a vírgula (,) é usada para separar milhares e milhões.
Exemplos:
23,500 = twenty-three thousand (and) five hundred
400,301 = four hundred thousand three hundred (and) one
905,720 = nine hundred five thousand seven hundred (and) twenty
1,630,014 = one million six hundred thirty thousand (and) fourteen
22,000,600 = twenty-million (and) six hundred
10
11
3,000,000,297 = three billion two hundred (and) ninety seven
◘ O ponto (.) é usado para separar decimais.
Exemplos:
0,5 (Português) = 0.5 (Inglês)
1.500,34 (Português) = 1,500.34 (Inglês)
3.456.809,77 (Português) = 3,456,809.77 (Inglês)
There is one shark here. There are twelve birds here.
ert
Há um tubarão aqui. Há doze pássaros aqui.
in
eW
in
al
-L
7
1 -1
84
2.2. ORDINALS
9.
Herein under, we can see the main ordinal numbers used on a day-to-day basis:
10
7.
Aqui abaixo podemos ver os principais números ordinais usados diariamente:

06
0 – zero 1st – first 2nd – second

F
3rd – third 4th – fourth 5th – fifth

CP
6th – sixth 7th – seventh 8th – eighth
9th – ninth 10th – tenth 11th – eleventh
12th – twelfth 13th – thirteenth 14th – fourteenth
15th – fifteenth 16th – sixteenth 17th – seventeenth
18th – eighteenth 19th – nineteenth 20th – twentieth
After number ten, all the tens with zero are always ended with TIETH.
Depois do número dez, todas as dezenas terminam com TIETH.
Examples: 20th – twentieth; 30th – thirtieth; 40th – fortieth; 50th – fiftieth; 60th – sixtieth; etc.
After the twentieth (ordinal number), we put twenty (numeral) plus the numbers from one to nine (in ordinal).
For the consecutive tens, this rule is equally applicable.
11
12
Depois do vigésimo (número ordinal), colocamos vinte (numeral) mais os números ordinais do primeiro ao nono. Para as
dezenas subsequentes, esta regra é igualmente aplicável.
Examples:
21st – twenty-first; 35th – thirty-fifth; 43rd – forty-third; 59th – fifty-ninth;
62nd – sixty-second; 77th – seventy-seventh; 86th – eighty-sixth;
89th – eighty-ninth; 94th – ninety-fourth; 98th – ninety-eighth
Hundreds, thousands and millions are written with the correspondent number in front of the words HUNDRED,
THOUSAND or MILLION.
er
Centenas, milhares e milhões são escritas com o número correspondente na frente (antes) das palavras HUNDRED, THOUSAND
t
in
or MILLION.
eW
Examples: in
al
-L
100th – a/one hundredth; 301st – three hundred (and) first;
1,000th – a/one thousandth; 2,702nd – two thousand seven hundred second;

7
-1
1,000,000th – a/one millionth; 6,000,047th – six million forty-seventh;

1
84
8,056,763rd – eight million fifty six thousand seven hundred sixty (and) third;
9.
32,600,001 – thirty two million six hundred thousand (and) first

10
7.
06
FIQUE LIGADO!
F
◘ Em Inglês, as abreviações dos números ordinais seguem as regras apresentadas abaixo e têm a
CP
seguinte grafia:
FIRST=1st SECOND=2nd THIRD=3rd THE OTHERS=Xth
◘ No caso específico das centenas, milhares e milhões (ordinais) observa-se a regra de composição dos
numerais, com o acréscimo de TH no final do último número:
ONE-HUNDREDTH=100th ONE-THOUSANDTH=1,000th
ONE-MILLIONTH=1,000,000th ONE-BILLIONTH=1,000,000,000th
12
13
This is the FIRST person in line. This is the NINTH person in line.
Esta é a primeira pessoa da fila. Esta é a nona pessoa na fila.
EXERCISES
t er
in
eW
Write the respective ordinals and numerals:
Escreva os respectivos ordinais e numerais:

in
al
03 – _________ 03rd – ________ 15 – __________
-L
15th – ________ 27 – _________ 27th – _________

7
49 –_________ 49th – ________ 32 – ___________

1 -1
32nd – ________ 11 – _________ 11th – __________

84
68 –_________ 68th –________ 76 – ___________

9.
10
76th –_________ 12 – ________ 12th – __________

7.
99 – _________ 99th – ________ 14 – ___________

06
14th – ________ 100 – ________ 100th – _________

F
CP
1,345 – ____________________________________________________________________
1,560,300 – ________________________________________________________________
322nd –____________________________________________________________________
2,761st –___________________________________________________________________
10,947th –__________________________________________________________________
_____________– two hundred thirty five thousand five hundred sixty four
235,564th –_________________________________________________________________
97,783,290 –________________________________________________________________
_____________ – seven million seven hundred seventy thousand seven hundred seventy seven
13
14
Complete the numbers according to the example:
Complete os números de acordo com o exemplo:
Example: one – 1; tenth – 10th
six – ______________ ______________ – 12 thirty – ______________ __________– 100
______________ – 50 ______________ – 13 thirty-nine - __________ ___________ – 11
______________– 78 ______________ – 42 __________________23 seven – ________
sixty-one – _________ four hundred – ______ four hundred – _______ ___________ – 99
er
______________ – 19 _______ – 49
t
in
eW
_______________ - 48 eighty – ___________ eighty – ___
_______________ – 92 a hundred forty-six __ sixty-seven –_______ seventeen – ____

in
al
______________ – 19 ______________ – 49 __________________48 eighteen – ______
-L
eighty – ___________ ______________ – 92 a hundred forty-six - ___ sixty-seven – ___

7
____________ – 100 sixth – ____________ twelveth – ___________ _________ – 39th

1 -1
eleventh – ________ seventy-eighth –____ ______________ – 92nd __________ – 46th

84
9.
10
3. ARTICLE
7.
06
3.1. INDEFINITE ARTICLE: A or AN

F
CP
The indefinite articles A/AN can be both used for masculine or feminine words. However, they can only be used
with singular words, NEVER with plural ones.
Os artigos indefinidos UM/UMA podem ambos ser utilizados para palavras masculinas ou femininas. Contudo, eles só podem ser
utilizados com palavras no singular, NUNCA no plural.
Examples: It is a book. They are books.
That is an apple. Those are apples.
A → used before words with CONSONANT SOUND
UM/UMA → utilizado antes de palavras com SOM DE CONSOANTE
Examples: a pen, a man, a girl, a university (*)
14
15
(*) Exceptions: a) The article A is used, when needed, before words that begin with the sounds U/EW/EU(iu =
y), for instance: a useful thing; a ewe; a European.
O artigo A é usado, quando necessário, antes de palavras que começam com os sons U/EW/EU (iu=y), por exemplo: uma coisa
útil; uma ovelha (fêmea); um europeu ou uma europeia.
b) It is also used, when needed, before words that begin with the sound O (uâ), for instance: a one-eyed man; a
once-played game.
Também é usado, quando necessário, antes de palavras que começam com os sons O (uâ), por exemplo: um homem caolho
(de um olho só); um jogo uma vez jogado.
AN → used before words with VOWEL SOUND
t er
UM/UMA → usado antes de palavras com SOM DE VOGAL
in
eW
Examples: an apple; an aircraft; an orange; an hour (*)
in
al
-L
(*) Exceptions: The article AN is also used, when needed, before words that begin with H, but only when the
letter H has no sound – it is mute. It is important to remember that in English there are few words beginning
7
-1
with mute H and the most common are: heir, hour, honor, honest.
1
O artigo UM/UMA também é usado, quando necessário, antes de palavras que começam com H, mas apenas quando o H não
84
tem som – é mudo. É importante lembrar que em inglês há poucas palavras começadas com H mudo e as mais comuns são:
9.
herdeiro, hora, honra, honesto.

10
7.
3.2. DEFINITE ARTICLE: THE

06
F
CP
The definite article THE can be used for male or female words, as well as for singular and plural ones.
Os artigos definidos O/A/OS/AS podem ser utilizados para palavras masculinas ou femininas, bem como para as singulares ou
plurais.
Examples: The boy is here. The boys are here.
The girl is there. The girls are there.
USAGES – utilizações:
a) Before a specified word.

Antes de uma palavra determinada.
Examples: This is the book that I promised to lend you.
Those are the shirts which she gave me.
15
16
b) Before words with unique meaning.

Antes de palavras com sentido único.
Examples: Thesun also rises.
I love to look at the moon.
c) Before countries whose names include words like UNION, UNITED or REPUBLIC or the ones presented in the
plural form.
Antes de países cujos nomes incluem palavras como UNIÃO, UNIDOS (UNIDO) ou REPÚBLICA, ou aqueles que são
apresentados na forma plural.
Examples: The United States
er
TheNetherlands
t
in
The Soviet Union
eW
The Republic of Ireland
in
al
d) Before names of groups of mountains, islands, straits and canals.
-L
Antes de nomes de cadeias montanhosas, ilhas, estreitos e canais.

7
Examples: The Bahamas

1 -1
The Himalaya
84
The Bering Strait

9.
10
The Panama Canal

7.
06
e) Before ship names.

Antes de nomes de embarcações (marítimas ou espaciais).
F
CP
Examples: The Queen Mary
The USS Eisenhower
The Endeavour
f) Before hotels and stores with impersonal names.

Antes de hotéis e lojas com nomes impessoais.
Examples: The Ritz (Hotel)
The Starbucks (Café)
g) Before names of rivers and oceans.

Antes de nomes de rios e oceanos.
Examples: The Atlantic (ocean)
16
17
The San Francisco (river)
The Pacific (ocean)
h) Before names of deserts, poles, imaginary lines and tropics.

Antes de nomes de desertos, pólos, linhas imaginárias e trópicos.
Examples: The Tropic of Cancer
The Sahara Desert
The South Pole
er
The Ecuador
t
in
eW
i) Before superlatives.
Antes de superlativos.
in
al
Examples: The best student
-L
The largest house in the city

7
-1
The hottest day of the year

1
j) Before musical instruments and names of rhythms and dances.

84
Antes de instrumentos musicais e nomes de ritmos e danças.

9.
10
Examples: The flamenco

7.
The guitar
06
The samba
F
k) Before ordinal numbers.

CP
Antes de números ordinais.
Examples: Thefirst
The seventeenth
The seventieth
l) Before family names, whenever they are presented in the plural form.
Antes de nomes de família (sobrenomes), sempre que estes são apresentados no plural.
Examples: The Donald’s are a famous family
The Silva’s aren’t as famous as the Donald’s
17
18
FIQUE LIGADO!
Não usamos artigos definidos nas seguintes situações:
a) Antes de nomes próprios (Carol is my friend)

b) Antes de adjetivos possessivos (Your father is a good man)
c) Antes de substantivos usados em sentido geral (Books are expensive nowadays)
d) Antes de substantivos abstratos usados em sentido geral (Life is very hard)
e) Antes de nomes de refeições (I’m going to have lunch/dinner/breakfast)
f) Antes de nomes de títulos seguidos de nome próprio (Professor Mason is the best)
g) Antes de nomes de idiomas e/ou línguas (They both speak English very well)
h) Antes de esportes, ciências e matérias acadêmicas (Biologyis an important
science)
i) Antes de estações do ano, meses e dias da semana (Winter is the coldest
er
season)
t
in
eW
EXERCISES
in
al
Use the appropriate article(s) to complete the following sentences. Choose the best possible answer.
-L
7
01. Entering ____ university should be ____ exciting experience for ____ men and women.
-1
an; an; an
1
(A)
84
(B) a; an; ___

(C) a; an; an
9.
(D) an; an; ___

10
7.
02. ____ lion is ____ biggest one in ____ circus.

06
(A) a; the; the

F
(B) that; a; ___

CP
(C) this; the; the

(D) a; a; the
03. Ted, ____ soldier, has become ____ rich man.
(A) the; ____

(B) ____; the
(C) a; ____
(D) the; a
04. ____ man who sold me ____ books lives in ____ suburbs. He is ____ very nice man.
(A) a; those; a; a
(B) that; some; a; the
(C) the; these; the; a
(D) this; that; some; the
18
19
05. On my last vacation, I visited ____ England, ____ U.S.A. and ____ Soviet Union.
(A) ____; ____; the

(B) ____; ____; ____
(C) ____; the; the
(D) ____; a; a
06. I took ____ exciting trip. ____ trip was to Japan.
(A) a; the
(B) the; a
(C) an; a
(D) an; the
ert
in
07. ____ Brazil is ___ big country.
eW
(A) the; a
(B) an; ____ in
al
(C) ____; an
(D) ____; a
-L
7
08. The boys brought ____ ewe, ____ European bird and ____ milk.
1 -1
(A) a; a; ____
84
(B) a; an; ____

9.
(C) a; an; a
(D) an; a; ____
10
7.
06
09. ____ girl at ____ back of ____ room is eating ____ sandwich.
F
(A) the; the; the; a

CP
(B) ____; a; the; the

(C) a; a; a; ____
(D) the; ____; ____; a
10. ____ death of ____ friend of mine made me sad.
(A) a; the
(B) ____; a
(C) the; a
(D) the; the
11. My friend’s death is ____ important lost for ____ Thompson’s.
(A) a; ____
(B) the; the
(C) ____; the
(D) an; the
19
20
12. ____ Apollo 13 was ____ very famous space shuttle back in ____ 20 th century.
(A) the; ____; a

(B) the; a; a
(C) ____; the; a
(D) the; a; the
13. ____ baker works in ____ bakery and bakes ____ lot of bread every day.
(A) a; ____; ____

(B) the; the; a
(C) ____; a; a
(D) the; ____; ____
t er
in
14. Entering ____ bank, I saw ____ man trying to mug ____ old lady.
eW
(A) a; a; a
(B) the; a; an
(C) ____; ____; an in
al
(D) the; ____; an
-L
15. When I was talking to ____ woman in black, she was in ____ University full of young people with ____ hats on their heads.
7
-1
(A) a; a; a
1
(B) the; a; ____

84
(C) ____; ____; an

9.
(D) the; ____; a

10
16. ____ Brown’s met ____ White’s last night. Then, they went together to ____ restaurant downtown. After having ____
7.
fantastic meal, they saw ____ play at ____ National Theater.

06
(A) the; the; the; a; a: a

F
(B) the; the; a; a; a; the

CP
(C) ____; ____; a; a; a; a

(D) ____; ____; the; the; the, a
17. She loves to play ____ guitar and dance ____ flamenco. Her brother, however, prefers to play ____ piano.
(A) the; ____; a

(B) the; the; the
(C) a; a; a
(D) a; ____; the
18. Mike is always ____ first student in his class. Actually, he can consider himself ____ best student in ____ whole school.
(A) a; a: a
(B) a; a; the
(C) a; the; the
(D) the; the; the
20
21
19. ____ General on ____ left side of ____ President of ____ Federative Republic of Brazil is ____ very well-known man.
(A) the; the; the; a; a

(B) the; the; the; the; a
(C) a; a; a; a; the
(D) the; the; a; the; the
20. When we were living in ____ Bahamas, my father was living in ____ Florida. Five years later, all ____ family was living
together on ____ very nice farm in ____ state of Alabama.
(A) the; ____; the; a; a

(B) the; the; a; a; a
(C) a; ____; a; a; a
er
(D) the; ____; the; a; the
t
in
eW
21. ____ Mount Everest is ____ highest peak in ____ Himalaya.
(A) ____; the; ____ in

al
(B) ____; the; a
(C) ____; the; the
-L
(D) ____; a; ____

7
-1
22. ____ Captain said: “it is ____ honor to finally meet ____ whole class of 1999”.
1
84
(A) ____; the; ____

9.
(B) The; an; the

(C) The; a; the
10
(D) ____; a; the

7.
06
4. PLURAL
F
CP
4.1. MAIN RULE
The main rule for the formation of the plural is to add one S to the singular.
A regra principal para a formação do plural é acrescentar um S à forma singular.
Book Books
Girl Girls
21
22
Table Tables
4.2. OTHER SPECIFIC USES
a) For words finishing in CH, X, S, SH, SS or Z, we add ES at the end.
er
Para palavras terminadas em CH, X, S, SH, SS, Z, acrescentamos ES no final.
t
in
eW
WITCH WITCHES
BOX
in
BOXES
al
-L
GAS GASES
7
BUS BUSES
-1
KISS KISSES
1
84
9.
b) For words finishing in O after consonants, we add ES at the end.

10
7.
Para palavras terminadas em O depois de consoantes, acrescentamos ES no final.

06
F
POTATO POTATOES
CP
TOMATO TOMATOES
INNUENDO INNUENDOES
FIQUE LIGADO!
Exceções:
piano → pianos photo → photos negro → negros
soprano → sopranos euro → euro
22
23
c) For words finishing in Y after consonants, we eliminate it and add IES at the end.
Para palavras terminadas em Y depois de consoantes, eliminamo-lo e acrescentamos IES no final.
LADY → LADIES HOBBY → HOBBIES CITY → CITIES
DEFICIENCY → DEFICIENCIES DEMOCRACY → DEMOCRACIES
d) For words finishing in F or FE we add S, but there are exceptions. Most common examples:
Para palavras terminadas em F ou FE, acrescentamos S, mas há exceções. Exemplos mais comuns:
er
WIFE → WIVES LIFE → LIVES
t
in
eW
KNIFE → KNIVES WOLF → WOLVES
CALF → CALVES LEAF → LEAVES

in
al
OAF → LOAVES HALF → HALVES
-L
SHEAF → SHEAVES SELF → SELVES

7
SHELF → SHELVES THIEF → THIEVES

1 -1
84
4.3. COMPOUND NOUNS

9.
10
7.
Generally, only the last word goes to plural when dealing with compound nouns. Examples:
06
Geralmente, apenas a última palavra vai para o plural quando lidamos com nomes compostos. Exemplos:
F
CP
CLASSROOM → CLASSROOMS HOUSEWIFE → HOUSEWIVES
BOOKSHELF → BOOKSHELVES STREETCAR → STREETCARS
When it comes to compound words disjointed by hyphen, the first part of the compound word will go to plural.
This happens because, usually, the first one is the noun and the second one its qualifier.
No que toca a palavras compostas por justaposição (com hífen), a primeira parte da palavra composta irá para o plural. Isto
acontece, porque, normalmente, a primeira é o substantivo e a segunda o seu qualificador.
MOTHER-IN-LAW → MOTHERS-IN-LAW
LOOKER-ON → LOOKERS-ON
23
24
4.4. SOME IRREGULARS
Irregular plurals are totally different from their respective singular words. The only way to know them is by
memorizing. Most relevant examples:
Os plurais irregulares são completamente diferentes dos seus respectivos singulares. A única forma de saber cada um deles é
memorizando-os. Exemplos mais relevantes:
CHILD → CHILDREN FOOT → FEET
MAN → MEN MOUSE → MICE
er
PERSON → PEOPLE WOMAN → WOMEN
t
in
GOOSE → GEESE LOUSE → LICE
eW
TOOTH → TEETH OX → OXEN
in
al
-L
4.5. THE SAME AS IN LATIN OR GREEK

7
-1
There are some specific words that have their plural formed according to Latin and Greek rules. Examples:
1
84
Há algumas palavras específicas que têm os seus plurais formados de acordo com as regras do Latim e do Grego. Exemplos:
9.
10
NUCLEUS → NUCLEI SYLLABUS → SYLLABI

7.
FOCUS → FOCI FUNGUS → FUNGI

06
CACTUS → CACTI or CACTUSES THESIS → THESES

F
CP
CRISIS → CRISES PHENOMENON → PHENOMENA
INDEX → INDICES or INDEXES APPENDIX → APPENDICES
CRITERION → CRITERIA HYPOTHESIS → HYPOTHESES
PAY ATTENTION!
◘ When an expression of quantity is followed by the preposition OF, the

verb ALWAYS agrees with the object. Examples:
Part of the book was interesting. (book – was)
Some of the students were late for class. (students – were)
◘ Expressions of quantity that can be followed by the preposition OF: ALL,

MOST, SOME, HALF, PART.
24
25
◘ There are words in English that are always singular, even though they
might have plural meanings. They are:
• anybody • each (+ noun) • everybody • nobody

• somebody
• anyone • every (+ noun) • everyone • no one

• someone
• anything • something • nothing • something
With these words the verb always comes in the singular form. Examples:
er
Everybody is watching TV.
t
in
There is nobody home.
eW
Is there anything in the fridge?
in
al
-L
4.6. THE SAME AS SINGULAR

7
-1
Some English words are invariable, which means they are the same when in singular or plural forms. Examples:
1
84
Algumas palavras inglesas são invariáveis, o que quer dizer que as suas formas singulares e plurais são as mesmas. Exemplos:
9.
10
7.
DEER → DEER
06
SHEEP → SHEEP
F
SERIES → SERIES
CP
FISH → FISH
TROUT → TROUT
BARRACKS → BARRACKS
SPECIES → SPECIES
INNOCUOUS → INNOCUOUS
FAMOUS → FAMOUS
MAXIMUM → MAXIMUM
25
26
FIQUE LIGADO!
◘ Certas palavras são SEMPRE utilizadas no plural, pelo que não têm singular (e o verbo que as
acompanha também é SEMPRE utilizado no plural). Exemplos: police; clothes; tools; todas as
roupas de duas partes (shorts, pants, slacks, trousers, etc.); objetos formados por duas partes
(glasses, scissors, clippers, etc.).
◘ Nomes de ciências são GERALMENTE apresentados no plural, embora o verbo que os acompanha
seja apresentado no singular. Exemplos: Mathematics, Economics, Physics, Statistics,
Politics, etc.
er
Mathematics is the hardest subject this year.
t
in
I don’t like to think that Politics is a science.
eW
in
◘ Em palavras terminadas em FUL, usualmente acrescenta-se S para obter o plural. Exemplos:
al
handful → handfuls; armful → armfuls.
-L
◘ As palavras NEWS, MEASLES, MUMPS and THE UNITED STATES são usados com o verbo
7
no singular. Exemplos:
1 -1
What is the latest news? News happens in every language.

84
The mumps is very common in several countries. Is that the measles?

9.
10
7.
EXERCISES
06
F
Fill in the blanks with the PLURAL of the words in parentheses.

CP
1. There are several pretty (secretary) ____________at that South African company.
Good (job) ____________ have never been that easy to find.
2. The (saleswoman) ____________ at that department store wear uniforms.
3. These clever young (psychologist) ____________ are working as (assistant) ____________ in that hospital downtown.
4. Many (housewife) ____________ do the shopping once a week.
5. They read several interesting (story) ____________ last night.
26
27
6. Those (fungus) ____________ are very common in the Amazon forest.
7. There are more (girl) _______ than (boy) _______ in most of the (city) ________ of these (country) ________.
8. My husband invited our (parent-in-law) _________ to have dinner.
9. He broke three (tooth) _________ playing volley with these (child) ________.
10. There are more (person) _________ in China than anywhere in the world.
t er
11. (Church) _________ are not as full as (discotheque) ____________.
in
eW
12. (Subway) ____________ and (bus) __________ are two (means) __________of transportation that we can see in almost
all big (town) ___________.
in
al
-L
13. Natural (disaster) _________ are among the most unpredictable (phenomenon) __________ in the planet.
7
-1
14. Their (mother) _________ have always told them: take your (foot) ________ off the table.
1
84
15. When we were (kid) ________, we used to go to music (show) ________ together. Back then, it was normal for (child)
9.
_________ to have (louse) _______.

10
7.
16. I like to go to (forest) ___________ and hunt (deer) _______. My (brother-in-law) ____________ prefer to fish (trout)
06
_________.
F
CP
17. What are the (criterion) __________ to get in those awesome (faculty) ___________?
18. As soon as I knew that these (issue) _________ were being debated in the (conference) ____________, I bought our
(ticket) __________.
19. How many (species) __________ of (fish) ________ are there in the (river) _________ that cross the Northern (state)
__________ of Brazil?
20. We were supposed to type all these (index) ____________ but, unfortunately, we have lost the paper where the
(professor) ____________ have written the necessary (information) ____________.
21. Do their (godfather) ____________ know how many (building) ____________ Mr. Brown owns downtown?
27
28
22. As a matter of fact, the beautiful black (coat) _________ are not as expensive as the yellow (skirt) _____ that our (sister)
_______ sold to the flight (attendant) ___________ that came to the store the day before yesterday.
23. How many (syllabus) _________are there in the (word) __________ (hypothesis) ____________ and (appendix)
___________ ?
24. Her little (daughter) ____________ have English (class) ____________ on (Monday) ____________, (Wednesday)
____________ and (Friday) ____________.
25. I prefer to study French on (Thursday night) ____________.
t er
26. I found many old (photo) ____________ when I was cleaning the (drawer) ____________ in my closet.
in
eW
in
al
5. PRONOUNS
-L
7
5.1 SUBJECT PRONOUNS

1 -1
84
In English, all clauses must have at least one subject and one verb, except for the ones that are presented in the
9.
imperative. Along with the subject of the clause, it is possible to have a noun or a subject pronoun. So, in
10
general terms, we can say that subject pronouns work as the subject of the clause (1), do the action (2), replace
the noun (3) and are placed before the main verb (4).
7.
06
Em inglês, todas as orações têm que ter, pelo menos, um sujeito e um verbo, exceto aquelas que são apresentadas no
imperativo. Juntamente com o sujeito da oração é possível ter um nome ou um pronome sujeito. Por isso, em termos gerais,
F
podemos dizer que os pronomes sujeito funcionam como o sujeito da oração (1), praticam a ação (2), substituem o nome (3) e
CP
são colocados antes do verbo principal (4).
The subject pronouns are: I, YOU, HE, SHE, IT, WE, YOU and THEY.
Examples:
Mary and Paul = THEY
You and I = WE
You and your sister = YOU
The cat = IT
The cat and dog = THEY
Mary = SHE
Paul = HE
28
29
FIQUE LIGADO!
IT é usado para substituir BABY, CHILD e KID quando o sexo não for mencionado.
Exemplo: The kidis playing. = It is playing.
SHE é usado para substituir nomes de navios e, por vezes, de carros.
Exemplos:The Bahia Tropical is a great ship. = She is a great ship.
The BMW is the fastest car I’ve ever seen. = She’s the fastest car I’ve ever seen.
t er
in
HE, SHE são usados para animais de estimação, quando estes são designados pelo seu nome
próprio.
eW
Exemplo:My little dog, Bob, is very special. = He is very special.
in
al
-L
5.2. OBJECT PRONOUNS

7
-1
The object pronouns work as the object of the clause, as they are the ones that suffer the action. They are
1
placed after main verbs and prepositions.

84
Os pronomes objeto funcionam como o objeto da oração, uma vez que são eles que sofrem a ação. Eles são colocados depois
9.
de verbos principais e preposições.

10
7.
The object pronouns are: ME, YOU, HIM, HER, IT, US, YOU and THEM.
06
F
Examples:
CP
I love him.
Bob went to the movies with us.
I gave her my best CD.
Let’s talk to them.
5.3. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS (AND ADJECTIVES)
The English language defines two different categories of demonstrative pronouns: singular and plural.
A língua inglesa define duas categorias distintas de pronomes demonstrativos: singulares e plurais.
The singular demonstrative pronouns are: THIS and THAT.
The plural demonstrative pronouns are: THESE and THOSE.
29
30
We use THIS and THESE in the place of people, animals and/or objects that are NEAR the person who is talking.
Nós usamos ESTE, ESTA, ISTO e ESTES, ESTAS no lugar de pessoas, animais e/ou objetos que estão PERTO da pessoa que
está falando.
On the other hand, we use THAT and THOSE in the place of people, animals and/or objects that are FAR from the
person who is talking.
Por outro lado, utilizamos AQUELE, AQUELA, ESSE, ESSA, AQUILO, ISSO e AQUELAS, AQUELAS, ESSES, ESSAS no lugar de
pessoas, animais e/ou objetos que estão LONGE da pessoa que está falando.
Other demonstrative pronouns (and/or adjectives) are SUCH, THE ONE and THE ONES.
er
Outros pronomes demonstrativos (e/ou adjetivos) são TAL, TAIS, TÃO, TANTO, O QUAL, A QUAL, OS QUAIS, AS QUAIS.
t
in
eW
Examples:
I have never seen such beautiful kids. in

al
-L
These books are the ones that I told you about.

7
-1
5.4. QUANTIFIERS (QUANTITATIVE ADJECTIVES)

1
84
The quantifiers can be divided in two major categories: the countable ones and the uncountable ones. There are
9.
some quantifiers that can be both countable and uncountable.

10
Os quantificadores podem ser divididos em duas grandes categorias: os contáveis e os incontáveis. Existem alguns
7.
quantificadores que podem ser, simultaneamente, contáveis e incontáveis.

06
F
Countable quantifiers: MANY, FEW, A FEW and LOTS OF.

CP
Uncountable quantifiers: MUCH, LITTLE, A LITTLE and A GREAT DEAL OF.
Both: A LOT OF and A LOT (this one is typically used at the end of the sentences).
Examples:
You have much money, because you have many dollars.
I have little money, because I have few dollars.
They have a few books, but they are enough for their studies.
He has a little money, but it is enough to buy the tickets.
I have a lot of friends. / I have a lot of money.
She eats a lot, because she spends a great deal of time at home.
My wife likes my family a lot. = My wife likes my family very much.
There are lots of students at that university.
30
31
The word money is uncountable. It is impossible to think about it like a countable word, even in Portuguese. We
can’t say: “This car costs a thousand moneys”.
A palavra dinheiro é incontável. É impossível pensar nela como uma palavra contável, mesmo em português. Nós não podemos
dizer: “Este carro custa mil dinheiros”.
Dollar (US$), Real (R$), Euro (€) or any other currency or monetary unit are considered countable, including in
the Portuguese language. We are used to say, for example: “This car costs ten thousand dollars”.
Dólar (US$), Real (R$), Euro (€) ou qualquer outra unidade monetária são consideradas contáveis, até mesmo na língua
portuguesa. Nós estamos acostumados a dizer, por exemplo: “Este carro custa dez mil dólares”.
5.5. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS AND POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES
t er
in
The possessive pronouns show who or what the noun possesses. Nevertheless, possessive adjectives and
eW
possessive pronouns don’t have the same usage.
in
Os pronomes possessivos mostram quem ou o quê o nome possui. No entanto, pronomes e adjetivos possessivos não têm a
al
mesma utilização.
-L
Possessive Pronouns: MINE, YOURS, HIS, HERS, ITS, OURS, YOURS and THEIRS.
7
1 -1
These pronouns will NEVER come before a noun (This car is mine). They are used to avoid the repetition of a
84
noun already present in the sentence (Your book is red and mine is blue). It is also possible to use them after a
noun + OF (He is a friend of mine).
9.
10
Estes pronomes NUNCA virão antes de um nome (Este carro é meu). Eles são utilizados para evitar a repetição de um nome já
presente na frase (O seu livro é vermelho e o meu é azul). Também é possível utilizá-los depois de um nome + DE (Ele é um
7.
amigo meu) (amigo meu = amigo + de + mim).

06
F
Possessive Adjectives: MY, YOUR, HIS, HER, ITS, OUR, YOUR and THEIR.
CP
These adjectives ALWAYS come before a noun (This is my car). They agree with the owner, not with the
ownership (Our dictionary is thicker than your encyclopedia).
Estes adjetivos SEMPRE aparecem antes de um nome (Este é meu carro). Eles concordam com o possuidor (dono), não com a
posse (propriedade) (Nosso dicionário é mais espesso que a sua enciclopédia).
5.6. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
In English, the reflexive pronouns are commonly used to substitute the word ALONE (He’s home by himself), or
to mention the subject twice (The man shot himself), underlining and emphasizing something or someone
previously presented (The car itself was undamaged).
Em inglês, os pronomes reflexivos são usualmente utilizados para substituir a palavra sozinho(a)(os)(as) (Ele está em casa
sozinho) (sozinho = por ele mesmo = com ele próprio), ou para mencionar o sujeito duas vezes (O homem atirou nele próprio),
sublinhando ou enfatizando algo ou alguém previamente apresentado (O carro, ele mesmo, estava intacto).
31
32
Reflexive Pronouns: MYSELF, YOURSELF, HIMSELF, HERSELF, ITSELF
OURSELVES, YOURSELVES and THEMSELVES
Examples:
The dog is eating by itself.
My parents-in-law are traveling by themselves.
I, myself, shall do the work.
We are talking to ourselves.
She burnt herself.
t er
in
5.7. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS (AND ADVERBS)
eW
in
Herein under, we have a summarized presentation of the main interrogative pronouns and adverbs used in the
al
English language.
-L
Aqui abaixo, temos uma apresentação resumida dos principais pronomes e advérbios usados na língua inglesa.
7
1 -1
84
QUESTIONS ANSWERS
9.
WHY = POR QUÊ?

10
Why do you like to study English? Because it is a beautiful language!

7.
WHEN = QUANDO?
06
When were you born? I was born in April, 1983.

F
WHERE = ONDE?
CP
Where do you live? I live in Brasília.
WHAT = QUAL? (usado para idéias em geral)
What do you want to do this weekend? I want to play volleyball.
WHICH = QUAL? (usado para idéias específicas, quando a escolha é restrita)
Which kind of books do you prefer to read? I prefer to read novels.
WHO = QUEM? (função: sujeito)
Who is that man? That man is my husband.
WHOM = QUEM? (função: objeto)
With whom does Cathy play tennis? She usually plays tennis with her sister.
WHOSE = DE QUEM?
Whose purse is that? That is Susan’s purse.
WHAT _______ LIKE? = COMO? (características físicas e personalidade) (+descritivo)
What is your brother like? He is younger, taller and funnier than I am.
32
33
What is the weather like? It is sunny, hot and very dry.
HOW = COMO? (meio de transporte e condição) (+sintético)
How do you go to school? I go to school by bus.
How are you? I’m fine, thanks!
HOW MUCH = QUANTO? (para substantivos incontáveis)
How much does this dress cost? This dress costs a lot of money.
How much is this dress? I guess it is very expensive.
HOW MANY = QUANTO(S)? (para substantivos contáveis)
How many TV sets do you have at home? I have three TV sets at home.
How many eggs are there in the fridge? I think there are at least seven.
er
HOW LONG = HÁ QUANTO TEMPO?
t
in
How long have you lived here? I have lived here for fifteen years.
eW
How long have you been studying English? I’ve been studying English since 2002.
HOW WELL = QUÃO BEM?

in
al
How well do you play basketball? Oh, not so good! Honestly, I suck on this.
-L
How well does she drive? I think she drives pretty well!
HOW GOOD = QUÃO BOM?

7
-1
How good are you at sports? I’m awesome!

1
How good is he at playing snooker? He says he plays damn good!

84
HOW FAR = QUÃO LONGE?

9.
How far is your house from mine? I think is about 6 km.

10
How far are we from school? We are almost there.

7.
How far is their apartment? It is near that big mall down the street.
06
HOW BIG = QUÃO GRANDE?

F
How big is Amazonas? I read that it is the biggest state in Brazil.

CP
How big is our farm? It has more than 5 square kilometers (km2).
HOW HIGH = QUÃO ALTO?
How high is Mount Everest? Mount Everest is 8,848 meters high.

How high are you? I’m 1,83 cm (more than 6 feet) high.
HOW DEEP = QUÃO PROFUNDO?
How deep is Grand Canyon? It attains a depth of over a mile (6,000 feet).
How deep is that pool? It is more than 5 meters deep.
HOW OFTEN = QUÃO FREQUENTE / COM QUE FREQUÊNCIA?
How often do you travel on business? About twice a month.

How often do you go to church? I go there every single weekend.
33
34
EXERCISES
Complete the following sentences with the possessive adjective that refers to the subject of the sentence.
1. She knows ________________ lesson well. I also know ________________ lesson well.
2. Helen likes _______________________________________________ English class a lot.
3. He does ______________________________________ homework on the bus every day.
4. You always get good grades on _________________________________________ tests.
5. Both girls prepare __________________________________________ lessons very well.
er
6. The black cat loves ____________ food. Mary and I do __________ homework together.
t
in
7. Joel drives to work in ___________________________________________________ car.
eW
8. Grace writes a letter to _________________________________ aunt every single week.
in
9. 9. The dog wags __________________ tail when it sees ___________________ master.
al
-L
10. Mark and Judy like _______________________________________ English teacher a lot.

7
-1
Choose the correct form.

1
84
9.
1. I often see (they, them) on the bus.

10
2. She lives near (we, us).

7.
3. (We, us) always walk to school together.

06
4. He teaches (we, us) English.

F
CP
5. She sits near (I, me) during the lesson.
6. I know both of (they, them) well.
7. I always speak with (he, him) in English.
8. What is the matter with (he, him) today?
9. He explains the lesson to (we, us) each morning.
10. There are some letters here for you and (I, me).
Substitute the word or words in italic for the correct object pronoun.
1. I see Mr. Smith on the bus every morning.
I see him on the bus every morning.
34
35
2. I sit near Grace and Frank during the lesson.
_____________________________________________________________________________
3. All the boys like Helen very much.
_____________________________________________________________________________
4. I often see you and your sister in the school cafeteria.
_____________________________________________________________________________
5. He always goes to the movies with his parents.
_____________________________________________________________________________
er
6. I know both boys very well.
t
in
_____________________________________________________________________________
eW
7. Frank always waits for John and me after the lesson.
in
al
_____________________________________________________________________________
-L
8. He drives Helen and Grace to school every morning.

7
_____________________________________________________________________________
1 -1
9. I sit next to Henry.

84
_____________________________________________________________________________
9.
10
10. My wife and I always have dinner with Mary and her husband on Friday nights.
7.
_____________________________________________________________________________
06
F
In the following sentences, substitute the words in italic for the correct possessive pronoun.
CP
1. These seats are our seats.
2. These seats are ours.
3. This umbrella is her umbrella.
_____________________________________________________________________________
4. These pencils are your pencils.
_____________________________________________________________________________
5. That fountain pen is my fountain pen.
_____________________________________________________________________________
6. That overcoat is his overcoat.
_____________________________________________________________________________
35
36
7. Is this pack of cigarettes your pack of cigarettes or is it William’s?
_____________________________________________________________________________
8. This is my dog’s leash.
_____________________________________________________________________________
9. Are these our pants or are they their pants?
_____________________________________________________________________________
10. Which house do you prefer: my house, her house or his house?
_____________________________________________________________________________
er
11. Will they go to their farm or to our farm next weekend?
t
in
_____________________________________________________________________________
eW
in
al
Complete the following sentences with a possessive adjective or a possessive pronoun.
-L
1. William lost _____________________ pen. Will you please lend him ______________________?
7
-1
2. I arrived in time for _______________ class, but Helen was late for ______________________.
1
84
3. They have ____________________ traveling methods, and we have ______________________.

9.
4. We naturally prefer _________________ methods, and they naturally prefer _______________.

10
5. I’ve found _____________________ notebook, but John wasn’t able to find _______________.
7.
06
6. They think that _________ home is the prettiest one in the neighborhood, but we prefer _____.
7. He drives to work in _____________________ car, and she drives to work in _______________.

F
CP
8. Tell him not to forget to bring __________tennis racket, and don’t forget to bring __________.
9. They swim in ____________________ pool, and we swim in ____________________________.
10. We prefer _______________________________ car to _______________________________.
Complete the sentences below with the correct reflexive pronoun:
1. The little girl hurt ________________________________________ when she fell off the stairs.
2. We protect __________________________________________ from the rain with an umbrella.
3. The girl taught ______________________________________________________ how to sew.
4. Both boys taught ___________________________________________________ how to swim.
5. We all enjoyed ___________________________________________ at the concert last night.
36
37
6. The children amuse _______________________________________________ with the kitten.
7. The policeman shot _________________________________________________ by accident.
8. Did you enjoy ______________________________________________at the party last night?
9. You will cut _____________________________________ with that knife if you are not careful.
10. I once cut ______________________________________________ badly with the same knife.
Substitute the word alone for the preposition by plus the respective reflexive pronoun.
er
1. He went for a walk in the park alone.
t
in
________________________________________________________________________________.
eW
2. They made that long trip through the woods alone.
in
________________________________________________________________________________.
al
-L
3. I don’t like to go to the movies alone.
________________________________________________________________________________.
7
-1
4. Helen, however, prefers to go to the movies alone.

1
84
________________________________________________________________________________.
9.
5. John likes to take long walks in the woods alone.

10
________________________________________________________________________________.
7.
06
6. The old couple lives alone in a cottage in the woods.

F
________________________________________________________________________________.
CP
7. John works alone in a small office.
________________________________________________________________________________.
8. My aunt, although she is rather rich, prefers toliveone.
________________________________________________________________________________.
9. Do you like to eat alone?
________________________________________________________________________________.
10. I went to the opera alone last night.
________________________________________________________________________________.
37
38
6. NOUNS
A noun is a word used to name a person, an animal, a place, a thing, a country, a region and/or any abstract
idea, among others.
Um substantivo ou nome é uma palavra utilizada para nomear uma pessoa, um animal, um local, uma coisa, um país, uma
região e/ou qualquer ideia abstrata, entre outras.
6.1. GENRE
t er
When it comes to genre, we can divide the nouns in two distinct groups or families: PROPER NOUNS (specific
in
names of people, animals, places or things) and COMMON NOUNS (general names).
eW
No que diz respeito ao gênero, podemos dividir os substantivos em dois grupos ou famílias distintas: NOMES PRÓPRIOS (nomes
in
específicos de pessoas, animais, lugares ou coisas) e NOMES COMUNS (nomes genéricos ou generalistas).
al
-L
Examples:
7
-1
Is he Mark? No, he’s Philip.

1
I’d love to spend my vacation in a desert island.

84
9.
That chair is green. = That is a green chair.

10
My wife is working a lot.

7.
06
6.2. CATEGORY
F
CP
Regarding their category, names can be classified according to the four following groups: COUNTABLE NOUNS,
UNCOUNTABLE NOUNS, COLLECTIVE NOUNS and ABSTRACT NOUNS.
Relativamente à sua categoria, os nomes podem ser classificados e enquadrados em um dos quatro grupos seguintes: NOMES
CONTÁVEIS, NOMES INCONTÁVEIS, NOMES COLETIVOS e NOMES ABSTRATOS.
COUNTABLE NOUNS
Examples:
He has four books.
They’ve lived in two continents.
She’s washing a few dishes.
That businessman owns a dozen buildings in this city.
38
39
He drank many glasses of red wine.
UNCOUNTABLE NOUNS
Examples:
I need to drink much water everyday.
There’s only some air inside.
They need loads of energy to run the marathon.
That hospital is in need of much blood.
er
Did you earn a little money?
t
in
eW
COLLECTIVE NOUNS
in
al
Examples:
-L
The jury is deciding today.

7
-1
My family roots for the best team.

1
84
The farmer is concerned about his herd.

9.
Are you willing to join that committee?

10
That is an excellent class.

7.
06
ABSTRACT NOUNS
F
CP
Examples:
This wine gives me a sense of warmth.
We are still waiting for justice to be done.
Self-confidence is essential to achieve success.
The whole world is seeking for peace.
I’m worried about my parents’ health.
6.3. FORMS
Concerning its forms, a noun can appear as a subject, a possessive or an object.
No que toca às suas formas, um nome pode aparecer como sujeito, possessivo ou objeto.
39
40
As a subject: The English teacher is tall.
As an object: He chose the English teacher.
As a possessive: The English teacher’s car is green.
7. ADJECTIVES
Adjectives are words used to describe, qualify and/or modify nouns or pronouns. In English, adjectives are
ALWAYS used in the singular form – they NEVER vary. They usually come BEFORE the subject that they are
modifying, but always AFTER some connecting verbs.
t er
Adjetivos são palavras utilizadas para descrever, qualificar e/ou modificar nomes ou pronomes. Em inglês, os adjetivos são
in
SEMPRE usados na forma singular – ELES NUNCA VARIAM. Geralmente aparecem ANTES do sujeito que estão modificando,
eW
mas sempre DEPOIS de alguns verbos conectores.
in
These connecting verbs are: TO BE, TO SEEM, TO APPEAR, TO SOUND, TO TASTE, TO FEEL, TO SMELL, TO
al
BECOME, TO GET and TO LOOK.
-L
Estes verbos conectores são:SER/ESTAR, PARECER, APARECER, SOAR, SABER (ter sabor/gosto de), SENTIR, CHEIRAR,
TORNAR-SE, CONSEGUIR e OLHAR.
7
-1
They are ALWAYS used AFTER indefinite pronouns, such as:SOMEONE; SOMEBODY; SOMETHING; SOMEWHERE;
1
ANYBODY; ANYONE; NO ONE; NOBOBY; ANYTHING; NOTHING; ANYWHERE; and NOWHERE.

84
Eles são SEMPRE utilizados DEPOIS de pronomes indefinidos, tais como: ALGUÉM; ALGO; ALGUM LUGAR; QUALQUER
9.
UM/NINGUÉM; NINGUÉM; QUALQUER COISA/NADA; QUALQUER LUGAR; LUGAR NENHUM.

10
Examples:
7.
06
She is beautiful. In this room there’s nobody healthy.

F
She smells nice. She hasn’t become a cool person.

CP
The baby looks sick. They seem such nice people.
7.1. COMPARATIVE DEGREE
Whenever the adjective has one or two syllabi (short adjective), we add ER to it.
Sempre que o adjetivo tem uma ou duas sílabas (até 7 letras, inclusive) (adjetivo curto). Acrescentamos ER ao dito adjetivo.
Cold + ER = Colder This city is colder than Rio.
Bright + ER = Brighter This yellow is brighter than that one.
Cheap + ER = Cheaper This dress is cheaper than that one.
Old + ER = Older You are older than my brother.
40
41
Whenever the adjective has more than two syllabi (long adjective), we put MORE or LESS before the adjective,
depending on the comparison that we intend to establish.
Sempre que o adjetivo tem mais de duas sílabas (oito ou mais letras) (adjetivo longo), colocamos MAIS ou MENOS antes do
adjetivo, dependendo da comparação que pretendemos estabelecer.
MORE/LESS + Difficult = More difficult / Less difficult
That lesson was more difficult than this one.
These exercises are less difficult than those ones.
er
MORE/LESS + Beautiful = More beautiful / Less beautiful
t
in
eW
My house’s garden is more beautiful than yours.
His wife’s dress is less beautiful than this one.

in
al
MORE/LESS + Expensive = More expensive / Less expensive
-L
This Ferrari is more expensive than theirs.

7
Her apartment is less expensive than mine.

1-1
84
The adjectives GOOD, WELL, BAD and FAR have distinct comparative forms, which means they are exceptions
9.
that we need to memorize:

10
Os adjetivos BOM, BEM, MAU/RUIM e LONGE/DISTANTE têm formas comparativas distintas, o que quer dizer que são exceções
7.
que precisamos memorizar:

06
F
CP
Good/well → Better Bad → Worse Far → Further
This book is better than the last one I read.
The French red wine is worse than this one.
Your apartment is further than ours.
NOTE that all comparatives are followed by THAN.
OBSERVE que todos os comparativos são seguidos por DO QUE.
7.2. SUPERLATIVE DEGREE
Whenever the adjective has one or two syllabi (short adjective), we add EST to it.
Sempre que o adjetivo tem uma ou duas sílabas (até 7 letras, inclusive) (adjetivo curto). Acrescentamos EST ao dito adjetivo.
41
42
Cold + EST = Coldest This city is the coldest in Brazil.
Bright + EST = Brightest This yellow is the brightest one.
Cheap + EST = Cheapest This dress is the cheapest one.
Old + EST = Oldest You are the oldest boy in the classroom.
Whenever the adjective has more than two syllabi (long adjective), we put MOST or LEAST before the adjective,
depending on the comparison that we intend to establish.
Sempre que o adjetivo tem mais de duas sílabas (oito ou mais letras) (adjetivo longo), colocamos MAIS ou MENOS antes do
adjetivo, dependendo da comparação que pretendemos estabelecer.
er
MOST/LEAST + Difficult = Most difficult / Least difficult
t
in
eW
That lesson was the most difficult one.
These exercises are the least difficult ones.

in
al
-L
MOST/LEAST + Beautiful = Most beautiful / Least beautiful

7
My house’s garden is the most beautiful in the city.

1 -1
His wife’s dress is the least beautiful in the party.

84
9.
10
MOST/LEAST + Expensive = Most expensive / Least expensive

7.
This Ferrari is the most expensive in the country.

06
Her apartment is the least expensive in the building.

F
CP
The adjectives GOOD, WELL, BAD and FAR have distinct superlative forms, which means they are exceptions
that we need to memorize:
Os adjetivos BOM, BEM, MAU/RUIM e LONGE/DISTANTE têm formas comparativas distintas, o que quer dizer que são exceções
que precisamos memorizar:
Good/well → Best Bad → Worst Far → Furthest
This book is the best I’ve ever read.
This French red wine is the worst I’ve ever had.
Your farm is the furthest I know.
42
43
NOTE that all superlatives are preceded by THE.
OBSERVE que todos os superlativos são precedidos por O/A (artigo definido).
Irregular Comparative and Superlative Forms
Good or well better best
Bad or ill worse worst
Much
Many more most
er
Some
t
in
eW
Little Less least
Far further in furthest

al
-L
7
EXERCISES
1 -1
Complete the sentences using the comparative form of the adjectives between brackets.
84
9.
10
1. He is _____________________________________ (young) ________________________ I am.

7.
2. Mr. Smith is much ______________________ (old) __________________________ I expected.

06
3. Chicago is _______________________________ (big) ____________________________ Paris.

F
4. This book is ___________________________ (good) ________________ the last one we read.

CP
5. This winter the weather is ___________________ (bad) _________________ it was last winter.
6. This exercise is ________________________ (easy) ________________________ the last one.
7. This metal is _____________________________ (valuable) ________________________ gold.
8. Jane is _____________________________ (attractive) ________________________ her sister.
9. Today the weather is _____________________ (warm) __________________ it was yesterday.
10. John’s car was much _________________________(expensive) ___________________ mine.
11. This contract is _________________________(satisfactory) ____________ the previous one.
12. This street is even ____________________ (wide) __________________________ Broadway.
13. These exercises are ________________(difficult) ____________________ some of the others.
14. The climate of Caracas is ___________________ (good) _______________ that of Maracaibo.
43
44
15. John is much _____________________ (clever) ___________________________ his brother.
16. This summer is _____________________ (hot) ___________________________ last summer.
17. Her sweater is ____________________________ (pretty) ________________________ yours.
18. Our garden used to be _____________________ (large) _________________________ theirs.
Complete the sentences using the superlative form of the adjectives between brackets.
1. Grace is _______________________ (old) girl in class.
er
2. This is ___________________ (expensive) book that I own.
t
in
3. George is ___________________ (bad) student in the class.
eW
4. The Herald is ______________________ (important) newspaper in town.
5. Tokyo is ___________ (large) city in the world today. in

al
6. He is _______________ (ambitious) boy I’ve ever known.
-L
7. Helen was ________________________ (attractive) girl at the party.

7
-1
8. She wore ____________ (pretty) dress.

1
84
9. She is __________________ (intelligent) person I’ve ever met.

9.
10. The story you told was _________________ (funny) of all.

10
11. January is ___________ (cold) month of the year.

7.
06
12. Which is __________ (good) route from Miami to New York?
13. The Pacific is _____________ (large) ocean in the world.

F
CP
14. The Everest is _____________ (high) mountain in the world.
15. This chair is ____________________ (comfortable) chair in the whole house.
16. These exercises are ____________ (difficult) in the whole book.
17. You’re _____________ (tall) boy around.
18. Back on those days, my mother was _______________ (good) cook
8. ORDER AND CATEGORY OF ADJECTIVES
According to their order and category, we can classify the English adjectives following the pattern presented
below.
De acordo com a sua ordem e categoria, podemos classificar os adjetivos ingleses seguindo o padrão apresentado no quadro
abaixo.
44
45
ter
in
eW
in
al
-L
7
EXERCISES
1 -1
Organize the sentences correctly according to the adjective categories and orders:
84
9.
10
1. this – small – cheap – a – apartment – is – old

7.
This is a cheap small old apartment,

06
2. little – daughter – Italian – this – beautiful – my – young – girl – smart – is

F
CP
____________________________________________________________________________
3. tall – American – that – round-faced – boy – well-groomed – has – arrived – just
_____________________________________________________________________________
4. big – not – their – pyramidal – far – wooden – cottage – so – is – brownish – away
____________________________________________________________________________
5. marvelous – German – has – Porsche – sold – your – enormous – been – classic – silver
____________________________________________________________________________
Make questions for the following answers:
1. This T-shirt costs US$45.
_________________________________________________
45
46
2. There are three bedrooms in my apartment.
_________________________________________________
3. These pants are US$90.
_________________________________________________
4. It takes me about 20 minutes by bus.
_________________________________________________
5. My girlfriend is tall dark-haired with beautiful blue eyes.
_________________________________________________
er
6. My parents-in-law usually call me every other weekend.
t
in
_________________________________________________
eW
in
al
9. VERB TO BE
-L
7
-1
9.1. PRESENT
1
84
9.
AFFIRMATIVE NEGATIVE INTERROGATIVE

10
I am / I’m I am not / I’m not Am I?

7.
You are / You’re You are not / You aren’t Are you?
06
He is / He’s He is not / He isn’t Is he?

F
She is / She’s She is not / She isn’t Is she?

CP
It is / It’s It is not / It isn’t Is it?
We are / We’re We are not / We aren’t Are we?
You are / You’re You are not / You aren’t Are you?
They are / They’re They are not / They aren’t Are they?
9.2. PAST
I was I was not / I wasn’t Was I?
You were You were not / You weren’t Were you?
He was He was not / He wasn’t Was he?
She was She was not / She wasn’t Was she?
46
47
It was It was not / It wasn’t Was It?
We were We were not / We weren’t Were we?
You were You were not / You weren’t Were you?
They were They were not / They weren’t Were they?
9.3. FUTURE
I will be I will not be / I won’t be Will I be?
ter
You will be You will not be / You won’t be Will you be?
in
He will be He will not be / He won’t be Will he be?
eW
She will be She will not be / She won’t be Will she be?
It will be in
It will not be / It won’t be Will it be?
al
We will be We will not be / We won’t be Will we be?
-L
You will be You will not be / You won’t be Will you be?
7
They will be They will not be / They won’t be Will they be?
1 -1
84
Note that the verb TO BE doesn’t need an auxiliary verb to form negative and/or interrogative clauses. Pay
9.
attention to the following examples:

10
Repare que o verbo SER/ESTAR não precisa de verbo auxiliar para formar orações negativas e/ou interrogativas. Preste atenção
7.
aos seguintes exemplos:

06
F
Eu sou brasileiro. → I am Brazilian.

CP
Eu não sou brasileiro. → I am not Brazilian.
Eu sou brasileiro? → Am I Brazilian?
Eu não sou brasileiro? → Am I not Brazilian?
The same doesn’t happen to any other regular or irregular verb. In order to check this difference, take a look at
the sentences herein under:
O mesmo não acontece com qualquer outro verbo regular ou irregular. De modo a confirmar esta diferença, olhe para as frases
abaixo:
Eu moro no Brasil. → I live in Brazil.
Eu não moro no Brasil. → I don’t live in Brazil.
Eu moro no Brasil? → Do I live in Brazil?
47
48
Eu não moro no Brasil? → Don’t I live in Brazil?
10. PRESENT TENSE
Within the Present there are four different tenses. They are presented herein after.
Dentro do Presente há quatro tempos verbais distintos. Eles são apresentados em seguida.
10.1. SIMPLE PRESENT CONTINUOUS
t er
in
It is used to actions that are happening at this precise moment or, in other words, right when the speech is
eW
being produced. The Simple Present Continuous tense always uses the verb TO BE as auxiliary. In the following
chart you will find the proper way to make sentences:
in
O Presente Simples Contínuo é usado para ações que estão acontecendo neste preciso momento ou, em otras palavras,
al
exatamente quando o discurso está sendo produzido. Sempre utiliza o verbo SER/ESTAR como auxiliar. No quadro seguinte
-L
você encontrará a maneira correta de construir frases:

7
SENTENCES HOW TO CONSTRUCT EXAMPLES

1 -1
pronoun or noun + to be + She is working now.

84
AFFIRMATIVE main verb + ING + complement They are studying upstairs.

9.
You are talking smoothly.

10
pronoun or noun + to be + not She isn’t working now.

7.
NEGATIVE + main verb + ING + They aren’t studying upstairs.

06
complement
You aren’t talking smoothly.
F
CP
Is she working now?

to be + pronoun or noun + Yes, she is.
main verb + ING + complement No, she isn’t.
INTERROGATIVE Are they studying right now?
Yes, they are.
No, they aren’t.
Main Adverbs: now; this moment; at this moment; at this exact moment; right now; right away, etc…
10.2. SIMPLE PRESENT
It is used to actions that happen frequently or, in other words, in a repeated general manner. The Simple
Present tense requires the verb TO DO as auxiliary. Remember that the auxiliary forms are not used in
affirmative sentences. The said affirmative sentences have their main verb in its base form (infinitive form
48
49
without TO) and, when in the third singular person (HE, SHE or IT), we use the base form plus an S. Proper way
to construct sentences:
O Presente Simples é usado para ações que acontecem frequentemente ou, em outras palavras, de um modo repetitivo.
Sempre requer o verbo FAZER como auxiliar para a formação de orações negativas e interrogativas. Lembre-se que o verbo
auxiliar não é usado em orações afirmativas. Estas têm o verbo principal na sua forma base (infinitivo sem o TO) e, quando
está conjugado na terceira pessoa do singular (ELE, ELA ou COISA/OBJETO), usamos a forma base acrescida de S. Forma
correta de construir frases:
I/YOU/WE/THEY
noun or pronoun + main verb + We work on the weekend.
er
AFFIRMATIVE complement
t
in
HE/SHE/IT She works on the weekend.
eW
noun or pronoun + main verb + He watches TV every night.
s/es/ies + complement
in She studies every day.
al
noun or pronoun + don’t / We don’t work on the weekend.
-L
NEGATIVE doesn’t + main verb + She doesn’t work on the

complement weekend.
7
1 -1
Do you work on the weekend?

84
INTERROGATIVE Do/Does + noun or pronoun + Does she work on weekend?

9.
main verb + complement

10
7.
Main Adverbs: always; usually; generally; never; often; sometimes; regularly; rarely; seldom; once; twice; three
06
times; four times, etc…

F
CP
10.3. PRESENT PERFECT
It is used to describe an action that: (1) happened at an unknown time in the past; (2) happened many times in
the recent past; (3) started in the past and continues happening until now; (4) has just finished a few moments
before the speech was produced. The Present Perfect tense uses the verb TO HAVE as auxiliary. Proper way to
make sentences:
O Presente Perfeito é usado para descrever uma ação que: (1) aconteceu em um período não determinado do passado, ou
seja, em um tempo anterior indefinido; (2) aconteceu diversas vezes no passado recente; (3) começou no passado e continua
acontecendo no momento do discurso; (4) acabou de terminar pouco tempo antes do discurso ser produzido. Utiliza o verbo
TER como auxiliar. Forma correta de construir frases:
49
50
pronoun or noun + have / has + past I have studied English since 2005.
AFFIRMATIVE participle of the main verb + She has already gone out.
complement
It has eaten recently.
pronoun or noun + haven’t / hasn’t + I haven’t studied English since 2005.

NEGATIVE past participle of the main verb + She hasn’t gone out yet.
complement
It hasn’t eaten recently.
have / has + pronoun or noun + past Have you studied English since 2005?
INTERROGATIVE participle of the main verb + Has she gone out?
er
complement
AFFIRMATIVE Has it eaten recently?
t
in
eW
haven’t / hasn’t + pronoun or noun + Haven’t you studied English since 2005?
INTERROGATIVE past participle of the main verb + Hasn’t she gone out yet?
NEGATIVE
complement
in Hasn’t it eaten recently?
al
-L
7
Main Adverbs: lately, recently, for a long time; in the last few days; in the last few weeks, in the last few
-1
months; just; already; yet; etc…

1
84
9.
10.4. PRESENT PERFECT CONTINUOUS

10
7.
It is used to describe an action that started in the past and is continuously happening until now. The Present
Perfect Continuous tense is very similar to the Present Perfect tense, although they can be perfectly
06
distinguished from each other, given the fact that the first’s action happens continuatively. The Present Perfect
Continuous tense uses the verb TO HAVE as auxiliary. Proper way to make sentences:
F
CP
O Presente Perfeito Contínuo é usado para descrever uma ação que começou no passado e está acontecendo continuamente
até ao momento do discurso. É muito similar ao Presente Perfeito, embora possam ser perfeitamente diferenciados um do
outro, dado o fato que a ação do primeiro acontece continuamente. Utiliza o verbo TER como auxiliar. Forma correta de
construir frases:
noun or pronoun + have / has + been They have been studying English since
AFFIRMATIVE + main verb + ING + complement 2005.
She has been going out.
noun or pronoun + haven’t / hasn’t + They haven’t been studying English since
NEGATIVE been + main verb + ING + complement 2005.
She hasn’t been going out.
50
51
have / has + noun or pronoun + been Have they been studying English since
INTERROGATIVE + main verb + ING + complement 2005?
AFFIRMATIVE Has she been going out?
haven’t / hasn’t + noun or pronoun + Haven’t they been studying English since
INTERROGATIVE been + main verb + ING + 2005?
complement Hasn’t she been going out?
NEGATIVE
Main Adverbs: for; since; over the last few days; during the last couple of months; over the last few years, over
and over again; etc…
t er
in
EXERCISES
eW
Choose the answer that correctly completes the sentences below.
in
al
-L
1. She ___________________ and Paul _________________ at the present moment.

7
(A) is work; study

-1
(B) working; studying

1
(C) are working; is studying

84
(D) is working; is studying

9.
10
2. They _______________ this for 10 years, but unfortunately they ________________ yet.
7.
(A) hasn’t been trying; has get

06
(B) have been trying; haven’t gotten it

(C) have try; have been getting
F
(D) haven’t tried; are getting it

CP
3. That cute little boy that ______________ is my son. A boy that always ___________ has very good health.
(A) is playing; plays

(B) have been playing; play
(C) lays; playing
(D) have played, played
4. His dream is to travel abroad but he _________________ enough money to do it. He will only travel, if someone
_________________ him money.
(A) don’t have; lend

(B) didn’t have; borrowed
(C) doesn’t have; lends
(D) doesn’t have; borrows
51
52
5. Nowadays, she ________________ about how to _____________ this to ____________.
(A) is thinking; say; you

(B) knows; say; his
(C) knows; say; you
(D) none of the above
6. He ____________ to ______________ farm every first Monday in the month.
(A) travels; his

(B) is traveling; him
er
(C) travels; him
has traveling; his
t
(D)
in
eW
7. For a long time, I ____________________ such a great success.
(A) have
in
al
(B) haven’t had
-L
(C) has been having

(D) haven’t having
7
1 -1
8. He has bought that incredible black car, _______________?

84
(A) doesn’t he
9.
(B) has he
10
(C) hasn’t he
7.
(D) is he
06
9. Since I was born, my mom and I _______________________ in the same city.

F
CP
(A) have been living

(B) have live
(C) haven’t been live
(D) none of the above
10. I don’t know where John and ____________ brother ____________ now.
(A) him; are

(B) his; is
(C) his; are
(D) him; is
11. Where has Chris gone recently?
(A) He went to Europe.

(B) He has go to Europe.
(C) He has gone to Europe.
52
53
(D) He has went to Europe.
12. It doesn’t matter, I _____________ this over and over again.
(A) has done

(B) has been doing
(C) have been doing
(D) have did
13. Usually, men ____________ for a beautiful woman.
(A) looks
er
(B) look
t
(C) looking
in
(D) looked
eW
14. What ____________ now? in
al
does she do
-L
(A)
(B) is she doing
(C) do she do
7
(D) are she doing

1 -1
84
15. What ____________ lately?

9.
does she do
10
(A)
(B) do she done
7.
(C) has she done

06
(D) has she do

F
CP
16. What _____________ since 2 p.m.?
(A) is she do
(B) has she been doing
(C) is she been doing
(D) has she do
17. He ____________ there every July.
(A) go
(B) goes
(C) going
(D) gone
18. During the last month, they ______________ 8 hours a day.
(A) have studied

(B) have been studying
53
54
(C) are studying

(D) study
19. My father, my mother and I ______________ to church lately.
(A) hasn’t gone

(B) haven’t gone
(C) isn’t going
(D) aren’t going
20. Right now, the children ____________ video game and we ___________ the game on TV.
er
(A) are playing; are watching
t
(B) is playing; is watching
in
(C) play; watch
eW
(D) plays; watches
in
al
21. My father, my mother and I ______________ to church lately.
-L
(A) hasn’t gone

(B) haven’t gone
7
(C) isn’t going

-1
(D) aren’t going

1
84
9.
22. Why _________________ to the door every time I arrive home?

10
(A) do it run
7.
(B) have it run

06
(C) has it run

(D) does it run
F
CP
23. Who _________________ with them?
(A) has travel

(B) has traveled
(C) are traveling
(D) travel
24. Where _________________ this afternoon?
(A) are you going

(B) you go
(C) goes
(D) go
25. ___________________ with us?
(A) Is she come
54
55
(B) Does she came

(C) Is she coming
(D) Has she came
26. His parents _______________________ yet.
(A) arrived
(B) haven’t arrived
(C) hasn’t arrived
(D) are arriving
11. PAST TENSE
t er
in
11.1. SIMPLE PAST
eW
in
It describes a completed/finished action that happened in the past and it is known when it occurred. The Simple
al
Past tense refers to actions that took place in a previous specified time. Proper way to construct sentences:
-L
O Passado Simples descreve uma ação completa/acabada que aconteceu no passado e é conhecido/determinado o tempo em
que ocorreu. Diz respeito a ações que tiveram lugar em um tempo passado determinado. Forma correta de construir frases:
7
1 -1
84

9.
10
noun or pronoun + main verb + They worked last weekend.

ED or irregulars’ list +
7.
AFFIRMATIVE She went to Rio yesterday.

complement
06
noun or pronoun + didn’t + They didn’t work last weekend.

F
main verb +
CP
NEGATIVE She didn’t go to Rio yesterday.

complement
did + noun or pronoun + Did they work last weekend?

INTERROGATIVE main verb + Did she go to Rio yesterday?
AFFIRMATIVE complement
didn’t + noun or pronoun + Didn’t they work last weekend?

INTERROGATIVE main verb + Didn’t she go to Rio yesterday?
NEGATIVE complement
Main Adverbs: yesterday; ago; when; last year; last month; last week; the day before yesterday; last Saturday;
last winter, etc…
FIQUE LIGADO!
55
56
Na língua Inglesa, os verbos são divididos em duas grandes categorias: regulares e irregulares. Nos
verbos regulares forma-se o passado acrescentando ED ao respetivo infinitivo. Quanto aos
irregulares, infelizmente só decorando!
Alguns verbos regulares: to work/worked/worked; to like/liked/liked (atenção, acrescentou-se

somente o D); to study/studied/studied (atenção, transformou-se o Y em I); to
stop/stopped/stopped (atenção, dobrou-se a última consoante).
Alguns verbos irregulares:to go/went/gone – to see/saw/seen – to read/read/read – to

take/took/taken – to do/did/done – to fall/fell/fallen – to feel/felt/felt.
Interrogativa e Negativa: para a formação de orações interrogativas e negativas no passado é

necessário o uso do verbo auxiliar TO DO no passado (DID).
t er
in
eW
I worked here last month. (affirmative)
Did I work here last month? (interrogative)

in
al
I didn’t work here last month. (negative)
-L
Didn’t I work here last month? (interrogative and negative)

7
1 -1
He went to the movies yesterday.

84
Did he go to the movies yesterday?

9.
10
He didn’t go to the movies yesterday.

7.
Didn’t he go to the movies yesterday? (interrogative and negative)

06
F
CP
Note que, com o uso do verbo auxiliar, o verbo principal volta para a forma base.
11.2. PAST CONTINUOUS
The Past Continuous tense is the progressive form of the Simple Past tense. This means that it is used to
describe continuous actions that took place in a previous specified time. Let’s see its different usages and
compare them with the Simple Past.
O Passado Contínuo é a forma progressiva do Passado Simples. Isto significa que é utilizado para descrever ações contínuas
que tiveram lugar em um tempo passado determinado. Vamos ver as suas diferentes utilizações e compará-las com o Passado
Simples.
It was raining there yesterday (continuous) VS It rained there yesterday (simple)
She was playing the piano last night (continuous)
56
57
VS
She played the piano last night (simple)
My sister was studying the day before yesterday (continuous)
VS
My sister studied the day before yesterday (simple)
Proper way to construct sentences:
Forma correta de construir frases:
t er
in
eW
in
noun or pronoun + was/were + main They were working last weekend.
al
AFFIRMATIVE verb + ING + complement She was going to Rio yesterday.
-L
noun or pronoun + was/were + not + They weren’t working last weekend.

7
main verb + ING + complement

-1
NEGATIVE She wasn’t going to Rio yesterday.

1
84
was/were + noun or pronoun + main Were they working last weekend?

9.
INTERROGATIVE verb + ING + complement Was she going to Rio last weekend?
10
AFFIRMATIVE
7.
06
was/were + not + noun or pronoun + Weren’t they working last weekend?

INTERROGATIVE main verb + ING + complement Wasn’t she going to Rio last weekend?
F
CP
NEGATIVE
It is also used to describe a long previous action that was interrupted by another short previous action. Notice
that the short action is generally presented in the Simple Past tense.
Também é utilizado para descrever uma longa ação passada que foi interrompida por outra curta ação passada. Repare que a
ação curta é geralmente apresentada no Passado Simples.
Have a look at the examples below:
Dê uma olhada nos exemplos abaixo:
It was still raining when she arrived home.
She was playing the piano when the game started.
57
58
I was having lunch when the telephone rang.
LONG ACTION SHORT ACTION
Moreover, it can be used to describe two long and simultaneous actions that took place in the past.
Para além disso, pode ser utilizado para descrever duas ações longas e simultâneas que tiveram lugar no passado.
Take a look at the examples below:
Dê uma olhada nos exemplos abaixo:
t er
in
It was still raining when she was cooking dinner.
eW
She was playing the piano while he was reading a novel.
in
al
My daughter was playing tennis while my son was watching TV.
-L
7
LONG ACTION LONG ACTION

1 -1
84
The main adverbs used in this specific situation are: when; while; meanwhile; in the meantime.
9.
10
Os principais advérbios usados nesta situação específica são: quando; enquanto; enquanto isso.
7.
06
11.3. PAST PERFECT

F
CP
It describes a completed action or event that took place in a remote past. Usually, the Past Perfect characterizes
a complete previous action that happened before another completed action that also took place in the past. The
one that is presented in the Past Perfect happened before the one that is presented in the Simple Past. Proper
way to construct sentences:
O Passado Perfeito descreve uma ação ou evento que teve lugar em um passado remoto. Geralmente, caracteriza uma ação
terminada no passado que aconteceu antes de outra ação completa que também teve lugar no passado. Aquela que é
apresentada no Passado Perfeito aconteceu antes daquela apresentada no Passado Simples. Forma correta de construir frases:
noun or pronoun + had + past participle They had worked a lot before she arrived.
AFFIRMATIVE / noun or pronoun + main verb + ED or She had gone to Rio before she went to São
irregulars’ list Paulo.
noun or pronoun + hadn’t + past They hadn’t worked a lot before she arrived.
NEGATIVE participle / noun or pronoun + main She hadn’t gone to Rio before she went to
58
59
verb + ED or irregulars’ list São Paulo.
had + noun or pronoun + past participle Had they worked a lot before she arrived?
INTERROGATIVE / noun or pronoun + main verb + ED or Had she gone to Rio before she went to São
irregulars’ list Paulo?
AFFIRMATIVE
hadn’t + noun or pronoun + past Hadn’t they worked a lot before she arrived?
INTERROGATIVE participle / noun or pronoun + main Hadn’t she gone to Rio before she went to
verb + ED or irregulars’ list São Paulo?
NEGATIVE
er
Main Adverbs: before; when; previously; etc…
t
in
He had gone to the movies when his mother passed away.
eW
The book had fallen to the ground before I could avoid it.
in
al
-L
PAST PERFECT SIMPLE PAST

7
-1
11.4. PAST PERFECT CONTINUOUS

1
84
9.
It describes a completed continuous action – generally, a long one – that took place in the past and happened
10
before another completed action or event that took place in the past. Proper way to construct sentences:
7.
Descreve uma ação terminada contínua – geralmente longa – que teve lugar no passado e que aconteceu antes de outra ação
06
ou evento completes que também foram levados a efeito no passado. Forma correta de construir frases:
F
CP
noun or pronoun + had + They had been working before she arrived.
been + main verb + ING /
AFFIRMATIVE noun or pronoun + main verb She had been going to Rio before she went
+ ED or irregulars’ list to São Paulo.
noun or pronoun + hadn’t + They hadn’t been working before she

been + main verb + ING / arrived.
NEGATIVE noun or pronoun + main verb
+ ED or irregulars’ list She hadn’t been going to Rio before she
went to São Paulo.
ad + noun or pronoun + been Had they been working before she arrived?
+ main verb + ING / noun or Had she been going to Rio before she went
INTERROGATIVE pronoun + main verb + ED or to São Paulo?
irregulars’ list
AFFIRMATIVE
59
60
hadn’t + noun or pronoun + Hadn’t they been working before she

been + main verb + ING / arrived?
INTERROGATIVE noun or pronoun + main verb Hadn’t she been going to Rio before went
+ ED or irregulars’ list to São Paulo?
NEGATIVE
Main Adverbs: before; when; previously; etc…
er
EXERCISES
t
in
eW
For each one of the sentences herein under, select the only correct option.
in
al
1. What had you done before you got married?
-L
(A) I had work a lot.

(B) I had worked a lot.
7
(C) I have work a lot.

-1
(D) I have worked a lot.

1
84
9.
2. Where had you gone before you graduated?

10
(A) I had go nowhere.

7.
(B) I had gone nowhere.

06
(C) I haven’t gone anywhere.

(D) I have go anywhere.
F
CP
3. When did she come of age?
(A) She come of age yesterday.

(B) She has come of age yesterday.
(C) She had come of age yesterday.
(D) She came of age yesterday.
4. How long were they away?
(A) Very many time.

(B) Very much time.
(C) A long time.
(D) Any time.
5. Had he been here before?
(A) Yes, he had.
60
61
(B) Yes, he has.

(C) Yes, he was.
(D) Yes, he were.
6. How long have you been living in Brasília?
(A) For many time.

(B) For a long years.
(C) For a long time.
(D) For much years.
7. Where _______ they ___________?
ert
(A) has; studied
in
(B) have; been studying
eW
(C) did; studied
(D) have; study
in
al
8. All the girls _____________ the party when my brother and I ____________ there.
-L
(A) has left; arrived

7
(B) have leave; arrive

-1
(C) had left; arrived

1
(D) has left; arrive

84
9.
9. Have you traveled abroad this year?

10
7.
(A) No, I hasn’t.

06
(B) No, I hadn’t.

(C) No, I haven’t.
F
(D) No, I didn’t

CP
10. What car ______ he ______ recently?
(A) has; buy

(B) had; buy
(C) had; bought
(D) has; bought
Complete the sentences below with the correct tense of the verb between brackets.
1. She has already bought (already, to buy) a brand new car.
2. Before they got (to get) married, they had been (to be) engaged for 10 years.
3. I haven’t finished (not, to finish) my work yet.
4. They had been riding (to ride) their bikes before they met (to meet) their friends.
61
62
5. Our great-grandparents have been living (to live) here since 1937.
6. He was running (to run) with his wife when she fell (to fall) and hurt herself.
7. We had just finished (just, to finish) cooking before you came.
8. What were you doing (to do) when you broke (to break) your leg?
9. Before she resigned (to resign) from that South American company, she had worked (to work) there for a long time.
10. My son was studying / studied (to study) at UnB last night.
Choose the only option that correctly completes the sentences below.
er
t
in
1. Before ___________, your wife ____________ at least three different movies.
eW
(A) get up; had already watched
(B) got up; has already watched
(C) getting up; had already watched in
al
(D) gets up; has already watched
-L
7
2. We ___________ hard when Mike and her sisters ___________ us ___________ with them.
1 -1
(A) had been studying; called; to go

84
(B) studied; called; going

(C) have been studying; called; to go
9.
(D) study; called; going

10
7.
3. When the phone __________________, she _____________ a letter to her boyfriend.

06
(A) rung; had written

F
(B) rings; is writing

CP
(C) rang; was writing

(D) rang; wrote
4. He ___________________ TV while his mother _________________ dinner.
(A) watched; makes

(B) is watching; made
(C) have watched; had made
(D) was watching; was making
5. My stepfather __________________ to Europe.
(A) had already traveled

(B) was just traveled
(C) has just traveled
(D) is already traveled
62
63
6. His brother ______________ video game; meanwhile, my sister ___________ the laundry.
(A) has played; had done

(B) is playing; has already done
(C) was playing; was doing
(D) had played; was doing
7. She ________________ anybody in the last couple of months.
(A) hasn’t called

(B) isn’t calling
(C) hadn’t called
(D) wasn’t calling
t er
in
8. She _____________ of ______________ there next weekend.
eW
(A) thought; go
(B) thinks; go in
al
(C) had thinking; going
(D) is thinking; going
-L
7
12. FUTURE
1 -1
84
9.
There is more than one way of constructing future clauses. In the English language, as it happens to the
Portuguese one, we can say “I will work tomorrow” OR “I am going to work tomorrow”. Both sentences mean
10
that the action will take place in the future, although the second one uses the Present Continuous to express
7.
that thought. Let’s see what is the fundamental difference between them.
06
Há mais de uma maneira de construir orações futuras. Na língua Inglesa, assim como acontece na língua Portuguesa, nós
podemos dizer “eu irei trabalhar amanhã” OU “eu vou trabalhar amanhã”. Ambas as frases significam que a ação ocorrerá no
F
futuro, embora a segunda utilize o Presente Contínuo para expressar esse pensamento. Vamos ver qual é a diferença
CP
fundamental entre elas.
I will work tomorrow (less than 100% of certainty regarding the future action)
Eu trabalharei amanhã (menos de 100% de certeza em relação à concretização da ação futura)
VS
I am going to work tomorrow (100% of certainty regarding the future action)
Eu vou trabalhar amanhã (100% de certeza em relação à concretização da ação futura)
Thus, we should always use the following combinations:
Por isso, nós sempre deveríamos usar as seguintes combinações:
a) I think that… I will…
63
64
Eu acho que… eu (+ futuro com WILL)…
b) I am sure that… I am going to…
Eu tenho certeza que… eu (+ futuro com TO BE GOING TO)…
There is also the possibility of creating future clauses using a much more formal expression: SHALL. Following
the grammar rule, the said expression may only be used with two subject pronouns: I and WE.
Há também a possibilidade de criar orações futuras usando uma expressão muito mais formal: SHALL. Seguindo a regra
gramatical, a dita expressão só pode ser utilizada apenas com dois pronomes sujeito: EU e NÓS.
I will work tomorrow = I shall work tomorrow (more formal)
t er
in
eW
12.1. SIMPLE FUTURE
in
It describes an action that will happen in the future. This action will take place at a given time in the future and
al
won’t repeat itself continuously. Proper way to construct sentences:
-L
Descreve uma ação que acontecerá no futuro. Esta ação terá lugar em um dado tempo futuro e não se repetirá continuamente.
Forma correta de construir frases:
7
1 -1
84

9.
Noun or pronoun + will + main

10
verb + complement They will study tomorrow.

OR
7.
AFFIRMATIVE
Noun or pronoun + to be + going
06
They are going to study tomorrow.

to + main verb + complement
F
CP
Noun or pronoun + will not

(won’t) + main verb + They won’t study tomorrow.
complement
NEGATIVE OR
Noun or pronoun + to be not + They aren’t going to study
going to + main verb + tomorrow.
complement
Will + noun or pronoun + main

verb + complement Will they study tomorrow?
INTERROGATIVE OR
AFFIRMATIVE 2) To be + noun or pronoun + going to Are they going to study tomorrow?

+ main verb + complement
Will not (won’t) + noun or

pronoun + main verb + Won’t they study tomorrow?
complement
INTERROGATIVE
64
65
NEGATIVE OR Aren’t they going to study

To be not + noun or pronoun + tomorrow?
going to + main verb +
complement
Main Adverbs: tomorrow; the day after tomorrow; next week; next month; next Sunday; next weekend; next
summer; next year; etc...
12.2. FUTURE CONTINUOUS
er
It describes a continuous action that will be happening in the future. This action will repeat itself continuously
t
in
during a given period of time. Proper way to construct sentences:
eW
Descreve uma ação contínua que estará acontecendo no futuro. Esta ação repetir-se-á continuamente durante um dado período
de tempo. Forma correta de construir frases:
in
al
-L

7
-1
noun or pronoun + will + be

1
+ main verb + ING + They will be studying tomorrow.

84
complement
9.
OR
AFFIRMATIVE
10
noun or pronoun + to be
They are going to be studying
going to + be + main verb +
7.
tomorrow.
ING + complement
06
noun or pronoun+ won’t + be

F
+ main verb + ING + They won’t be studying

CP
complement tomorrow.
OR
NEGATIVE
noun or pronoun + to be not They aren’t going to be studying
going to + be + main verb + tomorrow.
ING + complement
will + noun or pronoun + be

+ main verb + ING + Will they be studying tomorrow?
complement
INTERROGATIVE
OR
AFFIRMATIVE Are they going to be studying
to be + noun or pronoun + tomorrow?
going to be + main verb +
ING + complement
will not (won’t) + noun or

pronoun + be + main verb + Won’t they be studying
ING + complement tomorrow?
INTERROGATIVE
OR
NEGATIVE
65
66
to be not + noun or pronoun Aren’t they going to be studying

+ going to be + main verb + tomorrow?
ING + complement
Main Adverbs: the same as the ones used for the SIMPLE FUTURE.
12.3. FUTURE PERFECT
The Future Perfect tense describes an action that will have happened at a determined time in the future. This
er
action won’t repeat itself continuously during that given period of time. Proper way to construct sentences:
t
in
Descreve uma ação que terá acontecido em um tempo determinado no futuro. Esta ação não se repetirá continuamente
eW
durante esse dado período de tempo. Forma correta de construir frases:
in
al
-L
noun or pronoun + will + have + past

7
AFFIRMATIVE participle of the verb + complement I will have finished my course by this time next
-1
year.
1
84
noun or pronoun + won’t + have +

9.
NEGATIVE past participle of the verb + I won’t have finished my course by this time
10
complement next year.

7.
will + noun or pronoun + have + past

06
INTERROGATIVE participle of the verb + complement Will you have finished your course by this time
AFFIRMATIVE next year?
F
CP
won’t + noun or pronoun + have +

INTERROGATIVE past participle of the verb + Won’t you have finished your course by this
complement time next year?
NEGATIVE
Main Adverbs: by this time next year; next Monday; at this hour next Wednesday; etc…
Some examples:
They will already have had dinner tomorrow night.
My brother will have watched a movie with his girlfriend tomorrow at 7 p.m.
Their bar will have closed next Friday evening.
She will have gone back home tomorrow at this same hour.
They won’t have won the game by this time tomorrow.
Will you have studied all your grammar by the end of next month?
66
67
12.4. FUTURE PERFECT CONTINUOUS
The Future Perfect Continuous tense describes a continuous action that will have been happening at a
determined time in the future. This action won’t repeat itself continuously during that given period of time.
Proper way to construct sentences:
Descreve uma ação contínua que terá acontecido em um tempo determinado no futuro. Esta ação repetir-se-á continuamente
durante esse dado período de tempo. Forma correta de construir frases:
er
noun or pronoun + will + I will have been studying English
have + been + main verb + for two years by this time next
t
AFFIRMATIVE
in
ING + complement year.
eW
noun or pronoun + won’t + I won’t have been studying
have + been + main verb + English for two years by this time
NEGATIVE
ING + complement in
next year.
al
-L
will + noun or pronoun + Will you have been studying

INTERROGATIVE have + been + main verb + English for two years by this time
7
ING + complement next year?

AFIRMATIVE
1 -1
won’t + noun or pronoun + • Won’t you have been studying

84
INTERROGATIVE have + been + main verb + English for two years by this time
ING + complement next year?
9.
NEGATIVE
10
7.
Main Adverbs: the same as the ones used for the FUTURE PERFECT.
06
Some examples:
F
CP
They will already have been having dinner tomorrow night.
My brother will have been watching a movie with his girlfriend tomorrow at 7 p.m.
Their bar will have been working next Friday evening.
She will have been going back home tomorrow at this same hour.
They won’t have been playing the game by this time tomorrow.
Will you have been studying all your grammar by the end of next month?
67
68
EXERCISES
Choose the correct option to complete the sentences herein under.
1. The little boy _____________ the picture of a cow at school next Thursday.
(A) draw
(B) draws
(C) is going to draw
(D) will drew
2. I ________________ Peter next week.
ter
(A) have met
in
(B) meet
eW
(C) be going to meet
(D) will meet
in
al
3. Yesterday, as he _________ down the street, he ___________ an old friend of his.
-L
(A) had walked; met

7
(B) walked; had met

-1
(C) was walking; met

1
(D) walked; was meeting

84
9.
4. Fred __________________ me yesterday. He wanted to know if his brother ________________.

10
7.
(A) called; arrived

06
(B) was calling; arriving

(C) called; had arrived
F
(D) has called; had been arriving

CP
5. We _______________________________________ married by this time two months from now.
(A) won’t get

(B) will get
(C) won’t have got
(D) will have gotten
6. I _________________________ what he ____________________ but I couldn’t understand it.
(A) hear; says

(B) heard; says
(C) hear; say
(D) heard; said
68
69
7. He ___________________________ the piano when the telephone ______________________.
(A) was playing; was ringing

(B) had played; is ringing
(C) played; rang
(D) was playing; rang
8. Jessica _____________________________ in 1983.
(A) has retire

(B) retired
(C) was retire
(D) is retired
t er
in
9. They _____________________________ next holiday.
eW
(A) won’t have travel
(B) won’t be traveling in
al
(C) may not have travel
(D) shall not travel
-L
7
10. Mr. Tribianni ____________________ into the room when the lawyer ______________ dinner.
1 -1
(A) have gone; has

84
(B) has gone; had

9.
(C) went; is having

(D) went; was having
10
7.
06
11. Why _______________ those people singing? Because they ______________ gotten some unexpected good news.
F
(A) was; had

CP
(B) is; have

(C) were; had
(D) was; has
12. When did she ______________________? I think she _______________________ yesterday.
(A) left; left

(B) lived; live
(C) live; leave
(D) leave; left
13. She _________________________ give her parents the good news the day after tomorrow.
(A) shall
(B) will have been
(C) is going to
(D) won’t have
69
70
14. Why ________________________ you so late? Because I _______________________ the bus.
(A) is; missed

(B) are; have missed
(C) is; miss
(D) are; miss
15. Pablo ______________________ half the homework, when they ______________________ in.
(A) was finished; come

(B) had finished, come
(C) has finished; came
(D) had finished; came
t er
in
16. After _________________________ all the accounts, Bianca ___________________ the store.
eW
(A) checks; locks
(B) checking; lock in
al
(C) checking; has locked
(D) having checked; lock
-L
7
17. They ___________________________________________ their diploma by this time next year.

-1
1
(A) have gotten

84
(B) were getting

9.
(C) will get

(D) will have gotten
10
7.
06
18. His next question _______________________________ me completely by surprise.

F
(A) takes
CP
(B) taken
(C) has taken
(D) has took
19. They ______________ to her apartment last night but they ______________ there too late. She _________________
already ___________________.
(A) went; arrived; has; go

(B) go; arrived; has; gone
(C) have gone; arrived; have; go
(D) went; arrived; had; left
20. We ________________ surely __________ fleas if we ____________ as dirty as we ________.
(A) are; going to catch; remaining; were

(B) were; catch; remained; are
(C) were; caught; remain; were
(D) are; going to catch; remain; are
70
71
21. My mom __________________________________ me since the day before yesterday.
(A) had called

(B) was calling
(C) is calling
(D) has been calling
22. He _________________________ out _____________________________ soccer once again.
(A) is going; playing

(B) went; to play
(C) was going; playing
(D) has gone; to play
t er
in
23. _________________________________ a look at that motorcycle.
eW
(A) take
(B) takes in
al
(C) taking
(D) took
-L
7
24. I ______________________ tomorrow, but my daughter _____________________ next weekend.

-1
1
(A) am going; are going

84
(B) will leave; is going to travel

9.
(C) leave; leave

(D) will go; will have been gone
10
7.
06
25. He __________________________ to drink water after ___________________________.

F
(A) likes; to run

CP
(B) hates; ran

(C) loves; running
(D) enjoys; run
26. Why ___________ you __________ to work the whole summer?
(A) does; have

(B) do; had
(C) did; had
(D) did; have
27. I _________________ by this time next year.
(A) will have graduated

(B) will graduated
(C) will been graduating
(D) will had graduated
71
72
28. He ____________________ to work yesterday because his car _____________________ down.
(A) didn’t go; broke

(B) hasn’t gone; broke
(C) haven’t gone; break
(D) wasn’t going; break
29. My little sister _________________ worse, so I’ll have _______________ care of her. Anyway, I just _______________ she
_______________ better as soon as possible.
(A) got; take; hope; gets

(B) has gotten; to take; hope; gets
(C) is getting; taking; hoped; got
t er
in
eW
in
al
-L
7
1 -1
84
9.
10
7.
06
F
CP
72
73
HELPING YOU
Adverbs can modify adjectives, but an adjective cannot modify an adverb. Thus, we say
that “the student drives really slow” or “the student drives slowly”. BUT NOT “He drives
real fast”.
Some adverbs can take COMPARATIVE and SUPERLATIVE forms, however, the majority
of adverbs don’t take these endings. Instead, they form the comparative using more or
less and the superlative using most or least, even the ones that have less than 2
syllables.
a) With sneakers on, she could move more quickly among the patients.
er
b) The flowers were the most beautifully arranged creations I've ever seen.
t
in
c) She worked less confidently after her accident.
eW
d) That was the least skillfully done performance I've seen in years.
in
al
-L
7
-1
THE ROYAL ORDER OF ADVERBS

1
84
Verb Manner Place Frequency Time Purpose

9.
10
Beth in the every before to keep in

enthusiastically
swims pool morning dawn shape.
7.
06
Dad into every before to get a

impatiently
F
walks town afternoon supper newspaper.

CP
Tess in her every before

naps room morning lunch.
In actual practice, of course, it would be highly unusual to have a string of

adverbial modifiers beyond two or three (at the most). Because the
placement of adverbs is so flexible, one or two of the modifiers would
probably move to the beginning of the sentence: "Every afternoon before
supper, dad impatiently walks into town to get a newspaper." When that
happens, the introductory adverbial modifiers are usually set off with a
comma.
73
INTERMEDIATE LEVEL 74
INTERMEDIATE LEVEL
1. ADVERBS
An adverb is a modifying part of the speech. Adverbs are words that modify a verb, an adjective, another adverb
or the whole phrase or clause. It describes or gives additional information about when, where, why or under
what conditions and circumstances something happens. It connects two clauses. Adverbs can be arranged
according to the following six classes: FREQUENCY, MANNER, TIME, PLACE, DEGREE OR INTENSITY and DOUBT.
t er
in
1.1. FREQUENCY
eW
in
These adverbs tell us how often an action takes place. They usually come before the main verbs and after auxiliary verbs in the
majority of the sentences. They are, among others:
al
-L
7
Always = every time, all the time, forever Often = many times
-1
Never = not at any time or not on any occasion Seldom=almost ever

1
84
Sometimes = on some occasions but not always or often Once = only one time
9.
Twice = just two times Many times = often

10
7.
Rarely = almost never Usually = often

06
F
1.2. MANNER
CP
These adverbs describe how, or in what way, something happens. They derive from adjectives and they are usually finished
with the letters LY. Herein under are some examples.
Slowly = at a slow speed, pace or rhythm
Quickly = at a fast speed, pace or rhythm
Carefully = with great attention or caution
Patiently = with patience
Fluently = in a fluent, rhythmic and correct way
Kindly = in a kind or pleasant way
Well = in a good way
74
Fast = in a quick way
Hardly = with a strong or tough attitude; with the improbability of happening
PAY ATTENTION!
Some words finished with LY are not adverbs but adjectives.
Examples: friendly, lovely, ugly, silly, lonely, lovely, deadly, elderly.
He is friendly. (adjective)
The sing was lovely. (adjective)
ter
He plays in a friendly way. (adjective)
in
eW
in
There are other words finished with LY that can be both adjectives and adverbs.
al
Examples: daily, weekly, monthly, yearly and early.
-L
We get up early (adverb) to be on time for an early (adjective) class.

7
-1
They work daily (adverb) on a daily (adjective) newspaper.

1
It’s deadly (adverb) to drive at deadly (adjective) speeds.

84
9.
10
1.3. TIME
7.
06
These adverbs refer to the time when something happens. Below there are some examples.
F
CP
Now = at the present time, in this exact moment
Still = that continues happening
Soon = within a short period of time, in a short while
Yesterday = on the day before today
Early = before the scheduled time or arranged hour
Tomorrow = on the day after today
Tonight = at the night of the present day
Next week = the week after this one
Last month = in the month before this one
Next year = the year after this one
75
On Sunday, on Monday, on Tuesday, on Wednesday, on Thursday, on Friday
In January, in February, in March, in April, in July, in August, in September
1.4. PLACE
These adverbs designate the place where something happens. We can find some examples in the following lines.
Here There Everywhere
Above Around Beside
Upstairs Downstairs Between
er
t
in
Among Beneath Below
eW
We are going upstairs in a few minutes.
in
al
She is between my two brothers.
-L
Our books are among yours.

7
-1
I saw your children around there.

1
84
9.
1.5. DEGREE OR INTENSITY

10
7.
These adverbs specify the degree to which an adjective, or another adverb, applies. There are some examples below.
06
Very Too Almost

F
CP
More Less Again
They said that you were very stubborn.
She almost went to your birthday party.
Your mother-in-law is too stubborn.
We should do less things everyday.
Here we go again.
1.6. DOUBT
These adverbs are applied to situations or events where a doubt, or a lack of absolute certainty, is present. Herein under we
can find some examples.
76
Maybe = Perhaps Probably Possibly
Perhaps, they won’t be able to arrive on time.
Maybe, they will arrive on time.
We are coming after six, probably.
Possibly, she is trying to call you.
Other examples on how to use some adverbs:
er
Don’t you cry tonight, there’s heaven above you, baby!
t
in
Now, I can’t define what I really want to say!
eW
Girl, I’m leaving tomorrow.
I will always love you! in

al
-L
Say it once, say it twice!
It’s too late, baby. Now it’s too late!

7
-1
I am definitely going to be theretomorrow.

1
84
My father is getting more and more impatient.

9.
Sometimes, she really crosses the boundaries.

10
Where is he trying to go so early in the morning?

7.
06
They must do it. Otherwise, they will be absurdly punished.

F
How often does he go out before midnight?

CP
What genre of music do you listen to when you get up?
Luckily, he had to leave the house very soon.
Your shoes often stay under the bed.
PAY ATTENTION!
There are some words that can be both an adjective and an adverb, such as: fast, late, low.
Examples:
A fast (adjective) car goes fast (adverb).
I’m late (adverb) for my late (adjective) class.
Any low (adjective) music gets me low (adverb).
77
Main rules for the usage of adverbs:
ADVERB + main verb
She always goes to the movies.
To be + ADVERB
She is always at the movies.
er
Auxiliary verb + ADVERB + main verb
t
in
She will always be at the movies.
eW
in
al
List of the most common adverbs used in the English language.
-L
7
A adversely all
1 -1
aesthetically almost
84
afar alone
9.
aboard
10
afield along
abominably
7.
afloat alongside
about
06
afoot aloof
above
F
afoul aloud
CP
absurdly
after already
accidentally
afterward also
accidently
afterwards altogether
accordingly
again always
accurately
ahead amok
acoustically
alike amuck
admiringly
adrift
angrily
anticlockwise
78
apart
as
B G N
badly gratis namely
before gratefully nay
believe
H never
better nevertheless
er
haltingly
t
in
beyond newly
hard
eW
blind now
hence
C here in not
al
S
-L
carefully homewards
close
I seal
7
-1
closely sharp
1
immediately
84
completely sometimes
instead
9.
confidently soon
10
J
currently stealthily
7.
just
06
D successfully
K
F
T
CP
definitely
knowingly
ditto then
during L there
E late thereby
lately therefore
early
least thick
either
leisurely thither
even
likely thus
ever
long timely
exactly
tomorrow
excitingly M
twofold
79
extra maybe
F merely
more
far
frequently
whence
V
U where
very
unbowed whither
underneath W
Y
er
unduly well
yes
t
in
unfortunately west
eW
unhurriedly what
unwittingly when in
al
-L
EXERCISES
7
1 -1
84
1. Classify the adverbs below according to what you’ve just learned.

9.
10
Mainly – ________ Usually – ________ Where – ________

7.
Deadly – ________ Behind – ________ Maybe – ________

06
Almost – ________ Tonight – ________ Rarely –________

F
CP
2. Find the adverbs that correspond to each adjective:
Fluent – ________ Friend – ________ Frequent – ________
Slow – ________ Careful – ________ Rough – ________
Bad – ________ Supposed – ________ Accurate – ________
3. Put an X in the correct option:
a. The plane arrived late, as usual.
( ) adverb ( ) adjective
b. My brother loves fast cars.
80
c. Learning French is harder than I thought.
d. That site is updated daily.
er
e. My You’ve just ruined my best dress.
t
in
eW
f. My He is friendly. in
al
-L
7
-1
g. I'm watching the late class.

1
84
9.
10
h. They are running too fast.

7.
06
F
CP
i. I hope you try harder in the future.
j. Voanews.com is a daily online newspaper.
k. Computers work better nowadays.
l. He was talking with her in a friendly way.
81
4. Complete the sentences below with the adverbs that relate to the words or expressions in brackets, and classify each one of
them:
a) Sue is ________ (complete) crazy about her husband.
(Manner)
b) ________ (usual), Tom goes out with his girlfriend.
(Frequency)
c) My daughter went to school ________ (the day before today).
er
(Time)
t
in
eW
d) I think she is ________ (on the upper floor).
(Place)
in
al
-L
e) ________ (probable) we will need to go to the hospital.
(Doubt)
7
1 -1
f) They have ________ (nearly, closely) the same age.

84
9.
(Degree or intensity)
10
7.
2. PREPOSITIONS
06
F
CP
Prepositions are small words that create a relation among the several different words or expressions that are
part of one sentence. They are used to link nouns, pronouns and idiomatic expressions within a sentence, in a
cohesive and coherent way. A preposition usually indicates the temporal, spatial or logical relation between the
elements that constitute a sentence.
PAY ATTENTION!
When a preposition follows a verb in an affirmative sentence, it will also follow the verb in an interrogative
sentence. So, the preposition will come, many times, at the end of the question.
Examples:
What are you talking about?
Who are you working for?
Every preposition has an object. An object of a preposition is a noun or a pronoun that comes after a
82
preposition to form a prepositional phrase.
Examples:
The trip that we are planning toFernando de Noronha may be in December.
To = preposition; Fernando de Noronha = object of preposition
An object of a preposition can cause confusion when it comes to the comprehension of the sentence’s
structure because it can be taken as the subject of the said sentence.
Examples:
To Janethe wedding request was a big surprise.
er
t
To = preposition; Jane = object of preposition;
in
eW
The weeding request = subject of the sentence.
in
al
-L
2.1. GENERAL PREPOSITIONS

7
2.1.1. The preposition IN is applied to the following situations.

1 -1
84
PLACE, STATE, CITY or COUNTRY

9.
10
Examples:
7.
I live in that neighborhood.

06
She lives in Florida.

F
CP
Your son is in New York.
He used to live in the States.
INSIDE OF SOMETHING or SOME PLACE
Examples:
The girl is in the kitchen.
The coffee is in the cup.
The milk is in the fridge.
The pills are in the bathroom cabinet.
DURATION OF AN ACTION (TIME)
83
Examples:
He will do his work in three days.
They will be writing the report in the next few days.
She will get there in a couple of hours.
We’ll finish it in a week.
ert
in
eW
in
al
-L
7
1 -1
84
9.
10
Examples:
7.
06
She always works in the morning.

F
CP
I usually go to Rio de Janeiro in February.
He was born in 1979.
They visit us in the spring.
BEFORE LANGUAGES
Examples:
They are speaking in English.
We love to speak in French with each other.
He is talking in Spanish to his uncle.
2.1.2. The preposition ON is applied to the following situations.
84
WITH THE SENSE OF ABOVE OR ON TOP
Examples:
The book is on the table.
The pens are on the fridge.
BEFORE DAYS OF THE WEEK
t er
in
eW
Examples:
in
al
I’ll have to go there on Monday.
-L
Her birthday is on Thursday.

7
1 -1
PAY ATTENTION!
84
9.
If there are others elements, such as months or periods of day, related to days of the week, we
should always use the preposition ON.
10
7.
Examples: She goes to her parents’ house on Easter’s Tuesday.

06
He likes to go out on Friday evening.

F
They went to New York on April 21st.

CP
PLACE OR RESIDENCE IN A STREET, IF THE NUMBER ISN’T MENTIONED
Examples:
I live on Santa Monica Boulevard.
She told me (that) he lives on Fifth Avenue.
2.1.3. The preposition AT is applied to the following situations.
85
PLACE OR RESIDENCE IN A STREET, WHENEVER THE NUMBER IS MENTIONED
Examples:
I live at 570, Santa Monica Boulevard.
She told me (that) he lives at 137, Fifth Avenue.
EXACT HOUR
er
Examples:
t
in
eW
We arrived at 10:00 a.m.
They went to their apartment at 8:30 p.m. in

al
-L
DIRECTION OR SENSE OF DIRECTION

7
-1
Examples:
1
84
Look at those trees over there!

9.
10
Don’t throw stones at the birds!

7.
06
PLACE OR DESIGNATION OF PLACE

F
CP
Examples:
My father is at home.
We are at school.
MOMENT OR REFERENCE TO A MOMENT
Examples:
We’ll have to be there at noon.
I can’t tell you that at this moment.
2.1.4. The preposition FOR is applied to the following situations.
86
DURATION OF AN ACTION (TIME)
Examples:
She played the piano for three hours.
I’ve been studying English for the last three years.
WHEN MENTIONING AN EXCHANGE OR A PERMUTE
Examples:
ter
in
I rent my apartment for little money.
eW
She had lunch for a few bucks.
in
al
-L
WHENEVER FOR = TO
Examples:
7
1 -1
Shall I open the window for you?

84
They did the homework for me.

9.
10
7.
2.1.5. The preposition BY is applied to the following situations.

06
F
MEANS OF TRANSPORTATION (exception: ON FOOT)

CP
Examples:
I came here by car. She goes to school by subway.
WHENEVER THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS ARE SINONYMS OF ALONE
Examples:
He lives by himself in São Paulo. = He lives alone in São Paulo.
They study by themselves. = They study alone.
We have done it by ourselves. = We have done it alone.
AS SYNONYM OF UNTIL WHEN INDICATING TIME
87
Examples:
They will finish their job by 7:00 o’clock.
I think I’ll be there by Friday.
We will be having fun by this time next week.
You’ll have succeeded by 2011.
2.2 PREPOSITIONS OF PLACE
t er
in
PREPOSITION EXAMPLE
eW
Above The ceiling is above our heads.
Below There is a candy shop below their

in
apartment.
al
There is a light over the table.
-L
Over = on, period of time, more than He proved to be a friend over the years.
It cost over US$1,000.
7
-1
The dog is under the table.

1
Under These children are all under seven.

84
John works under Bob Thompson’s.

9.
Inside = in The pen is inside the desk.

10
Outside The boss is outside the office.

7.
Near = next to = close to She lives near me.

06
Across = in front of The bank is across the street.

F
They are against your ideas.

CP
Against He is always against our ideals.

The chair is against the wall.
Behind The garage is behind the house.
Down We saw her walking down the street.
Up He was walking up that avenue.
In back of The taxi is parked in back of the building.
In front of The ball rolled in front of the bus.
Through The bird flew through the open window.
Among (more than two things or Paul is among us.

people) It’s among those books.
It is between the bank and the post office.

Between (two things or people) He’s between her two sisters.
She was between them both.
2.3. PREPOSITIONS OF DIRECTION
88
PREPOSITION EXAMPLE
Into = to move inside I saw him going into the movies.
Out of = to move outside He took some money out of his pocket.
Toward(s) = in the direction of This road leads toward the beach.

She was looking towards the horizon.
Opposite The post office is opposite to his house.
To Can you move to your left, please?
er
2.4. PREPOSITIONS OF TIME
t
in
eW
PREPOSITION EXAMPLE
During in
During the summer, I think I’ll go to Rio.
al
-L
After Would you please call after nine?
Before Take this medicine before lunch.

7
-1
Until We must wait until ten p.m.

1
Around I get to my office around ten every

84
morning.
9.
About I think she will be away about a week.

10
7.
2.5. PREPOSITIONS OF POSSESSION

06
F
PREPOSITION EXAMPLE
CP
Of The legs of this table are broken.
To This pencil belongs to Mary.
‘S = of someone or something It’s the teacher’s car = It’s the car of the
teacher
2.6. PREPOSITIONS OF WAY
PREPOSITION EXAMPLE
With He will go to the club with his father.
Like He is like his father.
2.7. OTHER PREPOSITIONS
89
PREPOSITION EXAMPLE
despite = although / though They are playing football despite the rain.
in order to = with the intention to We will have to hurry in order to arrive on time.
throughout = during the whole time; It rained throughout the week at the beach.
all around; everywhere The news was spread throughout the country.
within = in a determined amount of time He’ll finish the report within the required time.
er
Besides = in addition to Besides studying mathematics I study physics.
t
in
But Nobody saw the accident but him.
eW
to = indication of place or destiny I walked over to the window.
around in
He was driving around the block.
al
-L
3. CONJUNCTIONS
7
1 -1
84
Conjunctions are words that join other words, phrases and/or clauses establishing coordinate and subordinate
9.
clauses’ relation.
10
7.
3.1. COORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS

06
F
CP
They can join single words or groups of words, but the structures must always have elements with the same
value. For instance: subject + subject; verb phrase + verb phrase, sentence + sentence. When a coordinating
conjunction is used to join elements, the element becomes a compound element. The most common
coordinating conjunctions are presented below.
ADDED = ADD
CONJUNCTION SAMPLE SENTENCES
And Melissa and Rachel are going to the movie.
Both.... and Both my sister and my mother play the piano.
Not only ... but also Not onlySue has money, but she is also very beautiful.
Not only she studies, but she also plays the guitar.
90
ALTERNATIVE = CHOICE
Or You must call her or she won’t forgive you.
Neither.... nor Neither the orchestra nor the choruses were able to play harmoniously.
He is neither a prince nor a frog.
Either ...or Either she leaves or I do! I haven’t been to either the U.S.A. or Greece.
Otherwise She should study more; otherwise she won’t pass the test.
t er
Else This isn’t Sarah’s book, it belongs to someone else.
in
eW
Or else You should better hurry, or else you will be late for work.
in
al
ADVERSATIVE = CONTRAST
-L
7
-1

1
But She is poor, but happy.

84
9.
However That man, however, refused to go.

10
Still We still work at the same place.

7.
Yet I’m tired, yet I’m glad I came. This is a simple yet effective solution.
06
Nevertheless I won’t write to him; nevertheless, I believe you should do it.

F
CP
Though Though she was deaf, she played piano beautifully.
But then I pass the test, but then it was really easy.
CONCLUSIVE = CONCLUSION
So There was no one there, so I went away.
Therefore You won’t help me; therefore I must do it alone.
EXPLANATIVE = EXPLANATION
91
As He is without money as his wage hasn’t come.
Such as A person such as you must be happy.
For I want to buy a new dress for my pretty girlfriend.
Because I’m going to Rio de Janeiro on Christmas because my family is there.
3.2. SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS
er
These conjunctions connect subordinated clauses to a main clause, expressing a relation between the ideas in
t
in
the clauses. Subordinating conjunctions are a larger class of words. Therefore, only a few of the more common
eW
ones are included herein under.
in
al
CAUSE
-L
7
-1

1
84
Because He will succeed because he has worked hard.

9.
As As I was tired, I decided not to go.

10
Since You will have vacations since you have passed the test.
7.
06
COMPARATIVE
F
CP
As…as She is as beautiful as her sister.
As if He prepared himself for this class as if he was preparing for a test.
As though She slept as though nothing had happened.
As well as He sings as well as I do.
As As she was going to sleep, she felt the need to drink some water.
More… than This house is more expensive than that apartment.
CONCESSIVE
92
Although Although he seemed sad, he had to go.
Though He seemed sad, though he had to go.
Despite Despite our hard job we couldn’t finish the work.
In spite of In spite of the bad weather, we decided to go to the beach house.
Even if You will finish my homework even if it takes all night.
Even though He has to go on this trip, even though he is sick.
t er
CONDITIONAL
in
eW
CONJUNCTION in
SAMPLE SENTENCES
al
-L
If I won’t go out with you if you come back late.

If you come back late, I won’t go out with you.
7
-1
Whether I’m not sure whether he is coming.

1
Unless I won’t go to your home unless you come here to pick me up.
84
9.
Provided that I won’t go to your home provided that you come here to pick me up.
10
7.
CONSECUTIVE
06
F
CP
So…that He is so annoying that no one wants do date him.
After We are going out to eat afterwe finish taking the test.
Before I will run home before someone calls me for help.
FINAL
In order to Men work in order to live.
In order (that) Politicians make promises in order (that) they could win more votes.
93
So that Men work so that they can eat.
INTEGRAL
Where I go where I want.
That I said that she was tired.
er
Then First I eat, and then I go.
t
in
eW
TEMPORAL
in
al
-L
As soon as I will meet you as soon as I can.

7
-1
Whenever I always get upset whenever you come.

1
Whenever I go there it is always open.

84
9.
As long as I will wait for you as long as I can.

10
While While I was waiting in the bank line, I ate my lunch.

7.
Whereas I was having dinner whereas he was working.

06
F
CP
EXERCISES
Complete the sentences herein under with appropriate preposition.
1. This book belongs _________ John.
2. We all went ________ a walk _________ the park.
3. Sam bought this car _______ August.
4. They plan to trade it ________ a new one ____________ spring.
5. He was looking _______ the pen that John lost.
6. Ken usually sits ____________________________________________ this desk.
94
7. I make many mistakes _____________ spelling.
8. The man walked quickly ________ the room and went ___________ bed.
9. She spends a lot ___________ time _____________ her English homework.
10. We read _____________ the accident ______________ the newspaper this morning.
11. I must write a letter ______________ my aunt.
12. She went ____________ the forest _____________ find some wood.
13. Julia sits ________ front __________ me, and Helen sits ____________ Harry and Hope.
14. The boat moved slowly _______________________ the coast.
er
15. Everyone laughed ____________ William’s story.
t
in
16. The woman smiled ______________ me very pleasantly.
eW
17. He thanked me ____________ my interest ____________ the matter.
in
al
18. How much did they pay _____________________ their new house?
-L
19. They buy everything ______________credit.

7
20. She sold it ______________ me, and I bought it ____________ my mother.

1 -1
21. Do you know what happened _____________________ Martha?

84
22. You must always listen _____________ your parents.

9.
10
23. She wants to arrive there _______________ them.

7.
24. What do you like to do _________________ having dinner?

06
25. I think they were talking ________ us ________ the party last night.
F
26. Where does your cousin like to go __________ Friday and Saturday nights?
CP
27. His sister has spent a lot _____________ that blue skirt.
4. MODAL VERBS
Modal verbs are special verbs that behave very differently from regular and irregular ones. They are auxiliary verbs, which
along with main verbs give us the ideas of desire, intention, probability, advice, capacity, permission and
prohibition, among others. They have neither participles nor infinitives. The modal verbs are:
CAN / COULD / MAY / MIGHT / MUST / SHALL / SHOULD / OUGHT TO / WILL / WOULD
MODAL EXAMPLE USES
Can She can play the piano really well. Ability / Possibility
95
We can’t buy a new car now. Inability / Impossibility

Can I eat here? Asking for permission
Can’t you help me? Request
Could Could I borrow your dictionary? Asking for permission

Could you say it again more slowly? Request
We could try to fix it ourselves. Suggestion
They could find a nice job if they decided to move. Future possibility
He gave up his old job so he could work for us. Ability in the past
May May I have another cup of tea? Asking for permission

China may become a major economic power. Future possibility
er
Might Susan might bring some cookies for us today Future possibility
t
in
Must We must pay our bills before the end of the month. Necessity / Obligation
eW
They mustn’t go out so late been so young. Prohibition
Ought to We ought to employ a pro to build our new home.

in Saying what’s right or correct
al
Shall * Shall I help you with your homework? Offer
-L
Shall we say 3.50 then? Suggestion

Shall I go there or will you? Asking what to do
7
-1
Should We should sort out this problem at once. Saying what’s right or correct
1
You really should see a doctor about your illness. Recommending action
84
Profits should increase next month. Uncertain prediction

9.
Will I'll do that for you if you like. Offer

10
I’ll get back to you first thing on Monday. Promise

7.
Jeff will definitely leave NY after he finishes college. Certain prediction

06
Would Would you mind if I brought a colleague with me? Asking for permission
F
Would you pass the salt, please? Request

CP
Would you mind waiting a moment? Request

"Would three o’clock suit you?" "That’d be fine." Making arrangements
Would you like to play golf this Friday? Invitation
"Would you prefer tea or coffee?" "I’d like tea." Preferences
* More common in the UK than the US
PAY ATTENTION!
• Modal auxiliary verbs are always followed by the base form.

• Modals are the same for all pronouns.
I can play tennis.
He can play tennis.
96
• Don’t use “to” before or after a modal verb. Exception: Ought to.
4.1. MODAL EXPRESSIONS
These expressions are closely related to modal verbs in meaning. They are often interchanged with them.
HAVE TO
t er
We use HAVE TO when talking about a strong obligation that comes from somewhere else: from
in
your boss, your parents, a rule at school or work, etc.
eW
Examples:
I have to be home by ten. (OUTSIDE – My parents told me so). in

al
-L
I must be home by ten. I have a difficult day tomorrow. (INSIDE – My own choice).
I have to get up early because I start working at eight. (OUTSIDE – It is a rule).

7
-1
I should get up early. (INSIDE – Now I stay in bed until lunchtime.)

1
84
DON’T HAVE TO means that there isn't any obligation at all. There is no need to do it. Its use is
9.
different from the use of SHOULDN’T and MUSTN’T.

10
Examples:
7.
06
I don't have to get up early at weekend. (I can stay in bed as long as I want).
You mustn't tell lies. (It is very bad to tell lies).You don't have to go with me. (You can go with me
F
if you want to.) You shouldn't smoke. (It is bad for your health.)
CP
In spoken British English you can also use HAVE GOT TO and HAVEN’T GOT TO. The past of
HAVE TO is HAD TO.
Examples:
Pamela is a waitress. She's got to work on weekends.
Have I got to do it right now?
I haven't got to take my sister to school, my parents do it.
Tip! We do not use HAVE TO when talking about a supposedly good idea that was not yet put
into practice. Instead, in this context we use SHOULD.
97
HAD BETTER
HAD BETTER is most commonly used to make recommendations. It can also be used to express
the following ideas: desperate hope and/or warning people.
Examples:
You had better take your umbrella if you want to go out today.
(RECOMMENDATION)
That bus had better get here soon!
(DESPERATE HOPE)
t er
You had better watch the way you talk to me in the future! (WARNING)
in
eW
Note that it can be used on Present and Future tenses, but always like HAD BETTER.
in
al
-L
WOULD RATHER
7
-1
It is used to express a preference.

1
84
Examples:
9.
I’d rather walk than drive.

10
Would you rather go out or stay home?

7.
06
F
It isn’t necessary to use RATHER in the question to get an answer with RATHER.
CP
Examples:
Do you want to go to the movies? No, I’d rather go to the theater.
or
Would you like to go to the movies? No, I’d rather go the theater.
The negative form is WOULD RATHER NOT.
Examples:
Do you want to go to the movies?
No, I´d rather not go to the movies. I’m tired.
98
NEED
When NEED is followed by another verb, it can have the forms either of an ordinary verb (with to
do) or of a modal auxiliary verb (mostly in British English).We can use NEED in the present and
future to show necessity.
Examples:
I need to buy something for dinner.
We will need to repair the roof next year.
er
In the interrogative form, we use it with the hope of getting a negative answer.
t
in
Examples:
eW
Do I need to stay until late?
Does he need to redo the composition? in

al
-L
In the negative, we use it to express a necessity that was extinct or modified.

7
-1
Examples:
1
84
You don’t need to hurry; we still have 10 minutes.

9.
I didn’t need to ask him for more money.

10
You won’t need to arrive before ten o’clock.

7.
06
F
EXERCISES
CP
Use the MODAL VERBS or MODAL EXPRESSIONS that correctly complete each one of sentences below.
1. She ________ go to bed early last night.
2. They ____________ buy some stamps because there aren’t any at the office.
3. We ________________ rush because we are late for class.
4. ____ I come in?
5. It ____________ rain tomorrow.
6. My mother ____ swim very well.
7. I think you ___________________call her.
8. I ____________________ go to the farm tonight than tomorrow morning.
99
9. She ____________ not lie to me.
10. What do you think I ____________________do?
11. He ________ have helped us last night.
12. I ____________ go if I ____________.
13. They ____________ do it last Saturday.
Choose the correct answer.
er
1. You should study English and Spanish. This sentence implies:
t
in
(A) necessity
eW
(B) obligation
(C) advise
(D) possibility
in
al
-L
2. She wishes her boyfriend would dance better. It implies:

7
(A) an imaginary situation

-1
(B) a situation of regret

1
(C) a desire about something or somebody

84
(D) a situation of despair

9.
10
3. She could call me later. You can say the same thing using:
7.
(A) She must call me later.

06
(B) She can call me later

(C) She should call me later.
F
(D) She ought to call me later.

CP
4. I will talk _____ you _____ the last time. Don’t go _____ this place again!
(A) on; for; on

(B) to; for; on
(C) for; in; to
(D) to; for; to
5. Yesterday, he arrived _____ 6 o’clock _____ the morning and worked _____ 6 o’clock _____ the evening.
(A) at; in; until; in

(B) at; in; at; until
(C) to; in; until; in
(D) at; at; at; until
6. ABOVE, TOWARD and AROUND are respectively prepositions of:
100
(A) place; way; time

(B) time; place; way
(C) place; direction; time
(D) place; time; direction
7. I had a great grade in my last test. However, I have to study more and more.In the sentence above we have:
(A) an additive conjunction

(B) an alternative conjunction
(C) an explicative conjunction
(D) an adversative conjunction
er
8. Although she doesn’t have money, she insists on spending a lot of it. In the sentence above we have:
t
in
eW
(A) a conditional subordinate clause
(B) a consecutive subordinate clause
(C)
(D)
a
a
comparative subordinate clause
concessive subordinate clause
in
al
-L
9. Whereas you insist on doing that, I prefer to study hard. In the sentence above we have:
7
-1
(A) a final subordinate clause

1
(B) a consecutive subordinate clause

84
(C) a temporal subordinate clause

(D) an integrant subordinate clause
9.
10
7.
10. Unless you eat better, you will never get healthier. In the sentence above we have:
06
(A) one main clause; one concessive subordinate clause

(B) one adversative coordinative clause; one main clause
F
one conditional subordinate clause; one main clause

CP
(C)
(D) one consecutive subordinate clause; one coordinative clause
11. Whether she had traveled to Europe, she would have visited Italy. In the following sentence we have:
(A) probable condition

(B) not probable condition
(C) unreal condition
(D) impossible condition
12. By 2015, I’ll have had a baby. If I save money, I’ll buy a beautiful house, a nice car and get married with a handsome man.
Then, we should build a nice and comfortable home to wait for our baby. However, we must work hard to provide him a
good future.
In the paragraph above we have:
(A) a future Simple; a probable condition; an advise; a coordinative conjunction

(B) a future perfect; a probable condition; a possibility; a coordinative conjunction
101
(C) a future perfect; a probable condition; a possibility; a subordinate conjunction

(D) a future continuous; a not probable condition; a possibility; a subordinate conjunction
5. WISH
The word WISH expresses a DESIRE. In terms of meaning, we can say that it is similar to the expression WOULD LIKE
(although this one is always attached to a condition).
I, You, We, They WISH He, She, It WISHES
We use WISH + PAST SIMPLEto express an imaginary situation.
er
Examples:
t
in
eW
I wish I had a car, but I don’t.
He wishes he weren’t poor, but he is.

in
al
-L
We use WISH + PAST PERFECT to express regret or to say that you would like that a situation occurred in the past could be
different.
7
1 -1
84
Examples:
9.
I wish I had bought a new car last year.

10
7.
06
PAY ATTENTION!
F
It is mainly used to express regret, desiring that things were different. It is possible to use
CP
WISH – in this sense – to talk about actions from both the present and future tenses, as well
as and the past tense:
I wish (that) I weren't here

now.
I wish (that) I didn't have to
go to school tomorrow.
I wish (that) I had studied
harder when I was at school.
Notice that the word that can be omitted in more informal speech.
102
We use WISH + COULD to express a desire about something that you are unable to be or to do.
Examples:
I wish I coulddance well.
She wishes he could be funnier.
PAY ATTENTION!
Past Situations: COULD + PAST PERFECT
ter
Example:
in
eW
I wish I could have gone to the movies last Saturday.
in
al
-L
We use WISH + WOULD to express a desire about something that you have the willingness to do but you are unable to
control.
7
1 -1
Examples:
84
I wish it would come home earlier.

9.
10
They wish their children would be more dedicated.

7.
06
PAY ATTENTION!
F
CP
When WOULD describes something out of your control, the subject of WISH is different from the
subject of WOULD, to avoid any kind of incoherence.
We use WISH + INFINITVE in the same way as we use the verb “to want”, although it is much more formal.
Examples:
Iwish to see the director.
He wishes to go out this evening.
EXERCISES
103
Choose the best possible answer.
1. My computer is old and slow.
(A) I wish I earned more money.

(B) I wish I finished earlier.
(C) I wish I had a more powerful one.
(D) I wish I went to bed.
2. Sorry, I've burnt the spaghetti again.
er
(A) I wish I were a better cook.
I wish the spaghetti was smaller.
t
(B)
in
(C) I wish I were more intelligent.
eW
(D) I wish I wasn’t here
3. I must go to work on Saturday.

in
al
-L

(B) I wish it was Friday.
7
(C) I wish it wasn’t raining.

-1
(D) I wish I could have the weekend off.

1
84
4. My job is really boring.

9.
10

7.

(C) I wish I had an interesting one.
06
(D) I wish I had a laptop.

F
CP
5. I don't have anything to eat.
(A) I wish I had a cookie.

(B) I wish I knew something about cake.
(C) I wish I were here.
(D) I wish she hadn’t gone home
6. I don’t have much time to finish this.
(A) I wish I wasn’t working.

(B) I wish I had more time.
(C) I wish I understood it better.
(D) I wish I was a nurse
7. I feel really old.
104

(B) I wish I was a better cook.
(C) I wish I was younger.
(D) I wish I was an elderly.
8. I'm lonely.
(A) I wish I knew more people.

(B) I wish I were on vacation.
(C) I wish I had more money.
(D) I wish it weren’t so late.
ter
9. I don’t like this place.
in
eW
(A) I wish I were more powerful.
(C) I wish I were not here. in
al
(D) I wish I could have more friends.
-L
10. Robert has gone to the farm and I really need to speak with him.
7
-1
(A) I wish to go on vacation.

1
(B) I wish he were here.

84
(C) I wish it rains.

9.
(D) I wish I had a farm.

10
7.
Put the sentences in the correct order.

06
1. you – I – wouldn’t – there – wish – go – .

F
CP
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. wish – ten – I – younger – were – I – years – .
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. wishes – could – they – repair – she - come – to - boiler – the – sooner – .
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. service – wish – hadn’t – to – I – agreed – do – you – that – .
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. with – wish – we – speak – the – to – manager – .
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
105
6. she – coming – I – with – was – wish – you – .
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. IF CLAUSES AND/OR CONDITIONAL CLAUSES
The sentences with if are conditional clauses. They consist on a main clause plus (+) a subordinate conditional clause.
t er
Possible IF Simple Present + Simple Future If you study hard,
in
Future you will learn
eW
(subordinate clause) (main clause) English.
(possible
condition) -------------------------------------------
in(you will get it)
al
+ Imperative
-L
Or, IF Simple Present + Can, May, Must +

7
Main Verb
1 -1
84
UNREAL If Past Subjunctive + Conditional If you studied

9.
PRESENT hard, you would

(would) (subordinate clause)+ (main clause)
10
learn English.
7.
(You have a little

06
chance…!)
F
CP
UNREAL IF Past Perfect + Conditional Prefect If you had studied

PAST hard, you would
(would have) have learned
(impossible English.
conditional) (subordinate clause)+ (main clause)
PAY ATTENTION!
UNREAL PAST
❖ The clause’s order doesn’t change the sense of the sentence.

❖ It is possible to use unless and whether as a conditional conjunction.
❖ In a main clause, would is normally used, but it depends on the meaning of the
sentence; could and might are also possible.
106
PAY ATTENTION!
UNREAL PRESENT
• The Past Subjunctive of “to be” is “were” for all people.

❖ If I were you, I would go.
❖ If he were you, he could buy a new car.
• For other verbs, the PAST SUBJUNCTIVE is the same that SIMPLE PAST.
EXERCISES
t er
in
eW
1. I ____________ the check-up as soon as I ____________ time.
in
al
(A) will do; have
-L
(B) do; will have

(C) did; have
7
(D) do; had

1 -1
84
2. You must not take that medicine. This sentence gives you an idea of:
9.
(A) an order
10
(B) an obligation
7.
(C) a warning
(D) a ban
06
F
3. If I ____________ you, I ____________ with him immediately.

CP
(A) were; would speak;

(B) were; will talk
(C) was; will talk
(D) would be; talked
4. I ____________ you if you ____________ me.
(A) would have told; had asked

(B) would tell; ask
(C) would tell; would ask
(D) have told; would ask
5. I’m sure she isn’t here. She ____________ be at home.
107
(A) dare
(B) must
(C) ought
(D) have to
6. I do not mind ____________ this summer.
(A) I work
(B) working
(C) to work
(D) no to work
er
7. If Johnny _____________ the ball, he ____________ with his childrens.
t
in
(A) had bought; would have played
eW
(B) had bought; has made
(C) did buy; had made
(D) has bought; will have made in
al
-L
8. If I ___________ smarter I ___________ math in college.

7
(A) will be; will take

-1
(B) had been; would have taken

1
(C) am; took

84
(D) have been; would took

9.
10
9. Did you go to Stockholm? No, but I wish ____________ when I was in Sweden. I heard ____________ a beautiful city”.
7.
06
(A) we had gone; it is

(B) we have gone; it will be
F
(C) having gone; it has been

CP
(D) we have been going; it were
10. I ____________ to the Caribbean, if I ______________ enough money.
(A) could have went; had

(B) go; had had
(C) could have gone; had had
(D) could had gone; had
11. She insisted ________.
(A) on not telling the truth

(B) in telling not the true
(C) on not telling the true
(D) in do not say the truth
12. They ___________ go home than ______ here.
108
(A) would prefer; staying

(B) ‘d rather; to come
(C) prefer to; went
(D) ‘d rather; stay
13. You ___________ stop ___________ English this year.
(A) would; studied

(B) should; study
(C) wouldn’t; study
(D) shouldn’t; studying
t er
14. If she ______________ the lottery, she _______________ a brand new car.
in
eW
(A) won; bought
(B) win; buy
(C) wins; will buy in
al
(D) wins; would buy
-L
15. I __________________ the kids to the zoo, if I ________________ enough time yesterday.
7
1. will take; have

-1
2. would have taken; had

1
3. would take; had had

84
4. would have taken; had had

9.
10
16. They ___________________ go now, before _______________ too late.

7.
06
(A) ‘d better; it’s

(B) ‘d rather; it was
F
(C) ‘d better; its

CP
(D) ‘d rather; is
7. ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICES
The VOICE of a verb describes the relation between the action that the verb expresses and the elements identified by its
arguments (subject, object, etc.). Therefore, it shows whether the subject of a sentence is doing the action or having the action
done.
There are two kinds of voices in English: active voice and passive voice.
7.1. ACTIVE VOICE
The active voice happens when the subject of the sentence makes the action. This is the voice commonly used in most of our
daily situations.
109
Active
John delivers the mail.
John delivered the mail.
John will deliver the mail.
Active
Joan does the homework.
er
Joan did the homework.
t
in
Joan will do the homework.
eW
7.2. PASSIVE VOICE
in
al
The passive voice happens when the subject of the sentence suffers the action. It is often used in English when a fact or
-L
happening is more important than what caused it. We form the passive voice of the present, past, and future tenses with the
appropriate form of the verb TO BE and the past participle of the main verb.
7
1 -1
84
Passive
9.
The mail is delivered by John.

10
The mail was delivered by John.

7.
The mail will be delivered by John.

06
F
CP
Passive
The homework is done by Joan.
The homework was done by Joan.
The homework will be done by Joan.
Often it can also be used:
To describe artistic, scientific and literary endeavors
Examples:
The Mona Lisa was painted by Leonardo Da Vinci.
110
Research is being done on a cure for cancer disease.
To explain directions and procedures
Examples:
Poker can be played by many players.
To describe legal and governmental matters and to avoid placing direct blame:
Examples:
The new “Zero Alcohol in traffic” politics was being discussed.
er
ACTIVE VOICE x PASSIVE VOICE
t
in
eW
EXAMPLES SUBJECT VERB OBJECT
PRESENT PERFECT Active John inhas delivered the mail.

al
-L
Passive The mail has been delivered by John.

7
CAN; MAY; MUST; Active She must finish this wedding dress today.
-1
SHOULD with BE
1
Passive The wedding dress must be finished today.

84
9.
HAVE TO AND OUGHT Active Paula has to write the letter.

TO WITH BE
10
Passive The letter has to be written by Paula.

7.
06
CONTINUOUS TENSE Active Joseph is driving the car.

WITH BEING
F
Passive The car is being driven by Joseph.

CP
NEGATIVE = NOT AFTER Active His daughter didn’t eat The cookie.
THE AUXILIARY
Passive The cookie was not eaten by his daughter.
QUESTIONS AUXILIARY Active Will they deliver the pizzas on time?

BEFORE THE SUBJECT
Passive Will the pizzas be delivered on time by them?
PAY ATTENTION!
Passive constructions are easy to spot. We simply need to look for a form of the verb TO BE (is,
are, am, was, were, has been, have been, had been, will be, will have been, being) followed by a
past participle.
111
We form the passive voice:
❖ Of Present perfect sentences with have (has) been + the past participle of the main verb.
John has delivered the mail.
The mail has been delivered by John.
❖ Of Sentences using can, may, must, and should with be + the past participle of the
main verb.
They must finish this work today.
This work must be finished today.
❖ Using have to and ought to with be + the past participle of the main verb.
er
She has to send that letter.
t
in
That letter has to be sent.
eW
❖ Using Continuous tense with being + the past participle of the main verb.
in
She is writing the letter.
al
The letter is being written by her.
-L
❖ In negative form by placing not after the auxiliary.

7
The book was not written by Hemingway.

-1
The merchandise will not be delivered before Tuesday.

1
84
❖ In questions by placing the auxiliary before the subject.

9.
Was the book written by Hemingway?

10
Will the merchandise be delivered before Tuesday?

7.
06
F
CP
112
EXERCISE
Change the sentences from the active voice to the passive voice:
1. Sally bought a new house for her family.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Paulo opens the door.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Richard and Susan will visit their parents next holyday.
er
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
t
in
4. She has not read the letter.
eW
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. She didn't win the game. in

al
-L
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. My mother is making a beautiful birthday cake for me.

7
-1
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
1
84
7. The teacher should open the classroom’s window.

9.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
10
8. They have seen the doctor since he was sick.

7.
06
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
F
9. He stopped the bus.

CP
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. She does her lessons everyday.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
11. He can not help her.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
12. Does the police officer catch the thief?
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
13. I will be studying English all night long.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
14. We have not agreed to this issue.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
113
15. He could not sell that dresser.
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. DIRECT AND INDIRECT SPEECHES
8.1. DIRECT SPEECH
Direct Speech happens every time we transcribe exactly what someone/somebody said. This kind of sentence usually appears
er
within quotation marks (“…”). For this reason it is also known as Quoted Speech.
t
in
Examples:
eW
Maria said, “Ballroom dancing classes are gorgeous.”
“Ballroom dancing classes are gorgeous”, Maria said. in

al
-L
When presenting the Quoted/Direct Speech, as we can easily confirm in both sentences presented above, it must be transcribed
word by word, i.e., no word can be changed and/or omitted.
7
1 -1
8.2. INDIRECT SPEECH

84
9.
10
Indirect Speech is also called Reported Speech and it makes reference to a sentence reporting what someone/somebody has
said. With Indirect Speech there is no need to transcribe word by word. In fact, words such as pronouns and time expressions
7.
need to be changed, so they can match the new sentence.

06
If the reporting verb is in the simple present or future, the verb doesn’t change in the reported clause. Only the subject and the
F
pronoun will change.

CP
Examples:
Brown says, “My car is broken”.
Brown says (that) his car is broken.
Jack says, “We will have dinner at Marco’s restaurant tomorrow.”
Jack says (that) we will have dinner at Marco’s restaurant tomorrow.
If the reporting verb is in the past, the reported clause will be in a past too. This form is usually one step back into the past
when compared to its original.
114
Examples:
The teacher told me yesterday: “If youdon’t finish your test in 15 minutes, I’ll pick it anyway”.
The teacher told me (that) if I didn’t finish my test in 15 minutes, he would pick it anyway.
Jane said: “This play is awesome”.
Jane said to me (that) that play was awesome.
He has told me recently: “You were in need of special attention a couple of months ago.”
He has told me recently (that) I had been in need of special attention a couple of months before.
t er
in
eW
MODAL’S CHANGES EXPRESSIONS OF TIME’S CHANGES
Will Would This That
Can Could These

in Those
al
-L
Must / have to Had to Today Yesterday / that day
Shall Should Last week The week before last / the previous week
7
-1
May Might Tomorrow Today or the next / following / previous day

1
could, would, Now Then / at that time

84
should, might NO …Ago …Before

and ought to.
9.
CHANGE
Next The following week
10
Here There
7.
06
In these cases we also have some rules concerning the proper way to change the verb tenses. Pay attention to the table below.
F
CP
DIRECT SPEECH INDIRECT SPEECH
Simple Present Continuous Past Continuous
She said, “I’m teaching English”. She said she was teaching English.
Simple Present Tense Simple Past
He said, “I don’t eat very much”. He said he didn’t eat very much.
Present Perfect Past Perfect
He said, “I have just finished dinner”. He said he had just finished dinner.
Present Perfect Continuous Past Perfect Continuous
She said, “I have been dancing for ten years”. She said she had been dancing for ten years.
Simple Past Past Perfect
She said, “I finished the homework”. She said she had finished the homework.
Past Continuous Past Perfect Continuous
115
You said, “I was running.” You said you had been running.
Past Perfect NO CHANGE
They said, “we had arrived before him”. They said they had arrived before him.
Past Perfect Continuous NO CHANGE
We said, “e had been working hard before she called” We said we had been working hard before she called.
Some other verbs that can be used to introduce Direct Speech are: to ask, to report, to tell, to announce, to suggest, to
complain and to inquire, among others. But pay attention! They are not interchangeable.
er
8.3. INDIRECT QUESTIONS
t
in
eW
When referring to reported questions, we follow the rules presented hereunder.
With YES/NO Questions we connect the reported question using IF. in

al
-L
Examples:
7
He asked, “Do you want to go with me?”

1 -1
He asked me if I wanted to go with him.

84
9.
10
With WH Questions (why, where, when, who, what), we use the WH Words to join the sentences.
7.
06
F
Examples:
CP
They asked, “Where did you go last weekend?”
They asked us where we had gone the previous weekend.
The basic reporting verb used in Indirect Questions is TO ASK, but it can vary by using the verbs TO ENQUIRE and TO WANTO
TO KNOW.
PAY ATTENTION!
When reporting a question in the Indirect Speech everything that relates to the question
structure will disappear. The reported sentence will not look like a question anymore.
Reported commands
To put a command into Reported Speech, the most common way to do it is to
116
use: form of TO TELL + TO + INFINITIVE.
AFFIRMATIVE COMMAND: Mother: "Do your homework."
Reported: My mother told meto do my homework.
NEGATIVE COMMAND: Teacher: "Don't talk with your neighbor."
Reported: The teacher told me not to talk with my neighbor.
EXERCISES
ert
in
eW
1. Joshua: “Mary is home”. in

al
-L
(A) Joshua tells that Mary is home.

(B) Joshua told that Mary was home.
7
(C) Joshua said that Mary was home.

-1
(D) Joshua says that Mary was home.

1
84
2. Peggy: “The girls helped in the house”.

9.
10
(A) Peggy told me that the girls had helped in the house.
(B) Peggy told me that the girls helped in the house.
7.
(C) Peggy said that the girls had been helping in the house.
06
(D) Peggy says that the girls were helping in the house.
F
CP
3. Christopher: “Do you want to dance”?
(A) Christopher asked her if she wants to dance.

(B) Christopher asked me if I want to dance.
(C) Christopher asked me if I wanted to dance.
(D) Christopher asked her if she want to dance.
4. Liz: “Tom went downtown an hour ago”.
(A) Liz said that Tom went downtown an hour before.

(B) Liz said that Tom was going downtown an hour before.
(C) Liz said that Tom had gone downtown an hour ago.
(D) Liz said that Tom had go downtown an hour ago.
5. Barbra: “I'm watching a talk show”.
(A) Barbra said to me that she is watching a talk show.
117
(B) Barbra says me that she was watching a talk show.

(C) Barbra tells me she was watching a talk show.
(D) Barbra told me she was watching a talk show.
6. Alice: “I’ve spent a lot to buy this LCD”.
(A) Alice complained that she had spent a lot to buy that LCD.
(B) Alice complained that she had spent a lot to buy this LCD.
(C) Alice complained that she spent a lot to buy that LCD.
(D) Alice complained that she spent a lot to buy this LCD.
7. Cindy: “When did you come”?
t er
(A) Cindy wants to know when I had come.
in
(B) Cindy wanted to know when I had come.
eW
(C) Cindy wanted to know when I came.
(D) Cindy wants to know when I came.
in
al
8. David: “Robert was ill”?
-L
(A) David said Robert was ill.

7
(B) David said Robert had been ill.

-1
(C) David says Robert had been ill.

1
(D) David says Robert was ill.

84
9.
9. Clair: “I didn't have time to do my homework”.

10
7.
(A) Clair remarked that she hadn't had time to do her homework.
06
(B) Clair remarked that she didn’t have time to do her homework.
(C) Clair remarked that she hadn't time to do her homework.
F
(D) Clair remarked that she wasn’t having time to do her homework.
CP
10. Joseph and Joe: “We will do our best in the exams tomorrow”.
(A) Joseph and Joe told me they have to do their best in the exams the next day.
(B) Joseph and Joe told me they will do their best in the exams the next day.
(C) Joseph and Joe told me they would do their best in the exams the next day.
(D) Joseph and Joe told me they’re going to do their best in the exams the next day.
11. Daniel: “Will it rain tomorrow”?
(A) Yesterday, Daniel asked me if it would rain today.

(B) Yesterday, Daniel asked me if it will rain today.
(C) Yesterday, Daniel asked me if it may rain today.
(D) Yesterday, Daniel asked me if it might rain today.
12. Chandler: “My wife and I definitely don’t like to eat here.”
118
(A) Chandler complained that they didn’t like to eat here.

(B) Chandler complained that they didn’t like to eat there.
(C) Chandler complained that they don’t like to eat there.
(D) Chandler complained that they don’t like to eat here.
9. APPOSITIVE
An appositive is a word, or group of words, that identifies or renames the noun – subject or object – which commonly appears
right after it and offers concise ways of describing or defining a person, place or thing. In fact, it may be looked upon as a
simplified adjective clause that serves to identify the subject. Occasionally, it can be found in the beginning of the sentence,
before the noun that it wants to identify. The appositive can be a short or long combination of words.
ter
in
eW
After the noun → My dog, a little female poodle that I bought one month ago, is running around the kitchen table. OR Roxanne
argued with Josh, her fifteen years old messy son.
in
Before the noun → Being a funny guy, Tom wants to be a comedian at that famous Italian show. ORIntending to stay home on
al
Saturday, Joan turned off her mobile.
-L
7
-1
PAY ATTENTION!
1
84
When an apposit ive comes after a noun, in th e middle of a s entence, it appears

between comas. When it c omes at the end of a s entence, w e separ ate it from the
9.
noun with a coma. When it comes before the noun it has one comma aft er itself.
10
The use of brac kets or das hes instead of commas als o emphasiz es the appositive.
7.
06
However , ther e ar e some appositives that can’t be omitted from the sentences, as they affect their basic meaning.
F
They are called restrictive appositives and, therefore, they should not be set off by commas.
CP
Robert’s sister Rachel started studying to become a nurse after his other sister Alice got seriously sick.
EXERCISE
Combine the following sentences below into a single clear sentence.
a) Marilia is a single woman. / Marilia always helped her friends with their marriage.
________________________________________________________________________________
b) Mike is a shy guy. / Mike is the best dancer we have in our dance class.
________________________________________________________________________________
c) William was an excellent student in high school. / William isn’t working due to his drugs addiction.
119
ADVANCED LEVEL 120
________________________________________________________________________________
d) Cole is the priest of my church. / Cole is helping homeless kids.
________________________________________________________________________________.
e) Raphael is a sneaky boy. / Raphael is a creepy boy. / Raphael was following Susan yesterday.
________________________________________________________________________________
f) Bruno is a peaceful man. / He is a shy young man. / He was the army’s best shooter.
_______________________________________________________________________________.
g) John is a private detective. / He found new evidences about Nicole’s murder.
er
________________________________________________________________________________.
t
in
eW
h) Helen was a great cooker. / She opened a restaurant at the most crowded street of Copacabana.
in
al
________________________________________________________________________________
-L
i) Madonna is a famous ballerina. / She is a successful singer. / I once saw Madonna.

7
_______________________________________________________________________________
1 -1
j) Adolfo is an elderly. / He is a grouchy man. / Adolfo bought a dog named Snoopy.

84
________________________________________________________________________________
9.
10
k) My brother is 14 years old. / Pablo is famous at home for his “midnight snack”.
7.
________________________________________________________________________________
06
F
CP
ADVANCED LEVEL
1. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE
Every sentence consists on a group of words, which expresses a complete thought or idea and is constituted by, at least, two
parts: a subject and a predicate.
1.1. SUBJECT
120
ADVANCED LEVEL 121
The subject is one of the two main constituents of a clause. It says what or whom the sentence is referring to. Every subject is
built around at least one noun or pronoun that governs agreement – forms and number – regarding the verb or auxiliary verb.
There are simple subjects – when they consist of one noun or a singular pronoun – and compound subjects – when they consist
of more than one noun or a plural pronoun.
Examples:
Judy runs on the beach every day.
Simple Subject
She runs on the beach every day.
t er
Judy and her dog run on the beach every morning.
in
eW
Theyrun on the beach every morning. Compound Subject
Family photoscover the girl’s bedroom walls.

in
al
-L
Some times the subject isimplied or, in other words, it doesn’t appear in the sentence. This is the case of the subject of
imperative sentences. Imperative sentences differ from conventional ones. They give a command or an order and they always
have the same subject – YOU. This subject is not expressed, it is merely understood.
7
1 -1
Examples:
84
9.
Be quiet! OR
10
Stand still! OR
7.
Don’t touch that! OR

06
Listen to me! OR
F
CP
Shut up! OR
Look at him!
Notice that on these examples the pronoun (YOU) is always implied – it is not written – because the person who is giving the
order is talking directly with the person who is receiving it. Thus, they are in the same context.
1. 1.1 FORMS OF SUBJECT
The subject can be realized, or taken to effect, according to the following forms.
Determiner less noun phrase – also called a bare noun phrase.
Example: Teachers are at work.
Determiner + noun phrase – this is usually called a determiner phrase.
Example: The large move truck stopped outside our house.
121
ADVANCED LEVEL 122
Gerund – always ended with ING.
Example: Dreaming is a pleasure.
His constant hammering was very annoying.
Infinitive – allow question words like whom or who.
Example: To eat is easier than to cook.
Who to hire is a difficult question.
Full Clause – introduced by the complement that and containing a subject and a predicate itself.
er
Example: That he had saved the child was known by everyone.
t
in
eW
Direct Quotation – used identically as if they were being applied to the direct speech.
in
al
Example: I love you is hard to hear these days.
-L
7
Expletive – these are words like it or there when they don't refer to anything or anyplace.
1 -1
Example: It rains.
84
9.
10
Cataphoric IT – this is the use of it when co-referring to a subordinate clause that comes after it.
7.
Example:It was known by everyone (that) he had travelled the world.

06
F
CP
1.2. PREDICATE
A predicate is one of the two main parts of a sentence and it modifies the subject, including the verb, objects, or
phrases governed by the verb. It describes the property of the person or thing referred to by the subject or the
situation in which this person or thing plays some rule. A predicate serves to make an assertion or denial about
the subject of the sentence and must contain a verb that requires, permits, or precludes other sentence
elements to complete it. Thus, it tells the action or condition. There are simple predicates – when there is only
one verb pertaining to the object – and compound predicates – when there is more than one verb pertaining to
the same object.
Judy reads the book.  Simple Predicate
They walked through the art gallery and admired the sculptures.  Compound Predicate
PAY ATTENTION!
122
ADVANCED LEVEL 123
To determine the subject of a sentence, first isolate the verb and then make a question
by placing “who?” or “what?” before it. The answer will be the subject.
1.3. SUBJECT COMPLEMENT
A subject complement is a part of a sentence that describes or identifies the subject. It can be a noun, adjective,
adverb or noun clause, completed with their optional modifiers. A subject complement usually follows a linking
verb.
Examples:
er
Coca-Cola is addicting.
t
in
This is my last chance.
eW
His problem is that he missed the last three CSI episodes.
in
al
-L
2. OBJECTS OF SENTENCE
7
-1
When nouns are not subjects they are usually objects and they are often part of the sentence predicate. Some
1
84
predicates include action verbs that can stand alone in the sentence, such as: “Sarah cried” or “John ate”.
9.
However, there are quite a few verbs that can’t stand alone, requiring another word or phrase in order to
10
complete the sentence and its sense – the noun or pronoun that help these verbs are called objects.
7.
An example of an object can be seen in the sentence “Jim bought a car”. The verb “bought” can’t stand alone in
06
the sentence or the sentence would have no sense. There are three kinds of objects: Direct Object; Indirect Object;
and Object of Preposition.
F
CP
2.1. DIRECT OBJECT
Whatever the subject of the sentence does, its action is done directly over the object – noun and/or pronoun that receive the
action of a verb. Therefore, the direct object refers to a person or thing affected by the action of the verb placed directly
after a verb; unless the sentence contains an indirect object. A direct object answers the questions about “whom” or "what" is
being targeted by the action.
Examples:
I bought candles.
Bill threw the ball to Cindy.
123
ADVANCED LEVEL 124
PAY ATTENTION!
There is a clear difference between a subject and a direct object. A direct object
receives the action, whereas the subject is performing the action (where an action
verb is involved)..
2.2 INDIRECT OBJECT
Indirect objects, like all objects, must be nouns or pronouns. They are included in sentences when the subject of the sentenc e
practices an action (direct object) over something or someone indirectly. It refers to a person or things who/which receive
er
the said action. Examples:
t
in
I lent Sally my tools. (My tools – direct object; Sally – indirect object)
eW
Joshua sent Emma a postcard. (A postcard – direct object; Emma – indirect object)
in
al
-L
PAY ATTENTION!
❖ An INDIRECT OBJECT always comes before the direct object.

7
-1
❖ I lent Sally my tools ≠ I lent my tools to Sally. In the first one, Sally is an
indirect object and in the second, to Sally is a prepositional phrase.
1
84
9.
2.3. OBJECTS OF PREPOSITIONS

10
7.
06
Every preposition has an object. An object of preposition is a noun or pronoun that receives the action of the
subject in the sentence, coming after the preposition to form a prepositional phrase. The crucial difference
F
between direct objects and objects of prepositions is that the second one occurs after a preposition; therefore
CP
without the preposition they don’t make any sense.
Examples:
From the beginning of the storm, Dorothy was sure she would make it home.
(beginning and storm – object of prepositions from and of)
The SWAT team will hide until sunrise.
(sunrise – object of preposition until)
Bill gave a car to Fernando and me for us to go to the hospital.
(Fernando and me – object of preposition to)
124
ADVANCED LEVEL 125
PAY ATTENTION!
An object of a preposition can cause confusion in the comprehension of the

structure section because it can be mistaken for the subject of a sentence.
Example:To Jane the wedding request was a big surprise.
Pay Attention  Jane is not the subject of this sentence!
To = preposition; Jane = object of preposition; The weeding request = subject

of the sentence.
t er
in
eW
3. VERBALS: INFINITIVES, GERUNDS AND PARTICIPLES
in
al
-L
These are words that seem to carry the idea of action or being, although they don’t essentially function as a true verb. There
are three types of verbals: Infinitives, Gerunds and Participles.
7
1 -1
3.1. INFINITIVE
84
9.
10
An infinitive functions as a noun, but we typically call it a verbal – a form that is based on a verb and expresses action or a
state of being.
7.
06
F
An infinitive or infinitive phrase can be the subject of a sentence, though infinitives as subjects are often considered awkward.
CP
It is more common to use an impersonal IT as the subject.
To be honest isn’t always easy. (subject) OR
It isn’t always easy to be honest.
An infinitive or infinitive phrase can be a direct object or a subject complement.
I want to feel less stressed. (direct object)
My favorite thing is to spend time with friends. (subject complement)
An infinitive or infinitive phrase can express a purpose.
Make time to relax.
We stopped to buy some gas.
125
ADVANCED LEVEL 126
Essentially, an infinitive is the basic form of a verb with or without the particle TO and it can not be inflected to agree with any
subject. Infinitives will almost always begin with TO, followed by the base form of the verb, and these are called To-Infinitives.
However, there are infinitives that will have no TO and they are called Bare-Infinitives.
To-Infinitive Bare-Infinitive
I need you to help me with my homework, please! Help me open this window, please!
I want her to come with me! Come with me, please!
t er
in
REMEMBER!
eW
Some verbs can only be followed by a gerund:
• I suggest asking her if she can make it.

in
al
• He recommends not waiting till the last minute.
-L
• We finished writing the report.

Some verbs can only be followed by an infinitive:
7
-1
• You should expect to be there by early afternoon.

• Learn not to live in the past.
1
• I hope to complete the course.

84
Some verbs can be followed by a gerund or an infinitive with no change in meaning:

9.
• He likes listening to jazz.

10
• He likes to listen to jazz.

7.
Some verbs require an object before an infinitive:

06
• He reminded me to call my mother.

• The school allowed her to skip the first level.
F
• I persuaded them not to sell their house.

CP
Some adjectives can be followed by an infinitive:
• I was disappointed to hear the news.

• He was surprised to get the promotion.
3.1.1. INFINITIVE PHRASE
An infinitive phrase is the infinitive form of the verb plus any complements or modifiers.
Examples:
He helped his son to build the tree’s house. (Used as noun)
Can you show me the best way to sell this painting? (Used as adjective)
The officer returned to help the boy who was screaming. (Used as adverb)
3.1.2. ABOUT PUNCTUATION
126
ADVANCED LEVEL 127
When it introduces a main clause, an infinitive phrase requires a comma if it is used as an adverb at the beginning of a
sentence.
Examples:
To buy a basket of flowers, James spent more than he thought he would do.
To go to the States, they needed more money than they thought.
When it breaks the flow of a main clause, it should be used comma both before and after the interrupter.
Example:
er
This basket of flowers, to be perfectly honest, was more expensive than I thought.
t
in
These glasses, to talk clearly, are damn expensive!
eW
PAY ATTENTION!
in
al
-L
Be sure not to confuse an infinitive with a prepositional phrase beginning with TO.
7
Infinitives – to + base verb form: to fly, to draw, to become, to enter, to stand, to

-1
catch, to belong, to understand, to believe, to imply, to infer, to keep, to climb, to dare, to

improve.
1
84
Prepositional Phrases – to + noun or pronoun and any modifiers: to him, to the

9.
committee, to my house, to the mountains, to us, to this address, to those guys, to them.
10
7.
06
3.1.3. INFINITIVE VERB FORMS

F
CP
Simple
Form • We had planned to watch all the soap opera.
Perfective
• The soccer players hoped to have won the first place of
Form
the championship after that last game.
Passive
• To be chosen as an Olympian must be the biggest thrill in
Form
any athlete’s life.
Perfective
Passive • The woman did not seem satisfied simply to have been
Form selected as second Brazil’s best top model.
127
ADVANCED LEVEL 128
3.2. GERUNDS
A gerund also functions as a noun and it is a verbal that ends with ING. A gerund or gerund phrase can be the
subject of a sentence, a direct or indirect object, a subject complement, or the object of a preposition.
I love spending time with my family. (direct object)
Living a balanced life is about integrating all parts of it. (subject)
Here are some tips for getting a healthy perspective on life. (object of preposition) The best part of life is
learning new things. (subject complement)
They resented us living a successful life. (indirect object)
t er
in
The term verbal indicates that a gerund, like the other two kinds of verbals, is based on a verb and therefore
eW
expresses action or a state of being. However, it occupies the same positions that a noun ordinarily would:
subject, direct or indirect object, subject complement, and object of preposition.
in
al
-L
PAY ATTENTION!
7
A common error in formal written English is mixing gerunds and infinitives when
-1
listing items in a series. A list of items should either be all gerunds or all infinitives.
1
84
9.
WE CAN SAY
10
• When he takes time off from work, he prefers relaxing at home,

7.
spending time with his family and getting things done around his house.
06
• She can’t stand getting up late and missing the bus.

F
CP
WE CANNOT SAY
• He prefers relaxing at home, to spend time with his family and to get
things done around his house.
• She can’t stand getting up late and to miss the bus.
In a series, either use TO with all the infinitives or only with the first one.
WE CAN SAY
• When he takes time off from work, he prefers to relax at home, spend
time with his family and get things done around his house.
• We love to sit by the pool, eat a nice meal, have a cold drink and enjoy
the sun.
128
ADVANCED LEVEL 129
WE CANNOT SAY
• When he takes time off from work, he prefers to relaxat home, spend time
with his family and to get things done around his house.
• We love to sit by the pool, eat a nice meal, to have a cold drink and enjoy
the sun.
3.2.1. GERUND AS SUBJECT
Traveling might satisfy your desire for new experiences.
Studying is an experience (that) I’ll never forget.
er
Smoking costs a lot of money.
t
in
Finding you is always quite difficult.
eW
Learning makes people more tolerant.
in
al
-L
3.2.2. GERUND AS DIRECT OBJECT
They stopped singing.

7
-1
I love watering my plants.

1
84
Our parents didn’t like our misunderstanding.

9.
Do you enjoy boxing?

10
The law forbids kidnapping.

7.
06
F
3.2.3. GERUND AS SUBJECT COMPLEMENT

CP
My cat's favorite activity is sleeping.
Among others, our son's best skill was writing.
His everyday’s occupation has been reading.
Her favorite hobby was golfing.
Our first love was swimming.
3.2.4. GERUND AS OBJECT OF PREPOSITION
Everyone knew that he was devoted to jogging.
The police arrested him for speeding.
They always dreamed about going on vacation.
129
ADVANCED LEVEL 130
The FBI arrested that well-known drug dealer for smuggling.
Does she object to working late?
3.2.5. GERUND PHRASE
A Gerund Phrase consists of a group of words, which usually are nouns and/or pronouns, modifiers and/or noun phrases. A
gerund phrase can be the subject of a sentence, a direct or indirect object, a subject complement or the object of a preposition.
3.2.5.1. GERUND PHRASE AS SUBJECT
Traveling with your parents might satisfy your desire for new experiences.
er
Studying abroad is an experience (that) we’ll never forget.
t
in
Finding a needle in a haystack is as difficult as it sounds.
eW
Finding a parking space is quite difficult in this area.
Learning about other cultures makes people more tolerant. in

al
-L
3.2.5.2. GERUND PHRASE AS DIRECT OBJECT

7
-1
They don’t appreciate singing out loud.

1
84
I love watering and taking care of my plants.

9.
Our parents don’t like fighting with each other.

10
Do you watch boxing orwrestling on TV?

7.
06
The law forbids eating and screaming in public libraries.

F
CP
3.2.5.3. GERUND PHRASE AS SUBJECT COMPLEMENT
My cat's favorite activity is sleeping all day long.
Among others, our son's best skill was writing novel books.
His everyday’s occupation has been reading international newspapers.
Her favorite hobby was golfing with friends.
Our first love was swimming all afternoon long.
3.2.5.4. GERUND PHRASE AS OBJECT OF PREPOSITION
Everyone knew that he was devoted to jogging with friends.
The police arrested him for speeding downtown.
They always dreamed about going with their family on vacation.
130
ADVANCED LEVEL 131
The FBI arrested that well-known drug dealer for smuggling undeclared goods.
Does she object to working in our shop?
3.3. PARTICIPLES
A participle is a verbal that is commonly used as an adjective and it often ends with ED or ING. The term verbal indicates that
a participle, like the other two kinds of verbals, is based on a verb and therefore expresses action or a state of being. However,
since they function as adjectives, participles modify nouns or pronouns. There are two types of participles:
Present participles – end with ING.
er
Past participles – end in ED, EN, D, T or N, as in asked, eaten, saved, dealt, and seen.
t
in
The crying baby had a wet diaper.
eW
Shaken, he walked away from the wrecked car.
The burning log fell off the fire.

in
al
-L
A participial phrase is a group of words consisting of a participle and a modifier(s) and/or a noun(s) or pronoun(s) that function
as direct object(s), indirect object(s), or complement(s) of the action or state of being expressed in the referred participle.
7
1 -1
84
Examples
9.
Removing his coat, Jack rushed to the river.

10
The participial phrase functions as an adjective modifying Jack

7.
Removing (participle) his coat (direct object of action expressed in participle)

06
F
CP
Delores noticed her cousin walking along the shoreline.
The participial phrase functions as an adjective modifying cousin
Walking (participle) along the shoreline (prepositional phrase as adverb)
Children introduced to music early develop strong intellectual skills.
The participial phrase functions as an adjective modifyingchildren
Introduced to (participle) music (direct object of action expressed in participle) early (adverb)
Having been a gymnast, Lynn knew the importance of exercise.
The participial phrase functions as an adjective modifyingLynn
Having been (participle) a gymnast (subject complement for Lynn)
131
ADVANCED LEVEL 132
PLACEMENT: In order to prevent any kind of misunderstanding or confusion, a participial phrase must be placed as close to
the noun it modifies as possible. At the same time, the noun must be clearly stated.
Examples:
Carrying a heavy pile of books, his foot caught on a step. ***
Carrying a heavy pile of books, he caught his foot on a step.
In the first sentence there is no clear indication of whom or what is performing the action expressed in the participle carrying.
Certainly foot can't be logically understood to function in this way. This situation is an example of a dangling modifier error
since the modifier (the participial phrase) is not modifying any specific noun in the sentence and is thus left "dangling". Since a
er
person must be doing the carrying for the sentence to make sense, a noun or pronoun that refers to a person must be in the
t
place immediately after the participial phrase, as it happens in the second sentence.
in
eW
in
PUNCTUATION: Whenever a participial phrase begins a sentence, a comma should be placed after the phrase.
al
-L
Examples:
7
-1
Arriving at the store, I found that it was closed.

1
Washing and polishing the car, Frank developed sore muscles.

84
9.
If the participle or participial phrase comes in the middle of a sentence, it should be set off with commas, but only if the
10
information is not essential to the meaning of the sentence.

7.
06
Examples:
F
CP
Sid, watching an old movie, drifted in and out of sleep.
The church, destroyed by a fire, was never rebuilt.
Note that if the participial phrase is essential to the meaning of the sentence, no commas should be used.
Examples:
The student earning the highest grade point average will receive a special award.
The guy wearing the chicken costume is my cousin.
If a participial phrase comes at the end of a sentence, a comma usually precedes the phrase whenever it modifies a previous
word in the said sentence. Although, there is no comma if the phrase directly follows the word it modifies.
Examples:
132
ADVANCED LEVEL 133
The local residents often saw Ken wandering through the streets.
(The phrase modifies Ken, not residents.)
Tom nervously watched the woman, alarmed by her silence.
(The phrase modifies Tom, not woman.)
REMEMBER
A participle is a verbal ending in ING (present) or ED, EN, D, T or N (past) that functions as an
adjective and, therefore, modifies a noun or a pronoun.
t er
in
A participial phrase consists of a participle plus modifier(s), object(s) and/or complement(s).
eW
in
Participles and participial phrases must be placed as close to the nouns or pronouns they
al
modify as possible, and those nouns or pronouns must be clearly stated.
-L
7
-1
A participial phrase is set off with commas whenever:

1
a) It comes at the beginning of a sentence;

84
b) Interrupts a sentence as a nonessential element;

9.
c) Comes at the end of a sentence and is separated from the Word it

10
modifies.
7.
06
Reverse Outlining: An Exercise for Taking Notes and Revising Your Work
F
Starting the Writing Process

CP
Understanding Writing Assignments
Writer's Block/ Writer's Anxiety
Writing Process Presentation
Academic Cover Letters
Action Verbs to Describe Skills, Jobs, and Accomplishments in Employment Documents
Audience Analysis
Business Letters: Accentuating the Positives
Color Theory Presentation
Cover Letter Presentation
Cover Letters 1: Quick Tips
133
ADVANCED LEVEL 134
Cover Letters 2: Preparing to Write a Cover Letter
Cover Letters 3: Writing Your Cover Letter
Designing an Effective PowerPoint Presentation
Effective Workplace Writing
Email Etiquette
Email Etiquette for Students
HATS: A Design Procedure for Routine Business Documents
Job Acceptance Letter Presentation
er
Job Skills Checklist
t
in
Letters Concerning Employment
eW
Management Resumes
in
al
Memo Writing
-L
Model Letters for Various Purposes

7
Parallel Structure in Professional Writing

1 -1
Paramedic Method: A Lesson in Writing Concisely

84
Prioritizing Your Concerns for Effective Business Writing

9.
10
Reference Sheets
7.
Resume Design
06
Resume Presentation
F
Resumes 1: Introduction to Resumes

CP
Resumes 2: Resume Sections
Resumes 3: When to Use Two Pages or More
Resumes 4: Scannable Resumes
Revision in Business Writing
Sales Letters: Four Point Action Closing
Scannable Resumes Presentation
Tailoring Employment Documents For a Specific Audience
Tips & Terms for the International Student's Job Search
Tone in Business Writing
Using Fonts with Purpose
134
ADVANCED LEVEL 135
Visual Rhetoric
Writing a Job Acceptance Letter
Writing a White Paper
Writing for a Chinese Business Audience
Writing for a North American Business Audience
Writing for an Indian Business Audience
Writing Report Abstracts
Writing Scientific Abstracts Presentation
er
Writing the Basic Business Letter
t
in
Writing the Curriculum Vitae
eW
Writing the Personal Statement
in
al
ESL Instructors and Students
-L
Grades 7-12 Instructors and Students

7
Non-Purdue College Level Instructors and Students

1 -1
Parents
84
Purdue Instructors and Students

9.
10
Workplace Writers
7.
06
4. COMPARING GERUNDS, PARTIPLES AND INFINITIVES

F
CP
Look at the following pair of sentences.
I was irritated by Bill's constant interrupting.
I was irritated by Bill, constantly interrupting.
In the first, the use of a gerund (functioning as a noun) allows the meaning to be expressed more precisely than in the secon d.
In the first sentence the interruption itself, a specific behavior, is precisely indicated as the cause of the speaker's irritation. In
the second the cause of the irritation isn’t clearly connected with Bill, who just happens to have been interrupting. In the
second sentence, interrupting is actually a participle, not a gerund, since it functions as an adjective modifying Bill.
The same pattern is shown in these other examples presented herein under.
The guitarist's finger-picking was extraordinary.
(The technique was extraordinary)
135
ADVANCED LEVEL 136
The guitarist, finger-picking, was extraordinary.
(The person was extraordinary, demonstrating the technique)
Note that in the first sentence, a gerund (noun-function) is used. On the other hand, the second sentence uses a participle
(adjective-function). In what concerns the meaning of each statement, it is fundamental to emphasize the subtle change in
meaning between the first and the second.
He was not impressed with their competing.
(The competition – competing – did not impress him)
t er
in
eW
He was not impressed with them competing.
(They did not impress him as they competed)

in
al
-L
The difference in the form of gerunds and infinitives is quite clear just from comparing the following lists:
7
Gerunds: swimming, hoping, telling, eating, dreaming

1 -1
Infinitives: to swim, to hope, to tell, to eat, to dream

84
9.
10
Their functions, however, overlap. Gerunds always function as nouns, while infinitives often serve as nouns. Deciding which
to use can be confusing in many situations, especially for people whose first language is not English.
7.
06
Confusion between gerunds and infinitives occurs primarily in cases in which one or the other functions as the direct object in a
sentence. In English some verbs take gerunds as verbal direct objects exclusively while other verbs take only infinitives; and
F
others still can take either. Many of such verbs are listed below, organized according to which kind of verbal direct object they
CP
take.
Verbs that take only INFINITIVES as verbal direct objects:
Agree Decide Expect Hesitate
Learn Need Promise Neglect
Hope Want Plan Attempt
Propose Intend Pretend
136
ADVANCED LEVEL 137
Examples:
I hope to go on a vacation soon.
(not: I hope going on a vacation soon.*)
He promised to go on a diet.
(not: He promised going on a diet. *)
They agreed to sign the treaty.
(not: They agreed signing the treaty.*)
ter
in
Because she was nervous, she hesitated to speak .
eW
(not: Because she was nervous, she hesitated speaking .*)
in
al
They will attempt to resuscitate the victim
-L
(not: They will attempt resuscitating the victim.*)

7
1 -1
Verbs that take only GERUNDS as verbal direct objects

84
9.
deny risk delay consider

10
7.
can't help keep give up be fond of

06
finish quit put off practice

F
CP
postpone tolerate suggest stop (quit)
regret enjoy keep (on) dislike
admit avoid recall mind
miss detest appreciate recommend
get/be through get/be tired of get/be accustomed to get/be used to
Examples:
They always avoid drinking before driving.
(not: They always avoid to drink before driving.*)
I recall asking her that question.
137
ADVANCED LEVEL 138
(not: I recall to ask her that question.*)
She put off buying a new jacket.
(not: She put off to buy a new jacket.*)
Mr. Allen enjoys cooking .
(not: Mr. Allen enjoys to cook .*)
Charles keeps calling her.
er
(not: Charles keeps to call her.*)
t
in
eW
Verbs that take GERUNDS or INFINITIVES as verbal direct objects
in
al
start begin continue hate
-L
prefer like love try

7
1 -1
Examples:
84
She has continued to work at the store.

9.
10
She has continued working at the store.

7.
06
They like to go to the movies.

F
They like going to the movies.

CP
Brent started to walk home.
Brent started walking home.
TO STOP, TO FORGET AND TO REMEMBER
These three verbs change their meaning depending on whether a gerund or infinitive is used as the object. Check the examples
presented below.
He stopped to smoke. (He was doing something, stopped and started smoking).
She stopped smoking. (She doesn’t smoke anymore).
Jack forgets to take out the cat. (He regularly forgets).
Jack forgets taking out the cat. (He did it, but he doesn't remember now).
138
ADVANCED LEVEL 139
Jack forgot to take out the cat. (He never did it).
Jack forgot taking out the cat. (He did it, but he didn't remember sometime later).
Jack remembers to take out the cat. (He regularly remembers.)
Jack remembers taking out the cat. (He did it, and he remembers now.)
Jack remembered to take out the cat. (He did it.)
Jack remembered taking out the cat. (He did it, and he remembered sometime later.)
ter
in
SENSE VERBS + OBJECT + GERUND OR BASE FORM VERB
eW
Certain sense verbs take an object followed by either a gerund or a simple verb (infinitive form minus the word to). With many
of the verbs that follow the object, the use of the gerund indicates continuous action while the use of the simple verb indicates
in
a one-time action. Nevertheless, there are cases when the simple verb can indicate continuous action: this happens whenever
al
the expression of “a one-time action” doesn’t make sense in the context.
-L
7
-1
to feel to hear to notice to watch

1
84
to see to smell to observe to sound

9.
10
7.
Examples:
06
I felt my heart pumping vigorously. (continuous action)

F
CP
I felt my heart pump vigorously. (continuous action)
We saw him playing basketball. (continuous action)
We saw him play basketball. (continuous action)
Tom heard the victim shouting for help. (continuous action)
Tom heard the victim shout for help. (one-time action)
We could smell the pie baking in the kitchen. (continuous action)
We could smell the pie bake in the kitchen. (continuous action)
The detective noticed the suspect biting his nails. (continuous action)
The detective noticed the suspect bite his nails. (one-time action)
139
ADVANCED LEVEL 140
He observed that guy yawning. (continuous action)
He observed that guy yawn. (one-time action)
His sister watches him yelling. (continuous action)
His sister watches him yell. (one-time action)
The priest sounded to me like faking. (continuous action)
The priest sounded to me like fake. (one-time action)
NOTE:
er
Sometimes the simple-verb version might seem unconventional, so it's safer to use the gerund version in the majority of the
t
in
cases.
eW
EXERCISES
in
al
Quiz: Gerund or Infinitive?
-L
1. I remembered _____ the Queen in London, in 1999.

7
-1
(A) meet
1
(B) to meet
84
(C) meeting
(D) to meeting
9.
10
7.
2. Did you remember _____ the letter?

06
(A) post
(B) to post
F
(C) posting
CP
(D) to posting
3. I'm not used _____ up this early.
(A) get
(B) to get
(C) getting
(D) to getting
4. I used _____ to the cinema a lot.
(A) go
(B) to go
(C) going
(D) to going
140
ADVANCED LEVEL 141
5. I regret _____ Mary about the wedding.
(A) tell
(B) to tell
(C) telling
(D) to telling
6. Mrs. Jones, I regret _____ you that your credit limit has been exceeded.
(A) inform
(B) to inform
(C) informing
(D) to informing
ter
in
7. Stop _____ this terrible noise at once!
eW
(A) make
(B) to make in
al
(C) making
(D) to making
-L
7
8. I wanted to stop _____ some presents, but we didn't have enough time.
1 -1
(A) to
84
(B) to buy
9.
(C) buying
(D) to buying
10
7.
06
9. Look, it is starting _____.

F
(A) rain
CP
(B) to rain
(C) raining
(D) to raining
10. I finished _____ English when I was twenty.
(A) learn
(B) to learn
(C) learning
(D) to learning
11. She no longer smokes. She stopped ______ about three months ago.
(A) smoke
(B) to smoke
(C) to smoking
(D) smoking
141
ADVANCED LEVEL 142
5. MAIN CLAUSE
A main clause of any sentence is also called an independent clause because it can stand alone as a sentence, without the
help of another clause. A main clause contains a subject and a verb and expresses a complete idea. All complete sentences
have at least one main clause. A sentence with only one clause is called a simple sentence. A sentence with two or one more
independent clauses is called a compound sentence. In a compound sentence, you can join the independent clauses with a
comma and a conjunction such as: and; but; or; although; so; yet; nor; etc.
Examples of Simple Clauses:
ter
in
The steam turbine was invented by Charles Parsons in 1884.
eW
Brazil has won the World Cup Soccer on five different occasions.
in
The consistent economical growing of Brazil puts it among the developed countries.
al
Examples of Compound Sentences:
-L
The first thermometer was invented by the German physicist Gabriel Fahrenheit, and the Fahrenheit temperature scale bears
7
his name.
-1
Brazil has won the World Cup Soccer on five different occasions, so it is the sole five times winning champion of this
1
84
tournament.
9.
The consistent economical growing of Brazil puts it among the developed countries, although it still needs to improve in other
10
crucial areas.
7.
06
EXERCISES
F
CP
Choose the one word or phrase that best completes the sentences.
1. The Harvest Moon, the full moon nearest the autumnal equinox, _____________ a period of several days when the moon
rises soon after sunset.
(A) it brings
(B) bringing
(C) for bringing
(D) brings
2. Like the end of the Paleozoic era, _____________ marked by widespread extinction of species.
(A) of the Mesozoic was

(B) was the end of the Mesozoic
(C) the end of the Mesozoic was
(D) the end was of the Mesozoic
3. On some sailboats ________________ a tiller instead of a wheel for steering.
142
ADVANCED LEVEL 143
(A) there is
(B) has
(C) there are
(D) with
4. Even before _________________, Spain had begun to devise an administrative system to control its empire in the New
World.
(A) to be over the heroic age

(B) it the heroic age
(C) was the heroic age over
(D) the heroic age was over
t er
in
5. Biologically speaking, women are ____________________________ men.
eW
(A) usually older about
(B) bound to live longer than in
al
(C) used to be older with
(D) bound living longer than
-L
7
-1
6. SUBORDINATE CLAUSE
1
84
9.
A subordinate clause contains a subject and a verb but does not express a complete idea. A subordinate clause is an
10
incomplete sentence; it cannot stand alone. You must connect it to a main clause by using a subordinating word, which is
also called a subordinator. Because a subordinate clause depends on a main clause to express a complete idea, it is
7.
sometimes called dependent clause. A sentence with at least one subordinate clause is called a complex sentence.
06
Whenever the subordinate clause comes first, it is followed by a comma.

F
CP
Example:
As electronic technology rapidly developed, the transistor gave way to the integrated circuit.
6.1. NOUN CLAUSE
A noun clause functions as a noun in a phrase. It has a subordinate, a subject and a verb and it is formed with subordinator +
subject + verb (+ rest of clause). In a sentence, a noun clause can serve the following functions: subject, direct object and
object of preposition.
6.1.1. AS SUBJECT
How life began has been a topic of debate for many centuries.
143
ADVANCED LEVEL 144
Where she lives I didn’t know and I still don’t.
Who to go with is my now my main problem.
6.1.2. AS DIRECT OBJECT
In 1978 scientists discovered that the planet Pluto has a satellite.
She will be there whenever she feels the urge to do so.
I’ve tried talking to you when you were in town.
er
6.1.3. SUBORDINATORS IN NOUN CLAUSES
t
in
eW
Noun clauses usually begin with words called subordinating conjunctions or subordinators.
Subordinators in Noun Clauses

in
al
-L
how how soon whenever who

7
however if where whoever

1 -1
how long that wherever whom

84
how many what whether (or not) whomever

9.
10
how much whatever which whose

7.
how often when whichever why

06
F
CP
NOTES
In some sentences, the subordinator is also the subject of the noun clause.
Example:
Whoever bothers to read junk mail is probably wasting a lot of time.
When a noun clause is the subject of a sentence, there must be a verb in the main clause.
Example:
That goods are scarce is the central fact behind the science of economics.
NC V
When a noun clause is the direct object of a sentence, there must be a subject and a verb in the main clause.
Example:
Children usually imitate whatever their parents do.
144
ADVANCED LEVEL 145
S V NC
When a noun clause begins with THAT and it is used as a direct object in a sentence, you can omit it without changing the
desired meaning.
Example:
Most astronomers believe that some form of life must exist on other planets.
Most astronomers believe soform of life must exist on other planets.
er
Some noun clauses can be reduced to infinitive phrases. Look at some examples herein under.
t
in
eW
Noun Clause:
How society should distribute scarce goods is a central economic problem in any society.
in
al
-L
Infinitive Phrase:
7
How to distribute scarce goods is a central economic problem in any society.

1 -1
84
EXERCISES
9.
10
7.
Choose the option that best completes the sentences.

06
F
1. A good college History textbook includes ______________________ about History.

CP
(A) every student knowing

(B) should every student know
(C) in that every student should know
(D) what every student should know
2. The Counseling and Career Center provides academic and career advising, and it will also tell students
____________________ for other community resources.
(A) where to go
(B) where go
(C) where going
(D) wherever
3. How vines climb, ____________________, and what special needs they have, all make a big difference when deciding where
to put which vine.
145
ADVANCED LEVEL 146
(A) when they can be planted

(B) they can be planted
(C) can they be planted
(D) when were they being planted
4. A female tiger signals _______ ready to mate by leaving her scratch marks ad scent on trees.
(A) that its

(B) that it’s
(C) that is it
er
(D) that she’s
t
in
eW
5. They were the only ones to tell me ___________________ the previously arranged spot.
in
al
-L
(A) what to get

(B) when to get
(C) which to get to
7
how to get to
-1
(D)
1
84
6. She doesn’t know _______________________ her to arrive to our apartment.

9.
10
7.
(A) how many it will take

how much she will take
06
(B)
(C) how long it will take
(D) how long will she take
F
CP
6.2. ADJECTIVE CLAUSE
The adjective clause comes after the noun(s) they modify. It is sometimes called relative clause because it begins with words
that we commonly refer to as relative pronouns.
6.2.1. RELATIVE PRONOUNS
People Animals and Things
Subject who, that which, that
146
ADVANCED LEVEL 147
Object whom, that which, that
Possessive whose whose
Note that adjectives clauses can also begin with the following subordinators:
When, Where, Whereby and Why.
Like all clauses, an adjective clause must also have a subject and a verb. Sometimes the subject is the relative pronoun. Within
an adjective clause, the relative pronoun can serve the functions presented below.
t er
in
6.2.2 SUBJECT
eW
Frederick Douglass was a former slave who became a leader in the anti-slavery movement.
in
The big fat lion was the one that attacked many people in the African savanna.
al
-L
6.2.3. DIRECT OBJECT

7
-1
Abraham Lincoln is the president whom historians believe was the greatest.
1
84
The cat is the animal that many Americans choose as their pet.
9.
Note that when WHOM, THAT or WHICH function as the direct object of the adjective clause, you can omit it, with no change in
10
meaning. Check it below.

7.
06
Abraham Lincoln is the president historians believe was the greatest.

F
CP
The cat is the animal many Americans choose as their pet.
6.2.4. OBJECT OF PREPOSITION
Bermuda is an area of islands and coral rocks to which thousands of tourists are attracted every year.
Note that the preposition before the relative pronoun is part of the adjective clause. Use a preposition whenever it is needed or
if you want to communicate a specific meaning. Look at the same sentence written in a different way.
Thousands of tourists are attracted to an area of islands and coral rocks called Bermuda.
Therefore, as the phrasal verb ARE ATTRACTED needs the preposition TO, the preposition must come before which in the
adjective clause.
147
ADVANCED LEVEL 148
Note that WHO, THAT, WHERE, WHEN and WHY never follow a preposition at the beginning of an adjective clause.
Note thatwhen an adjective clause is needed to identify a noun, it is called a necessary or restrictive adjective clause. No
commas are used in these cases. Check the example below.
Of all living things, the chimpanzee has a genetic make-up that is most similar to ours.
Note that when an adjective clause gives extra information and it is not necessary to identify the noun, commas are placed on
the adjective clause. Commas are a clue that can help you recognize some adjective clauses. Check the example below.
er
Elizabeth Cady Stanton, who was born in Johnstown, NY, was an early American feminist.
t
in
eW
Therefore, when commas on an adjective clause, THAT cannot begin the referred clause.
in
al
-L
Adjective clauses often appear in written and spoken English. A sentence might contain several adjective clauses. An adjective
clause can contain other adjective clauses. Check the following example.
7
-1
There are social situations where people who give information are higher in status than those who need
1
information.
84
9.
10
Some adjective clauses can be reduced to adjective phrases, with no change in meaning. An adjective clause can be reduced to
an adjective phrase only when it has WHO, WHICH or THAT as its subject.
7.
06
Adjective Clause:
F
The general who had led the Union Army to victory was Ulysses S. Grant.
CP
Adjective Phrase:
The general leading the Union Arm to victory was Ulysses S. Grant.
In order to reduce an adjective clause to an adjective phrase, you must:
Omit the subject of the clause (the relative pronoun);
Omit the auxiliary verbs, if there are any;
Change the verb to its ING form.
Note thatwe use the ING form (present participle) when the adjective phrase is in the active voice. On the other hand, we use
the ED form (past participle) when the adjective is in the passive voice. These rules apply to verbs in any tense.
148
ADVANCED LEVEL 149
6.2.5. ACTIVE VOICE
The technology that impacts us most is what we use in our homes.
The technology impacting us most is what we use in out homes.
6.2.6. PASSIVE VOICE
Yellowstone, which was authorized by Congress in 1872, is the oldest park in the US.
Yellowstone, authorized by Congress in 1872, is the oldest park in the US.
er
Note that if the adjective clause needs commas, the adjective phrase will also need commas. Check the following examples.
t
in
eW
Crater Lake, which was formed by a volcano, is a superb setting for day hikes.
Crater Lake, formed by a volcano, is a superb setting for day hikes.

in
al
-L
6.2.7. APPOSITIVE PHRASE

7
Sometimes adjective clauses can be reduced to appositive phrases. An appositive is a noun phrase that is placed near another
-1
noun to define it or to explain it. Appositives do not have verbs.

1
84
9.
Adjective Clause
10
One application of the laser is holography, which is the production of three-dimensional images.
7.
06
F
Appositive Phrase
CP
One application of the laser is holography, the production of three-dimensional images.
EXERCISES
Choose the option that best completes the sentence.
1. Hammurabi, ___________________ his capital at Babylon, issued a famous code of laws for the management of his large
empire.
(A) who had

(B) had
(C) whose
(D) whom had
149
ADVANCED LEVEL 150
2. Composer Maurice Ravel based some of his finest works on the Oriental scales ______________________ he was
introduced at the Paris Exhibition of 1889.
(A) at which
(B) to which
(C) which
(D) that
3. When changing banks, credit card companies may assign a lower cash advance limit than the one
______________________________ by a full credit line.
(A) to a client’s account assigned

(B) assigned to a client’s account
er
(C) assigning to a client’s account
t
(D) to an account client’s assigned
in
eW
4. Large, fast-moving trucks have been known to create wind blasts _________________________ a motorcyclist.
in
al
(A) for can startle
(B) can that startle
-L
(C) that can startle

(D) can for startle
7
1 -1
5. Our town’s doctor, _______________________ here in 1990, is now moving to another country.
84
9.
(A) whom has come

(B) which has come
10
(C) who has come

7.
(D) that has come

06
F
6. That was a historical victory ________________________ before they had gone to fight abroad.
CP
(A) that has been achieved

(B) who has been achieved
(C) who had been achieved
(D) that had been achieved
7. Once, we’ve tried to get his help but he had traveled to an Eastern country_________________________________.
(A) whose name I have forgotten.

(B) who name I have forgotten.
(C) what name I have forgotten.
(D) whom name I have forgetten.
8. There were times when we ____________________________________ our own skills and abilities.
(A) stopped believing in

(B) stopped believing on
(C) stopped to believe in
(D) stopped to believe on
150
ADVANCED LEVEL 151
6.3. ADVERB CLAUSE
The adverb clause modifies a main clause or the verb in a main clause. Like all subordinate clauses, an adverb clause must
have a subject and a verb. An adverb clause cannot stand alone as a sentence. It must be connected to a main clause to make
a complete sentence. Adverb clauses begin with words called subordinators or subordinating conjunctions.
6.3.1. SUBORDINATORS IN ADVERB CLAUSES
TIME
er
after as as long as as soon as
t
in
before by the time now that since
eW
until when wherever while
in
al
-L
PLACE
7
where wherever
1 -1
84
9.
CAUSE/RESULT
10
7.
because since so that in order that

06
so… that such…that

F
CP
CONTRAST
although even if even though despite the fact that

though whereas while in spite of the
fact that
MANNER
as as if as though just as
like
CONDITION
151
ADVANCED LEVEL 152
as long as if in case whether or not
provided unless
Some examples:
Martin Luther King was such a powerful orator that his speeches continue to inspire people many years afterward.
Even though it appears to help some people, doctors disagree on melatonin’s safety.
t er
in
The raccoon rubs and tears its food underwater, as if the food needed washing.
eW
in
al
NOTE: Sentences with condition’s adverb clauses called conditional sentences. The order of the adverb clause and the main
clause can be reversed without a change meaning. These two sentences below have the same meaning. Let’s check them.
-L
7
-1
Malcolm X had been assassinated by the time his autobiography was published.
1
84
=
9.
By the time his autobiography was published, Malcolm X had been assassinated.
10
7.
06
Please note that when the adverb clause comes at the beginning of the sentence, it is always followed by a comma.
F
CP
Some adverb clauses can be reduced to adverb phrases, with no change in meaning. Nevertheless, an adverb clause can only
be reduced to an adverb phrase when the subject of the clause is the same as the subject of the main clause.
Adverb clauses that begin with AFTER, BEFORE, SINCE, WHEN and WHILE are often reduced to adverb phrases.
ADVERB CLAUSE
When a substance undergoes a slow oxidation, the substance can burst into flame.
AVERB PHRASE
When undergoing a slow oxidation, a substance can burst into flame.
In order to reduce an adverb clause to an adverb phrase we should:
omit the subject of the clause;
152
ADVANCED LEVEL 153
omit the auxiliary verbs, if there are any;
change the verb to its ING form.
NOTE
We use the ING form (present participle) when the adverb phrase is in the active voice. We use the ED form (past participle)
when the adverb phrase is in the passive voice. These rules apply to verbs in any tense.
6.3.2. ACTIVE VOICE
t er
Frank Sprague developed the elevator after he had improved the electric engine.
in
eW
Frank Sprague developed the elevator after improving the electric engine.
in
al
6.3.3. PASSIVE VOICE
-L
7
Since it was discovered, penicillin has been used to treat bacterial infections.
1 -1
Since discovered, penicillin has been used to treat bacterial infections.

84
9.
10
ADVERB CLAUSE
7.
Because it was once considered a dangerous predator, the wolf has been hunted to near-extinction.
06
F
CP
ADVERB PHRASE
Once considered a dangerous predator, the wolf has been hunted to near-extinction.
Please note that an adverb clause cannot be reduced if the adverb clause and the main clause have different subjects. The
following sentence, for instance, cannot be reduced.
Wherever ornamental grasses are used, the garden will have a finished look.
EXERCISES
1. ___________ golf became increasingly accessible to Americans after World War II, the sport achieved popularity with both
average people and professional players.
(A) So
(B) As if
153
ADVANCED LEVEL 154
(C) As
(D) That
2. The “daddy-longlegs” spider is omnivorous, ____________________ plant fluids, animal tissue, and other daddies-longlegs.
(A) feeding on
(B) feeds on
(C) is fed
(D) to feed
3. Customers are entitled to receive additional credit services ____________________ maintain their account in good
standing.
t er
(A) because of
in
(B) they can
eW
(C) do they
(D) as long as they
in
al
4. Brasses are musical instruments that produce tones_____________________________________.
-L
(A) when lips buzzing the mouthpiece

7
(B) if buzz the mouthpiece

-1
(C) lips buzz the mouthpiece

1
(D) when lips buzz the mouthpiece

84
9.
5. Common soldiers must follow orders. ____________________________ officers.

10
7.
(A) Neither must

(B) Either must
06
(C) So must
(D) Then must
F
CP
6. If a defect can be solved by a mechanic it is a ___________________________________.
(A) mechanic defect.

(B) mechanical defect.
(C) functional defect.
(D) fundamental defect.
7. Your sister’s lunch ___________ quickly _____________.
(A) is; fixed

(B) was; fixing
(C) was; fixed
(D) is; fixing
154
ADVANCED LEVEL 155
8. They want to know _________________________ the Internet.
(A) who invent

(B) who invented
(C) whom invent
(D) whom invented
9. At the meeting she said there was no point ____________________ the trade with the Chinese.
(A) on increasing
(B) on increase
(C) in increasing
(D) in increase
t er
in
10. Yesterday, we ______________________ breakfast when Michael ______________________.
eW
(A) was having; dropped by.
(B) were having; dropped by. in
al
(C) had; dropped on.
(D) have had; dropped on.
-L
7
11. Maria could barely _____________ with what she _______________ previously.
1 -1
(A) get by; earns

84
(B) got on; earns

9.
(C) get on; was earning

(D) get by; was earning
10
7.
06
F
CP
7. IRREGULAR VERBS LIST
INFINITIVE PAST PAST PARTICIPLE
To awake awoke Awoken
To be was / were Been
To bear bore born
To beat beat beat
To become became become
To begin began begun
155
ADVANCED LEVEL 156
To bend Bent bent
To beset beset beset
To bet bet bet
To bid bid / bade bid / bidden
To bind bound bound
To bite bit bitten
To bleed bled bled
To blow blew blown
To break broke broken
To breed bred bred
t er
To bring brought brought
in
To broadcast broadcast broadcast
eW
To build built built
To burn burned / burnt inburned / burnt

al
To burst burst burst
-L
To buy bought bought

7
To cast cast cast

-1
To catch caught caught

1
84
To choose chose chosen

9.
To cling clung clung

10
To come came come

7.
To cost cost cost

06
To creep crept crept

F
To cut cut cut

CP
To deal dealt dealt
To dig dug dug
To dive dived / dove dived
To do did done
To draw drew drawn
To dream dreamed / dreamt dreamed / dreamt
To drive drove driven
To drink drank drunk
To eat ate eaten
To fall fell fallen
To feed fed fed
To feel felt felt
To fight fought fought
156
ADVANCED LEVEL 157
To find found found
To fit fit fit
To flee fled fled
To fling flung flung
To fly flew flown
To forbid forbade forbidden
To forget forgot forgotten
To forego (forgo) forewent foregone
To forgive forgave forgiven
To forsake forsook forsaken
t er
To freeze froze frozen
in
To get got gotten
eW
To give gave given
To go went in gone
al
To grind ground ground
-L
To grow grew grown

7
To hang hung hung

-1
To hear heard heard

1
84
To hide hid hidden

9.
To hit hit hit

10
To hold held held

7.
To hurt hurt hurt

06
To keep kept kept

F
To kneel knelt knelt

CP
To knit knit knit
To know knew know
To lay laid laid
To lead led led
To leap leaped/lept leaped/lept
To learn learned / learnt learned / learnt
To leave left left
To lend lent lent
To let let let
To lie lay lain
To light lighted/lit lighted
To lose lost lost
To make made made
157
ADVANCED LEVEL 158
To mean meant meant
To meet met met
To misspell misspell / misspelt misspell / misspelt
To mistake mistook mistaken
To mow mowed mowed / mown
To overcome overcame overcome
To overdo overdid overdone
To overtake overtook overtaken
To overthrow overthrew overthrown
To pay paid paid
t er
To plead pled pled
in
To prove proved proved/proven
eW
To put put put
To quit quit in quit

al
To read read read
-L
To rid rid rid

7
To ride rode ridden

-1
To ring rang rung

1
84
To rise rose risen

9.
To run ran run

10
To saw sawed sawed/sawn

7.
To say said said

06
To see saw seen

F
To seek sought sought

CP
To sell sold sold
To send sent sent
To set set set
To sew sewed sewed/sewn
To shake shook shaken
To shave shaved shaved/shaven
To shear shore shorn
To shed shed shed
To shine shone shone
To shoe shoed shoed/shod
To shoot shot shot
To show showed showed/shown
To shrink shrank shrunk
158
ADVANCED LEVEL 159
To shut shut shut
To sing sang sung
To sink sank sunk
To sit sat sat
To sleep slept slept
To slay slew slain
To slide slid slid
To sling slung slung
To slit slit slit
To smite smote smitten
t er
To sow sowed sowed/sown
in
To speak spoke spoken
eW
To speed sped sped
To spend spent in spent

al
To spill spilled/spilt spilled/spilt
-L
To spin spun spun

7
To spit spit/spat spit

-1
To split split split

1
84
To spread spread spread

9.
To spring sprang/sprung sprung

10
To stand stood stood

7.
To steal stole stolen

06
To stick stuck stuck

F
To sting stung stung

CP
To stink stank stunk
To stride strode stridden
To strike struck struck
To string strung strung
To strive strove striven
To swear swore sworn
To sweep swept swept
To swell swelled swelled/swollen
To swim swam swum
To swing swung swung
To take took taken
To teach taught taught
To tear tore torn
159
GABARITOS 160
To tell told told
To think thought thought
To thrive thrived/throve thrived
To throw threw thrown
To thrust thrust thrust
To tread trod trodden
To understand understood understood
To uphold upheld upheld
To upset upset upset
To wake woke woken
t er
To wear wore Worn
in
To weave weaved/wove weaved/woven
eW
To wed wed Wed
To weep wept in Wept

al
To wind wound wound
-L
To win won Won

7
To withhold withheld withheld

-1
To withstand withstood withstood

1
84
To wring wrung wrung

9.
To write wrote written

10
7.
06
F
CP
GABARITOS
BASIC LEVEL
2.2. ORDINALS
Write the respective ordinals and numerals:
Escreva os respectivos ordinais e numerais:
160
GABARITOS 161
03 – three 03rd – third 15 – fifteen
15th – fifteenth 27 – twenty-seven 27th – twenty-seventh
49 – forty-nine 49th – forty-ninth 32 – thirty-two
32nd – thirty-second 11 – eleven 11th – eleventh
68 – sixty-eight 68th –sixty-eighth 76 – seventy-six
76th – seventy-sixth 12 – twelve 12th – twelfth
99 – ninety-nine 99th – ninety-ninth 14 – fourteen
14th – fourteenth 100 – one hundred 100th – one hundredth
er
1,345 – one thousand three hundred (and) forty-five
t
in
1,560,300 – one million five hundred sixty thousand (and) three hundred
eW
322nd –three hundred (and) twenty-second
in
al
2,761st –two thousand seven hundred (and) sixty-first
-L
10,947th –ten thousand nine hundred (and) forty-seventh

7
235,564– two hundred thirty five thousand five hundred sixty four
1 -1
235,564th –two hundred thirty five thousand five hundred sixty fourth
84
97,783,290 –ninety seven million seven hundred eighty three thousand two hundred ninety
9.
10
7,770,777– seven million seven hundred seventy thousand seven hundred seventy seven
7.
06
Complete the numbers according to the example:

F
six – 6 twelve – 12 thirty – 30 a hundred – 100

CP
fifty – 50 thirteen – 13 thirty-nine – 39 eleven – 11
seventy-eight – 78forty-two– 42 twenty-three – 23 seven – 7
sixty-one – 61 four hundred – 400 ninety-nine– 99 seventeen – 17
nineteen – 19 forty-nine– 49 forty-eight – 48 eighteen – 18
eighty – 80 ninety-two – 92 a hundred forty-six – 146sixty-seven –67
a hundred– 100 sixth – 6th twelveth – 12th thirtieth – 30th
fiftieth – 50th a hundredth – 100th thirteenth– 13th thirty-ninth – 39th
eleventh – 11th seventy-eighth –78th ninety-second – 92nd forty-sixth – 46th
3. ARTICLE
161
GABARITOS 162
01. B (a; an; ___)
02. C (this; the; the)
03. D (the; a)
04. C (the; these; the; a)
05. C (____; the; the)
06. D (an; the)
07. D (____; a)
er
08. A (a; a; ____)
t
in
09. A (the; the; the; a)
eW
10. C (the; a)
in
al
11. D (an; the)
-L
12. D (the; a; the)

7
13. B (the; the; a)

-1
1
14. B (the; a; an)

84
15. B (the; a; ____)

9.
10
16. B (the; the; a; a; a; the)

7.
17. B (the; the; the)

06
18. D (the; the; the)

F
19. B (the; the; the; the; a)

CP
20. D (the; ____; the; a; the)
21. C (____; the; the )
22. B (The; an; the)
4. PLURAL
1. secretaries
2. jobs
3. saleswomen
4. psychologists ; assistants
162
GABARITOS 163
5. housewives
6. stories
7. fungi
8. girls ; boys ; cities ; countries.
9. parents-in-law
10. teeth ; children.
11. people
12. Churches ; discotheques.
er
13. Subways ; buses ; means ; towns.
t
in
14. disasters ; phenomena
eW
15. mothers ; feet
in
al
16. kids ; shows ; children lice.
-L
17. forests ; deer. ; brothers-in-law ; trout.

7
18. criteria ; faculties

1 -1
19. issues ; conferences ; tickets.

84
20. species ; fish ; rivers ; states

9.
10
21. indexes/indices ; professors ; information.

7.
23. godfathers ; buildings

06
(A) 23.coats ; skirts ; sisters ; attendants

F
24. syllabi/syllabuses ; words ; hypotheses ; appendices

CP
25. daughters ; classes ; Mondays ; Wednesdays ; Fridays.
26. Thursday nights.
27. photos ; drawers
5. PRONOUNS
Complete the following sentences with the possessive adjective that refers to the subject of the sentence.
1. her ; my
2. her
3. his.
4. your
163
GABARITOS 164
5. their
6. its ; our
7. his
8. her
9. its
10. their
Choose the correct form.
er
1. them
t
in
2. us
eW
3. We
in
al
4. us
-L
5. me
7
6. them
1 -1
7. him
84
8. him
9.
10
9. us
7.
10. me
06
F
Substitute the word or words in italic for the correct object pronoun.
CP
1. I see him on the bus every morning.
2. I sit near them during the lesson.
(B) 3 All the boys like her very much.
3. I often see you in the school cafeteria.
4. He always goes to the movies with them.
5. I know them very well.
6. Frank always waits for us after the lesson.
7. He drives them to school every morning.
8. I sit next to him.
9. We always have dinner with them on Friday nights.
164
GABARITOS 165
In the following sentences, substitute the words in italic for the correct possessive pronoun.
1. These seats are ours.
2. This umbrella is hers.
3. These pencils are yours.
4. That fountain pen in mine.
5. That overcoat is his.
6. Is this pack of cigarettes yours or is it his?
er
7. This is its.
t
in
8. Are these ours or are they theirs?
eW
9. Which house do you prefer: mine, hers or his?
in
al
10. Will they go to theirs or ours next weekend?
-L
7
Complete the following sentences with a possessive adjective or a possessive pronoun.

-1
1
1. his ; yours
84
2. my ; hers.
9.
10
3. their ; ours.
7.
4. our ; theirs.
06
5. my ; his.
F
6. their ; ours.
CP
7. his ; hers.
8. his ; yours.
9. their ; ours.
10. our ; theirs
Complete the sentences below with the correct reflexive pronoun:
1. herself.
2. ourselves
3. herself
4. themselves.
165
GABARITOS 166
5. ourselves.
6. themselves.
7. himself
8. yourself
9. yourself
10. myself
Substitute the word alone for the preposition by plus the respective reflexive pronoun.
er
1. He went for a walk in the park by himself.
t
in
2. They made that long trip through the woods by themselves.
eW
3. I don’t like to go to the movies by myself.
in
al
4. Helen, however, prefers to go to the movies by herself.
-L
5. John likes to take long walks in the woods by himself.

7
6. The old couple lives by itself/themselves in a cottage in the woods.

1 -1
7. John works by himself in a small office.

84
8. My aunt, although she is rather rich, prefers to live by herself.

9.
10
9. Do you like to eat by yourself?

7.
10. I went to the opera by myself last night.

06
F
Knowing that ONE and ONES are respectively used to replace singular or plural subjects, in order to avoid the
CP
repetition of the said subject, try to solve the following exercise: substitute the expressions in italic for the
words ONE or ONES.
1. Those little boys love to read Harry Potter’s books but, nowadays, they must read these ones.
2. Which T-shirt does your son want: the black one or the yellow one?
3. Look at those glasses. Which ones?
4. Pay attention to the car. Which one?
5. Let’s go to the pub. Which one?
6. Take care of the children. Which ones?
7. Be careful with that guy. Which one?
8. No one knows the place. Which one?
9. Where are my pants? Which ones?
10. I’ve seen his yacht. Which one?
6. PRONOUNS
166
GABARITOS 167
1. younger ; than
2. older ; than
3. bigger ; than
4. better ; than
5. worse ; than
6. easier ; than
7. more valuable ; than
er
8. more attractive ; than
t
in
eW
in
al
1. warmer ; than
-L
2. more expensive ; than

7
3. more satisfactory ; than

1 -1
4. wider ; than
84
5. more difficult ; than

9.
10
6. better ; than
7.
7. cleverer ; than
06
8. hotter ; than
F
9. prettier ; than
CP
10. larger ; than.
7. ADJECTIVES
1. younger ; than
2. older ; than
3. bigger ; than
4. better ; than
167
GABARITOS 168
5. worse ; than
6. easier ; than
7. more valuable ; than
8. more attractive ; than
9. warmer ; than
10. more expensive; than.
11. more satisfactory ; than
12. wider ; than
er
13. more difficult ; than
t
in
14. better ; than
eW
15. cleverer ; than
in
al
16. hotter ; than
-L
17. prettier ; than

7
18. larger ; than

1 -1
84
9.
10
1. the oldest
7.
2. the most expensive

06
3. the worst
F
4. the most important

CP
5. the largest
6. the most ambitious
7. the most attractive
8. the prettiest
9. the most intelligent
10. the funniest
11. the coldest
12. the best
13. the largest
14. the highest
168
GABARITOS 169
15. the most comfortable
16. the most difficult
17. the tallest
18. the best
Organize the sentences correctly according to the adjective categories and orders:
1. This is a cheap small old apartment.
2. This beautiful smart little young Italian girl is my daughter.
er
3. That tall well-groomed round-faced American boy has just arrived.
t
in
4. Their big pyramidal brownish wooden cottage is not so far away.
eW
5. Your marvelous enormous classic German silver Porsche has been sold.
in
al
-L
Make questions for the following answers:

7
1. How much does this T-shirt cost?

1 -1
2. How many bedrooms are there in your apartment?

84
3. How much are these pants?

9.
10
4. How long does it take you to come to school from your house?
7.
5. What is your girlfriend like?

06
6. How often do your parents-in-law usually call you?

F
CP
10. PRESENT TENSE
Choose the answer that correctly completes the sentences below.
1. D (is working; is studying)
2. B (have been trying; haven’t gotten it)
3. A (is playing; plays)
4. C (doesn’t have; lends)
5. A (is thinking; say; you)
6. A (travels; his)
7. B (haven’t had)
169
GABARITOS 170
8. C (hasn’t he)
9. A (have been living)
10. C (his; are)
11. C (He has gone to Europe.)
12. C (have been doing)
13. B (look)
14. B (is she doing)
15. C (has she done)
er
16. B (has she been doing)
t
in
17. B (goes)
eW
18. B (have been studying)
in
al
19. B (haven’t gone)
-L
20. A (are playing; are watching)

7
21. B (haven’t gone)

1 -1
22. D (does it run)

84
23. B (has traveled)

9.
10
24. A (are you going)

7.
25. C (Is she coming)

06
26. B (haven’t arrived)

F
CP
11. PAST TENSE
For each one of the sentences herein under, select the only correct option.
1. B (I had worked a lot.)
2. B (I had gone nowhere.)
3. D (She came of age yesterday.)
4. C (A long time.)
170
GABARITOS 171
5. A (Yes, he had.)
6. C (For a long time.)
7. B (have; been studying)
8. C (had left; arrived)
9. C (No, I haven’t.)
10. D (has; bought)
Complete the sentences below with the correct tense of the verb between brackets.
er
1. has already bought
t
in
2. got ; had been
eW
3. haven’t finished
in
al
4. had been riding ; met
-L
5. have been living

7
6. was running ; fell

1 -1
7. had just finished

84
8. were;doing ; broke
9.
10
9. resigned ; had worked

7.
10. was studying / studied

06
F
Choose the only option that correctly completes the sentences below.
CP
1. C (getting up; had already watched)
2. A (had been studying; called; to go)
3. C (rang; was writing)
4. D (was watching; was making)
5. C (has just traveled)
6. C (was playing; was doing)
7. A (hasn’t called)
8. D (is thinking; going)
12. FUTURE
171
GABARITOS 172
Choose the correct option to complete the sentences herein under.
1. C (is going to draw)
2. D (will meet)
3. C (was walking; met)
4. C (called; had arrived)
5. D (will have gotten)
6. D (heard; said)
er
7. D (was playing; rang)
t
in
eW
8. B (retired)
9. B (won’t be traveling)
in
al
10. D (went; was having)
-L
11. C (were; had)

7
12. E (leave; left)

-1
1
13. C ( is going to)

84
14. B (are; have missed)

9.
10
15. E (had finished; came)

7.
16. C (checking; has locked)

06
17. d (will have gotten)

F
CP
18. C (has taken)
19. E (went; arrived; had; left)
20. D (are; going to catch; remain; are)
21. D (has been calling)
22. D (has gone; to play)
23. A (take)
24. B (will leave; is going to travel)
25. C (loves; running)
26. D (did; have)
27. A (will have graduated)
28. A (didn’t go; broke)
172
GABARITOS 173
29. B (has gotten; to take; hope; gets
INTERMEDIATE LEVEL
1. ADVERBS
1. Classify the adverbs below according to what you’ve just learned.
Mainly – degree Usually – frequency Where – place
er
Deadly – manner Behind – place Maybe – doubt
t
in
eW
Almost – degree Tonight – time Rarely – frequency
in
al
2. Find the adverbs that correspond to each adjective:
-L
Fluent – fluently Friend – --------- Frequent – frequently

7
Slow – slowly Careful – carefully Rough – roughly

-1
1
Bad – badly Supposed – supposedly Accurate – accurately

84
9.
10
3. Put an X in the correct option:

7.
a. The plane arrived late, as usual.

06
( x ) adverb ( ) adjective
F
CP
b. My brother loves fast cars.
( ) adverb ( x ) adjective
c. Learning French is harder than I thought.
d. That site is updated daily.
e. My You’ve just ruined my best dress.
f. My He is friendly.
g. I'm watching the late class.
173
GABARITOS 174
h. They are running too fast.
i. I hope you try harder in the future.
j. Voanews.com is a daily online newspaper.
er
k. Computers work better nowadays.
t
in
eW
l. He was talking with her in a friendly way.
in
al
-L
7
4. Complete the sentences below with the adverbs that relate to the words or expressions in brackets, and
-1
classify each one of them:

1
84
a. Sue is completely (complete) crazy about her husband.

9.
(Manner)
10
b. Usually (usual), Tom goes out with his girlfriend.

7.
06
(Frequency)
F
c. My daughter went to school yesterday (the day before today).

CP
(Time)
d. I think she is upstairs (on the upper floor).
(Place)
e. Probably (probable) we will need to go to the hospital.
(Doubt)
f. They have almost (nearly, closely) the same age.
(Degree or intensity)
2. PREPOSITIONS
Complete the sentences herein under with appropriate preposition.
174
GABARITOS 175
1. This book belongs to John.
2. We all went for a walk in/at the park.
3. Sam bought this car in August.
4. They plan to trade it for a new one after/before spring.
5. He was looking for the pen that John lost.
6. Ken usually sits near/at/on/beside/close to/next to/by this desk.
7. I make many mistakes during spelling.
er
8. The man walked quickly into the room and went to bed.
t
in
9. She spends a lot of time with her English homework.
eW
10. We read about the accident in the newspaper this morning.
11. I must write a letter to my aunt. in

al
12. She went through the forest to find some wood.
-L
13. Julia sits in front of me, and Helen sits between Harry and Hope.
7
-1
14. The boat moved slowly through/outside the coast.

1
84
15. Everyone laughed at/about William’s story.

9.
16. The woman smiled at me very pleasantly.

10
17. He thanked me for my interest in the matter.

7.
06
18. How much did they pay for their new house?
19. They buy everything oncredit.

F
CP
20. She sold it to me, and I bought it for my mother.
21. Do you know what happened to Martha?
22. You must always listen to your parents.
23. She wants to arrive there before them.
24. What do you like to do after having dinner?
25. I think they were talking about us at/in the party last night.
26. Where does your cousin like to go on Friday and Saturday nights?
27. His sister has spent a lot on that blue skirt.
4. MODAL VERBS
175
GABARITOS 176
Use the MODAL VERBS or MODAL EXPRESSIONS that correctly complete each one of sentences below.
1. She had to go to bed early last night.
2. They have to/must buy some stamps because there aren’t any at the office.
3. We have to/must rush because we are late for class.
4. May I come in?
5. It may/might rain tomorrow.
6. My mother can swim very well.
er
7. I think you should/ought to call her.
t
in
eW
8. I would rather go to the farm tonight than tomorrow morning.
9. She had better not lie to me.

in
al
10. What do you think I should/ought to do?
-L
11. He could have helped us last night.

7
12. I would go if I could.

1 -1
13. They couldn’t do it last Saturday.

84
9.
10
Choose the correct answer.

7.
1. C (advise)
06
2. C (a desire about something or somebody)

F
CP
3. B (She can call me later)
4. D (to; for; to)
5. A (at; in; until; in)
6. C (place; direction; time)
7. D (an adversative conjunction)
8. D (a concessive subordinate clause)
9. D (an integrant subordinate clause)
10. C (one conditional subordinateclause; one main clause)
11. A (probable condition)
12. B (a future perfect; a probable condition; a possibility; a coordinative conjunction)
176
GABARITOS 177
5. WISH
1. C (I wish I had a more powerful one)
2. A (I wish I were a better cook)
3. D (I wish I could have the weekend off)
4. C (I wish I had an interesting one)
5. A (I wish I had a cookie)
er
6. B (I wish I had more time)
t
in
7. C (I wish I was younger)
eW
8. A (I wish I knew more people)
9. C (I wish I were not here)

in
al
-L
10. B (I wish he were here)

7
-1
Put the sentences in the correct order.

1
84
1. you – I – wouldn’t – there – wish – go – .

9.
10
I wish you wouldn’t go there.

7.
06
2. wish – ten – I – younger – were – I – years – .

F
I wish I were ten years younger.

CP
3. wishes – could – they – repair – she - come – to - boiler – the – sooner – .
She wishes they could come sooner to repair the boiler.
4. service – wish – hadn’t – to – I – agreed – do – you – that – .
I wish you hadn’t agreed to do that service.
5. with – wish – we – speak – the – to – manager – .
We wish to speak with the manager.
6. she – coming – I – with – was – wish – you – .
I wish she was coming with you.
177
GABARITOS 178
6. IF CLAUSES AND/OR CONDITIONAL CLAUSES
1. A (will do; have)
2. D (a ban)
3. A (were; would speak)
4. A (would have told; had asked)
er
5. B (must)
t
in
6. B (working)
eW
7. A (had bought; would have played)
8. B (had been; would have taken)

in
al
-L
9. A (we had gone; it is)

7
10. C (could have gone; had had)

-1
11. A (on not telling the truth)

1
84
12. D (‘d rather; stay)

9.
13. D (shouldn’t; studying)

10
7.
14. C (wins; will buy)

06
15. D (would have taken; had had)

F
16. A (‘d better; it’s)

CP
7. ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICES
Change the sentences from the active voice to the passive voice:
1. Sally bought a new house for her family.
A new house was bought by Sally for her family.
2. Paulo opens the door.
The door is opened by Pablo.
3. Richard and Susan will visit their parents next holyday.
Richard and Susan parents will be visited by them next holiday.
4. She has not read the letter.
178
GABARITOS 179
The letter has not been read by her.
5. She didn't win the game.
The game wasn’t won by her.
6. My mother is making a beautiful birthday cake for me.
A beautiful birthday cake is being made for me by my mother.
7. The teacher should open the classroom’s window.
The classroom’s window should be opened by the teacher.
er
8. They have seen the doctor since he was sick.
t
in
The doctor has been seen by them since he was sick.
eW
9. He stopped the bus.
in
al
The bus was stopped by him.
-L
10. She does her lessons everyday.

7
Her lessons are done by her everyday.

1 -1
11. He can not help her.

84
She can not be helped by him.

9.
10
12. Does the police officer catch the thief?

7.
Is the thief caught by the police officer?

06
13. I will be studying English all night long.

F
English will be studied by me all night long.

CP
14. We have not agreed to this issue.
This issue has not been agreed by us.
15. He could not sell that dresser.
That dresser could not be sold by him.
8. DIRECT AND INDIRECT SPEECHES
1. C (Joshua said that Mary was home)
2. A (Peggy told me that the girls had helped in the house)
179
GABARITOS 180
3. C (Christopher asked me if I wanted to dance)
4. C (Liz said that Tom had gone downtown an hour ago)
5. D (Barbra told me she was watching a talk show)
6. A (Alice complained that she had spent a lot to buy that LCD)
7. B (Cindy wanted to know when I had come)
8. B (David said Robert had been ill)
9. A (Clair remarked that she hadn't had time to do her homework)
10. C (Joseph and Joe told me they would do their best in the exams the next day)
er
11. A (Yesterday, Daniel asked me if it would rain today)
t
in
12. B (Chandler complained that they didn’t like to eat there)
eW
in
al
9. APPOSITIVE
-L
Combine the following sentences below into a single clear sentence.

7
-1
a) Marilia is a single woman. / Marilia always helped her friends with their marriage.
1
84
Marilia, a single woman, always helped her friends with their marriage.
9.
b) Mike is a shy guy. / Mike is the best dancer we have in our dance class.
10
7.
Mike, a shy guy, is the best dancer we have in our dance class.
06
c) William was an excellent student in high school. / William isn’t working due to his drugs addiction.
F
William, an excellent student in high school, isn’t working due to his drugs’ addiction.
CP
d) Cole is the priest of my church. / Cole is helping homeless kids.
Cole, the priest of my church, is helping homeless kids.
e) Raphael is a sneaky boy. / Raphael is a creepy boy. / Raphael was following Susan yesterday.
Raphael, a sneaky and creepy boy, was following Susan yesterday.
f) Bruno is a peaceful man. / He is a shy young man. / He was the army’s best shooter.
Bruno, a peaceful and shy young man, was the best army’s shooter.
g) John is a private detective. / He found new evidences about Nicole’s murder.
John, a private detective, found new evidences about Nicole’s murder.
h) Helen was a great cooker. / She opened a restaurant at the most crowded street of Copacabana.
Helen, a great cooker, opened a restaurant at the most crowded street of Copacabana.
180
GABARITOS 181
i) Madonna is a famous ballerina. / She is a successful singer. / I once saw Madonna.
I once saw Madonna, a famous ballerina and a successful singer.
j) Adolfo is an elderly. / He is a grouchy man. / Adolfo bought a dog named Snoopy.
Adolfo, an elderly and grouchy man, bought a dog named Snoopy.
k) My brother is 14 years old. / Pablo is famous at home for his “midnight snack”.
Pablo, my 14 years old brother, is famous at home for his “midnight snack”.
ADVANCED LEVEL
ert
in
eW
4. COMPARING GERUNDS, PARTIPLES AND INFINITIVES
in
al
Quiz: Gerund or Infinitive?
-L
1. C (meeting)
7
2. B (to post)
1 -1
3. D (to getting)
84
4. B (to go)
9.
10
5. C (telling)
7.
6. B (to inform)
06
7. C (making)
F
8. B (to buy)
CP
9. B (to rain)
10. C (learning)
11. D (smoking)
5. MAIN CLAUSE
Choose the one word or phrase that best completes the sentences.
1. D (brings)
2. C (the end of the Mesozoic was)
3. A (there is)
4. D (the heroic age was over)
181
GABARITOS 182
5. B (bound to live longer than)
6. SUBORDINATE CLAUSE
1. D (what every student should know)
2. A (where to go)
3. A (when they can be planted)
er
4. B (that it’s)
t
in
5. D (how to get to)
eW
6. C (how long it will take
in
al
-L
6.2. ADJECTIVE CLAUSE

7
Choose the option that best completes the sentence.

1 -1
84
1. A (who had)
9.
2. B (which)
10
7.
3. B (assigned to a client’s account)

06
4. C (that can startle)

F
5. C (who has come)

CP
6. D (that had been achieved)
7. A (whose name I have forgotten.)
8. A (stopped believing in)
6.3. ADVERB CLAUSE
1. C (As)
2. A (feeding on)
3. D (as long as they)
4. D (when lips buzz the mouthpiece)
182
GABARITOS 183
5. C (So must)
6. B (mechanical defect.)
7. C (was; fixed)
8. B (who invented)
9. C (in increasing)
10. B (were having; dropped by.)
11. D (get by; was earning)
er
PROVAS COMENTADAS DE INGLÊS
t
in
eW
2016/2017
in
al
-L
1. Chose the correct alternative according to the use of modals.

7
-1
1. ( ) I was so tired last night but I couldn’t sleep.

2. ( ) She not must help you.
1
3. ( ) I’m not sure. I might not go to the movies.

84
9.
(A) V–V–V
10
(B) V–F–V
(C) F–V–V
7.
(D) F–F–V
06
(E) F–V–F
F
CP
2. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below:
______ Christmas I went to Montreal to see my friend. He lives ______ a boat. Can you believe it? _____ the Winter he moves
to an apartment _____ the city.
(A) On – in – On - on
(B) At – in – At - in
(C) On – on – In - in
(D) Since – on – In - at
(E) From – at – At – in
3. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences accoding to the right use of articles:
I wrote ________ letter to my friend yesterday. Today I saw _________ letter on ________ dinner table. I forgot to post it.
(A) the – the – the

(B) the – the – a
183
GABARITOS 184
(C) a – a – a
(D) a – a – the
(E) a – the – the
4. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences according to the right use of pronouns.
Dear friend, thanks for ________ email. It is so nice to hear from_________. Let _________ tell you ________ news, even
though _________ are much more interesting.
(A) your – you – me – my - yours

(B) your – you – I – mine - yours
(C) you – yours – my – his - they
(D) my – me – mine – my – you
(E) yours – I – I – mine – theirs
t er
in
5. Choose the Word that best completes the sentence below.
eW
____________ place I’ve ever visited was the Netherlands.
(A) The most

in
al
(B) The more far
-L
(C) The farthest

(D) The far most
7
(E) The farest

1 -1
84
6. Whick of the relative clauses below modifies the object of the sentence?
9.
(A) The boy who lives near me has four cats.

10
(B) Stories which end in death make me cry.

7.
(C) The idea that she could fly is completely nonsense.

(D) The girl whose father died yesterday will move to China.
06
(E) I can’t find the person to whom you talked.

F
CP
7. Which of the alternatives below best completes the dialogue?
• John: _____ you watch the soccer game on cannel 4 last night?
• George: No _____ it good?
• John: Awesome! The Visiting team _____ score a single goal.
• George: I’m glad I _____ there. I hate to see a visiting team lose.
• John: I _____ know you were that crazy!!!! Why should the visiting team win?
(A) Do – Is – don’t – isn’t – don’t

(B) Did – Did – didn’t – didn’t - didn’t
(C) Did – Was – didn’t – wasn’t - didn’t
(D) Do – Do – don’t – don’t - don’t
(E) Were – Was – wasn’t – wasn’t - wasn’t
GABARITO COMENTADO
184
GABARITOS 185
1. Resposta: Letra B
A primeira frase está correta, pois utiliza-se o modal “could” para indicar possibilidade, habilidade ou capacidade no passado. “I
was so tired last night, but I couldn’t sleep.” Estava tão cansado(a) ontem à noite, mas eu não conseguia dormir. “could”
significa “conseguir” no passado.
A segunda frase – “She not must help you” – está errada pelo posicionamento do “not” antes do modal “must”. O correto seria
“She must not help you.”
Na terceira frase, o uso do modal de possibilidade remota “might” está corretamente empregado. Pelo fato de o falante não ter
certeza de que irá ao cinema, ele pode utilizar o “might”. “I’m not sure.” (Eu não tenho certeza). “I might not go to the
movies.” (Eu não devo ir ao cinema – sentido de dúvida ou possibilidade remota.)
2. Resposta: Letra C
Uma questão que cobra o uso de preposições. “On Christmas é utilizado mais especificamente quando se tem “Day” ou “eve”.
er
On Christmas Day; on Christmas Eve. Todavia, o uso tornou-se costumeiro com a preposição “on” para Christmas em geral. “He
t
in
lives On a boat.” (Ele mora em um barco.) Usamos “on” para transporte coletivo: on a boat, on a bus, on a plane etc. Para as
estações do ano, a preposição correta é “in”. In (the) Summer / spring / fall / winter (no verão, primavera, outono, inverno).
eW
Para partes da cidade ou até mesmo regiões da cidade, no caso, “the city”, que é afastada do centro, usamos “in”.
3. Resposta: Letra “E”

in
al
-L
Uma questão que avalia o uso dos artigos. Os artigos indefinidos são: “a” (um / uma – utilizado antes de palavra cujo som é
uma consoante. Exemplos: a cat; a dog; a one-hour break (som de consoante) e “an” (um / uma – utilizado antes de palavra
cujo som é uma vogal. Exemplos: an Orange, an Apple, an hour (h mudo) etc.) Esses artigos são utilizados para determinar
7
-1
algo indefinido, ou seja, algo que aparece no discurso pela primeira vez. Na primeira oração, “I wrote ____ letter to my friend
yesterday”. A palavra “letter” (carta) é um substantivo contável que parece no discurso pela primeira vez, por esta razão e tem
1
som de consoante “l”, coloca-se o artigo “a”. Na segunda frase, “Today I saw ____ letter” (Eu vi a carta...) o referente “letter” é
84
o mesmo do primeiro “letter”. Utiliza-se o artigo definido “the” (que pode ser usado tanto para substantivos plurais quanto para
9.
o singular). “the” tem tradução (o/a/os/as). Na última parte da oração (complemento) temos “... the letter ____ dinner table.”
10
(... a carta na mesa de jantar.) Neste caso, também se utiliza o artigo “the” (o/a/os/as), pois no senso comum, acredita-se que
“a mesa de jantar” seja específica, uma somente. Portanto, a letra correta é a LETRA E.
7.
06
4. Resposta: Letra A
F
Nesta questão, deve-se, primeiramente, levar em conta que se trata de uma carta. O destinatário é uma segunda pessoa “you”.
CP
Na primeira frase, “Dear friend, thanks for _____ e-mail”. Deve-se utilizar o adjetivo possessivo “your”, pois trata-se de uma
segunda pessoa. O que torna já a questão fechada com o gabarito LETRA (A).
Na segunda frase, “It is so Nice to hear from ____”. É muito bom ouvir de ___ . Deve-se usar um pronome objeto. O melhor
que encaixa no contexto é “you”.
Na terceira frase, Let ____ tell you ___ news... (Deixe-me falar a ti sobre minhas novas). Então utiliza-se o pronome objeto
“me” após “tell” e “my” news. (Adjetivo possessivo).
A questão versa sobre o uso dos adjetivos superlativos de superioridade. Na frase “______ place I’ve ever visited was the
Netherlands”. O adjetivo em questão é “far” (longe). O correto uso do superlativo de superioridade deste adjetivo é “the
farthest”. Trata-se de um adjetivo irregular. The farthest place I’ve visited was the Netherlands. O lugar mais longe que eu
visitei foi os países Baixos (Holanda).
6. Resposta: Letra E
Os pronomes relativos reiteram a informação (qualidade – adjetivo, portanto) do substantivo. Eles podem ser: Who (que/qual
– utilizado para pessoas); which (qual – utilizado para coisas); whose (cujo); that (que – usado tanto na posição de sujeito
quanto na de objeto, tanto para pessoa quanto para coisa); whom (que – utilizado para pessoas, ocupando a posição sintática
185
GABARITOS 186
de objeto). Das alternativas apresentadas, a única cujo pronome relativo modifica o objeto da frase (ou ocupa a posição de
objeto é a letra E): I can’t find the person to whom you talked. (Eu não consigo encontrar a pessoa com quem você
conversou.
Na alternativa A, “Who” refere-se a “the boy” que é sujeito de “lives”.
Na alternativa B, “which” refere-se a “stories”, que é o sujeito de “end”.
Na alternativa C, “that” refere-se à palavra “Idea” e está junto à oração substantiva subjetiva “she could fly” (ela conseguia
voar). Em That she could fly (que ela conseguia voar), thatmodifica “Idea” e está no sujeito da oração.
Na alternativa D, o pronome relativo “whose” modifica “The girl” que também é sujeito de “died”.
Na alternativa E, o pronome relativo “whom” modifica “person” e este está no objeto. You talked to whom (the person).
Você conversou com a qual (pessoa).
er
t
in
A alternativa C completa corretamente todos os espaços. A primeira frase está no passado e é uma pergunta. Por esta razão,
utiliza-se o auxiliar referente ao passado “did”. No segundo espaço, há também uma pergunta no contexto de passado, mas
eW
pergunta-se se o jogo foi bom. O verbo “to be” (ser/estar) no passado e melhor empregado no singular é “was”. Na terceira
frase, trata-se de uma frase negativa, ainda no contexto de passado. Usa-se o auxiliar did + not (didn’t) para o verbo “score”
in
(pontuar). Na quarta oração, usa-se o verb to be no passado, conjugando com o sujeito “I” (I was there) – Eu estive lá. Na
al
última, usa-se novamente a partícula “not” junto ao auxiliar “did”, do passado, formando “didn’t” para completar a ironia (eu
-L
não sabia que você era doido).

7
-1
2015/2016
1
84
9.
Read the texto below and answer questions 24 to 28 according the text:
10
The oldest human footprints in Europe have been discovered in Britain. There are only three other sets of footprints that
7.
are older and they are in Africa.

06
Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints an created a 3D image from them.The images and model were
unveiled at a news conference at the British Museum in London. Scientists think that most of the footprints are children’s. There
F
was at least one adult, too.

CP
Discoveries of ancient man’s footprints are extremely rare. Scientists say that the discovery will rewrite our understanding
of human occupation of Britain and Europe.
24. In the sentence: “The oldest human footprints in Europe have been discovered in Britain”, choose the correct verb tense.
(A) Simple past.

(B) Past perfect.
(C) Simple present.
(D) Present perfect continuous.
(E) Present perfect.
25. Chose the alternative that shows a superlative form.
(A) There was at lest one adult, too.

(B) The oldest human footprints in Europe have been discovered in Britain.
(C) Scientists think that most of the footprints are children’s.
186
GABARITOS 187
(D) There are only three other sets of the footprints that are older an they are in Africa.
(E) Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints and created a 3D image from them.
26. Chose the correct alternative according to the text.
I. The oldest human footprints were found in Britain.

II. The footprints are children’s.
III. The findings are quite common.
(A) Only I and II are correct.

(B) Only II and III are correct.
(C) Only I and II are correct.
er
(D) I, II and III are correct.
t
in
(E) I, II and III are incorrect.
eW
27. Read the sentence below.
in
al
Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints an created a 3D image from them.
-L
The alternative that correctly transforms the sentence above to the simple present is:
7
-1
(A) Scientists take digital photographs of the footprints an create a 3D image from them.
1
(B) Scientists tooks digital photographs of the footprints an creates a 3D image from them.
84
(C) Scientists takes digital photographs of the footprints an create a 3D image from them.
9.
(D) Scientists tooks digital photographs of the footprints an create a 3D image from them.
10
(E) Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints an creates a 3D image from them.
7.
06
28. Read the sentences below.

F
Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints an created a 3D image from them.
CP
Scientists say that the discovery will rewrite our understanding of human occupation of Britain and Europe.
The alternative that correctly identifies the pronouns is:
(A) Subject – object.

(B) indefinite – demonstrative.
(C) object – possessive.
(D) possessive – subject.
(E) demonstrative – indefinite.
29. Chose the correct alternative (s) according to the use of modals.
I. We must go to school yesterday.

II. I don’t think she should buy that purse.
III. She can to travel with us.
(A) I, II and III.
187
GABARITOS 188
(B) I and III, only.

(C) II and III, only.
(D) II, only.
(E) III, only.
_________ March 25th she Will be _________ the plane. She arrives ________ 7 am. Once _________ London
she Will call us.
(A) On – in – on – on.
(B) At – in – at – in.
er
(C) On – on – at – in.
t
in
(D) Since – on – in – at.
eW
(E) From – at – at – in.
GABARITO COMENTADO
in
al
-L
Read the text below and answer questions 24 to 28 according to the text:
7
-1
The oldest human footprints in Europe have been discovered in Britain. There are only three other sets of footprints
1
that are older and they are in Africa.

84
Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints and created a 3D image from them. The images and model were
9.
unveiled in a news conference at the British Museum in London. Scientists think that most of the footprints are children’s.
10
There was at least one adult, too.
Discoveries of ancient man’s footprints are extremely rare. Scientists say that the discovery will rewrite our
7.
understanding of human occupation of Britain and Europe.

06
F
24. In the sentence: “The oldest human footprints have been discovered in Britain,” choose the correct verb tense.
CP
(A) Simple past.

(B) Past Perfect.
(C) simple Present.
(D) Present Perfect Continuous.
(E) Present Perfect.
LETRA E. Comentário.
A estrutura da frase é: Sujeito + have + verbo principal (passado particípio) + complemento. O exemplo, em
questão, está na voz passiva, mas encontra-se no tempo verbal Present Perfect Simple: the oldest human
footprints (sujeito) have (auxiliar) been (verbo to be, marcador de passividade no passado particípio)
discovered (verbo principal no passado particípio) in Britain.
25. Choose the correct alternative that shows a superlative form.
(A) There was at least one adult, too.

(B) The oldest human footprints in Europe have been discovered in Britain.
(C) Scientists think that most of the footprints are children’s.
(D) There are only three other sets of footprints that are older and they are in Africa.
(E) Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints and created a 3D image from them.
188
GABARITOS 189
LETRA B. Comentário.
O superlativo dos adjetivos tem duas formas: adjetivos que apresentam de uma a duas sílabas, acrescenta-se –
EST. A estrutura é: The + adj.-EST. O adjetivo “old” é de uma sílaba, portanto, deve ter a forma superlativa: “The
oldest...”. Outra forma é quando o adjetivo apresenta mais de duas sílabas ou é considerado um adjetivo grande.
Exemplos: intelligent, interesting, stupid etc. A forma correta do superlativo é: the + most + adjetivo. Exemplos:
the most intelligent; the most interesting; the most stupid. A letra B está correta por mostrar a forma
superlativa “The oldest” de forma correta.
26. Choose the correct alternative according to the text.
I. The oldest human footprints were found in Britain.

II. The footprints are children’s.
III. The findings are quite common.
t er
(A) Only I and III are correct.
in
(B) Only II and III are correct.
eW
(C) Only I and II are correct.
(D) I, II and III are correct.
(E) I, II and III are incorrect.
in
al
LETRA E. COMENTÁRIO.
-L
I. The oldest human footprints were found in Britain. É falsa, pois o texto diz que as primeiras pegadas humanas
não foram encontradas na Grã-Bretanha, mas na África. “There are only three other sets of footprints that are
7
older and they are in Africa.” Apenas as marcas dos primeiros humanos europeus encontram-se na Grã-
-1
Bretanha. “The oldest human footprints in Europe have been discovered in Britain.”
1
II. The footprints are children’s. É falsa, pois a maioria das marcas é de crianças, não são todas. Scientists think
84
that most of the footprints are children’s.

III. The findings are quitecommon. É falsa. Estes achados não são comuns, mas muito raros. “Discoveries of
9.
ancient man’s footprints are extremelyrare.”

10
27. Read the sentence below.

7.
06
Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints and created a 3D image from them.
F
The alternative that correctly transforms the sentence above to the simple present is:
CP
(A) Scientists take digital photographs of the footprints and create a 3D image from them.
(B) Scientists tooks digital photographs of the footprints and creates a 3D image from them.
(C) Scientists takes digital photographs of the footprints and create a 3D image from them.
(D) Scientists tooks digital photographs of the footprints and create a 3D image from them.
(E) Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints and creates a 3D image from them.
LETRA A. COMENTÁRIO.
A única alternativa que apresenta a forma correta da frase, em questão, no presente simples é a letra “A”. O
sujeito da frase “Scientists” está na terceira pessoa do plural e é sujeito dos verbos “to take” e “to create”.
Portanto, conjuga-se: they take. They create.
28. Read the sentences below.
Scientists took digital photographs of the footprints and created a 3D image from them.
Scientists say that the discovery will rewrite our understanding of human occupation of Britain and Europe.
The alternative that correctly identifies the pronouns is:
(A) subject - object
189
GABARITOS 190
(B) indefinite – demonstrative

(C) object – possessive
(D) possessive – subject
(E) demonstrative – indefinite
LETRA C. COMENTÁRIO.
A palavra “them” é um pronome object pronoun (pronome objeto), que significa “eles”. “Our” é um adjetivo
possessivo. Trata-se de um possessivo. A alternativa que melhor traduz é a letra “C”.
29. Choose the correct alternative(s) according to the use of modals.
I. We must go to school yesterday.

II. I don’t think she should buy that purse.
III. She can to travel with us.
t er
(A) I, II and III.
in
(B) I and III, only.
eW
(C) II and III, only.
(D) II, only.
(E) III, only.
in
al
LETRA D. COMENTÁRIO.
-L
A questão pede alternative correta quanto ao uso dos verbos modais. Nesta questão, tem de se prestar atenção
para dois quesitos: a forma e o uso. O primeiro diz respeito à estrutura. Em geral, os modal verbs têm a seguinte
7
forma: sujeito + verbo modal + verbo na sua forma básica + complemento/objeto. O verbo no infinitivo é “to +
-1
verb”. O verbo na sua forma básica é sem o “to”. Por exemplo: “to study” (estudar). A forma básica é
1
simplesmente “study”. O segundo quesito é o uso. Verificar se está no contexto de presente, passado etc. No
84
exemplo I, We must go to school yesterday, a forma está correta, mas o uso incorreto, pois “yesterday” (ontem)
não se aplica ao verbo modal “must” nesta frase. Portanto, esta alternativa está incorreta. Na segunda
9.
alternativa II I don’t think she should buy that purse. Esta alternativa correta, pois a forma e o uso estão
10
corretos. Na alternativa III, “She can to travel with us”. A forma está incorreta porque não se deve colocar a
partícula “to” de infinitivo após o verbo modal “can”.
7.
06
30. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below.
F
_____ March 25th she will be ____ the plane. She arrives ____ 7 a.m. Once ____ London she will call us.
CP
(A) On – in – on – on
(B) At – in – at – in
(C) On – on – at – in
(D) Since – on – in – at
(E) From – at – at – in
LETRA C. COMENTÁRIO.
A questão trata do uso correto de preposições. No primeiro caso, temos a preposição “on”, pois trata-se de data
completa. Com o dia do mês, utiliza-se tal preposição. No segundo caso, trata-se de um transporte coletivo,
avião (plane). Portanto, utiliza-se a preposição “on”. No terceiro caso, há horas, preposição correta é “at”. No
último caso, nome de lugar, London, coloca-se a preposição “in”.
2014/2015
24. Complete the passage below with the correct form of the verb in parentheses. Then choose the correct alternative.
190
GABARITOS 191
Name a celebrity and Naomi Stein _____________ probably ____________________________ (1) then. She
_______________________________(2) famous for her photos of John Lennon and The Rolling Stones.
Her new book, The Female Gaze __________________________________________ (3) a hundred
Intimate portraits of different types of women. Last night Dave Weich________________________
(4) Naomi in New York, where she _______________________________________________ (5) to
Him four of her favorite photographs.
(A) has photographed; has become; is going to present; met; describes

(B) photographed; became; presented; met; described
(C) has photographed; became; presented; met; described
(D) is going to photograph; has become; has presented; has met; is describing
er
(E) photographs; became; presents; has met; described
t
in
eW
25. Choose the alternative that best completes the sentence below.
in
Lucy rented _________ yellow car about _________ hour ago and lent it to ________ students.
al
-L
(A) a – a – a
(B) the – the – the
(C) an – an – an
7
-1
(D) a – a - the
1
(E) a – an – the
84
9.
26. Which alternative best completes the following sentence?

10
7.
My sister spent most of her life _________ a small town _________ the south _________ Bahia.
06
(A) at – at – in
(B) on – on – of
F
CP
(C) in – in – of
(D) in – on – of
(E) on – at – in
27. Choose the correct alternative according to the use of modals:
(A) Where are you going this holiday? I don’t know yet, I might go to the beach.
(B) You have to help me with my composition, it is important I do it myself.
(C) You should to have a break.
(D) Where is my bag? I shouldn’t find it.
(E) Would you to pass me the salt, please?
191
GABARITOS 192
My car wasn’t big enough, so, I needed a _________ one. My new car is _________ and _________ than the one I had. It is
_________ car in the world.
a) bigger – nicer – better – the most beautiful

b) more big – more nice – good – the beautiful.
c) the biggest – the more nice – the better – the more beautiful.
d) the bigger – the nice – better – the beautiful.
e) the most big – nicer – the best – the more beautiful.
29. Identify the correct (C) questions and the incorrect ones (I). Then choose the best alternative.
1. ( ) How old Ana is?
er
2. ( ) Where are going these kids?
t
3. ( ) Are you waiting for us?
in
eW
a) C–C–C
b) C–I–C
c) I–C–C in
al
d) I–I–C
-L
e) I–C–I
7
-1
1
84
I left Rio ________ 2013 and went ________ Salvador an I will get married _________ July. The wedding is __________
August 25th .
9.
10
a) On – from – on – on
7.
b) At – for – at - in
06
c) In – to – in – on
d) Since – on – in – at
F
e) From – for – at – in
CP
GABARITO COMENTADO
24. LETRA C.
Name a celebrity and Naomi ___ probably _____ (1) them. She ______ (2) famous for her photos of John Lennon and The
Rolling Stones.
Her new book, The Female Gaze, ___________(3), a hundred intimate portraits of different types of women. Last night, Dave
Weigh ______________ (4) Naomi for an interview in New York, where she ___________________ (5) to him four of her
favorite photographs.
(C) has photographed; became; presents; met; described
Na primeira frase: Naomi has probably photographed them. Trata-se de um tempoverbal em que não há referência temporal.
Utilizamos, portanto, o present perfect. Na segunda frase, she became famous for her photos of John Lennon and The Rolling
192
GABARITOS 193
Stones. Trata-se de um tempo verbal definido – the past simple – pelo simples fato das fotos de John Lennon e Rolling. Na
terceira frase Her new book presents a hundred a hundred intimate portraits of different types of women. O assunto é o seu
novo livro “The Female Gaze”, o qual apresenta (presente simples para um fato corrente.) Na quarta frase, Dave Weigh met
Naomi for an interview in New York mostra um fato no passado, o qual é paralelo ao fato ocorrido na frase 5, she described to
him four of her favorite photographs. Ela descreveu para ele quatro de suas fotos preferidas.
25. LETRA E.
(E) a - an – the
Lucy rented ____ yellow car about _________ hour ago and lent it to _______ students.
O termo "yellow car" é apresentado pela primeira vez na frase. Portanto, deve-se utilizar o artigo indefinido singular "a". O
termo "yellow car" é singular e "yellow" tem a inicial "y" com som de consoante. Por esta razão, utiliza-se o indefinido "a". O
er
segundo termo apresentado na frase, "hour", também aparece pela primeira vez no discurso e o "h" é mudo. Como não se
t
in
pronuncia o "h" em "hour" (hora), para o som de vogal, teremos de utilizar o artigo indefinido "an". O termo "students" está no
plural. Refere-se a "students" (alunos/estudantes) em um contexto específico. Portanto, utiliza-se o artigo definido "the"
eW
(o/a/os/as).
in
al
26. LETRA C
-L
(C) in - in – of
7
My sister spent most of her life _______ a small town _______ the south ______ Bahia.
1 -1
Esta questão avalia o uso de preposições. "A small town" (uma cidade pequena). Há mais de uma possibilidade de uso de
84
preposição. Podem ser: in a small town ou at a small town. o termo "the south" (ponto cardial - o sul) é regido pelo verbo
"spent" (gastou). Portanto, utiliza-se "in the south" (no sul). In the south of Bahia (No sul da Bahia). A última preposição
9.
utilizada é a "of" (de).

10
7.
06
27. LETRA A
F
(A) Where are you going in this holiday? I don’t know yet. I might go to the beach.
CP
O uso do “might” está gramaticalmente correto e também se aplica ao contexto indicado. Trata-se de uma resposta incerta,
sem dados concretos relacionados ao lugar. Onde você vai passar o feriado? Eu ainda não sei. Eu poderia ir à praia. O “might”
é utilizado em probabilidade e possibilidade remota.
(B) You have to help me with my composition. I have to do it myself.
O uso do “have to” indica obrigatoriedade. Como se trata de um pedido, deveria ser escolhido um outro modal, como “should”
ou “could”. Também a resposta à solicitação não faz sentido. I have to do it myself. (Eu tenho de fazer eu mesmo(a). Como
uma resposta dessa para uma solicitação “You have to help me with my composition.” (Você tem de me ajudar com a minha
redação).
(C) You should to have a break.
O item está incorreto por conter erro na estrutura. Não se coloca a partícula “to” após o verbo modal “should”. O correto é “you
should have a break.”
(D) Where is my bag? I shouldn’t find it.
A alternativa está incorreta, porque o uso do should (deveria) é inadequado neste contexto. A pergunta “onde está minha
bolsa” requer uso do modal “can” em sua forma negativa “can’t” t (não consigo). “I can’t find it. (Não consigo encontrá-la.) Este
é o uso correto.
193
GABARITOS 194
(E) Would you to pass the salt, please?
A partícula “to” não deve ser aplicada ao modal “would”. O correto é: “would you pass the salt, please?” (Me passaria o sal, por
favor?)
28. LETRA A
My car wasn’t big enough, so I needed a ______ one. My new car is _______ and ________ than the one I had. It is ______
car in the world.
(A) bigger – nicer – better – the most beautiful
er
Trata-se de comparativo e superlativo de adjetivos. No primeiro espaço, há a necessidade de se colocar um adjetivo na forma
t
comparativa, pois está implícita a partícula “than”. O pronome “one” revela que o carro, “car”, que eu precisava (needed) é o
in
mesmo daquele da frase anterior. Na frase “My new car is _____ and ____ than the one I had.” (Meu novo carro é mais legal e
eW
melhor do que aquele que eu tinha). Os adjetivos “Nice” e “good” apresentam as formas comparativas “nicer” – regular, e
“better”, irregular. A última frase “It is _____ car in the world” não se trata de comparação e, sim, afirmação com o uso do
in
superlativo. (Ele é o carro mais bonito do mundo.) Para o adjetivo “beautiful”, a forma superlativa de superioridade é “the most
al
beautiful”.
-L
(B) more big – more Nice – good – the beautiful

7
As formas “more big” e “more nice” não existem pelo fato de os adjetivos “big” e “nice” serem pequenos (terem até duas
-1
sílabas). Obrigatoriamente, quando tais forem pequenos, estes devem receber a partícula –er, indicadora do comparativo de
1
superioridade. O adjetivo “good” não se encontra na forma comparativa, a qual é “better”. “the beautiful”, por fim, não é forma
84
superlativa.
9.
(C) the biggest – the more nice – the better – the more beautiful
10
A forma “the biggest” é correta para o superlativo e não para o comparativo, como é o caso da questão. “The more Nice” não
7.
existe. A forma “The better”, neste contexto, não é apropriada. A forma correta é simplesmente “better”. O artigo definido
06
deveria ser usado no caso de superlativos. “The more beautiful” não se aplica neste contexto, apenas a forma superlativa.
F
As letras (D) e (E) se aplicam às justificativas anteriormente apresentadas.

CP
29. LETRA D
(I) How old Ana is?

(I) Where are going these kids?
(C) Are you waiting for us?
How old Ana is? Está incorreta. A forma correta é: How old is Ana? Where are going these kids? Também está errada. A forma
correta é: Where are these kids going?
30. LETRA C
(C) In – to – in – on
I left Rio ____ 2013 and went ___ Salvador and I will get married ___ July. The wedding is ____ August 25 th.
I left Rio in 2013. (Eu saí do Rio em 2013.) Se utiliza a preposição in no caso de tempo em ano, mês e algumas partes do dia:
“in the morning (manhã), in the evening (noitinha) e in the afternoon (tarde). “and went to Salvador.” (E foi a Salvador). Se
utiliza a preposição to, que regida pelo verbo “go" , no passado “went” (ir). Go to Salvador. (Ir a Salvador). “I will get married
194
GABARITOS 195
in July.” (Vou me casar em julho). Se utiliza a preposição “in” para meses do ano. The wedding is on August 25th. (O
casamento é no dia 25 de agosto). Como se trata de uma data com dia do mês, então, utiliza-se on.
2013/2014
I remember ______ names, but they don`t remember ______ . ______ name is Ana and ______ name is David. I told
_______ that _______ name is Carlos.
(A) their – mine – Her – his – them – my.
er
(B) they – my – She’s – he’s – they – mine.
t
in
(C) they – mine – She – he – their – my.
eW
(D) their – I’m – Her – his – them – I’m.
(E) them – my – She’s – he’s – they.
in
al
Answer questions 25, 26, 27 and 28 accoding to the texts below.
-L
Bertrand Piccard and his co-pilot Brian Jones were the first people to fly around the Earth in a balloon non-stop in 1999.
7
-1
I learnt to fly in a balloon in a race across the Atlantic Ocean in 1992 and became fascinated by the sport. In the same way that
1
a mountain climber dreams of climbing the world’s highest mountain, I dreamed about flying non-stop around the world.
84
I spent six years planning the flight and failed twice before we managed to secceed. Our route took us over China, but we could
9.
only get permission to travel over the south. This meant going first to North Africa to catch the right winds. That added 10,000
kilometers, and another week, to our journey. But because of this, our flight broke all the records for distance and time spent in
10
the air.
7.
My main memory of the trip is that we lived in the air for 20 days and the rising sun was the most amazing thing we saw. We
06
had to go out of the balloon’s capsule, in which we were transported, three times while in the air to repair the fuel system. We
didn’t have any safety equipment but when you are in a situation like that, you just do what you have to do without thinking
F
about feeling afraid.

CP
Landing was a fantastic moment. I remember when I got out of the capsule, looked at my footprint in the sand. I remembered
the astronaut Neil Armstrong who was so happy to put his footprint on the moon, so far away from Earth. At that moment, I
was so happy to have my foot back on Earth!
(Fonte: Original)
25. What’s Piccard’s main reason for writing this text?
(A) To warn readers about the dangers of a balloon trip.

(B) To compare the sport of ballooning with mountain climbing.
(C) To recommend ballooning as a means of transport.
(D) To describe the lessons that failure has taught him.
(E) To report on succeeding at something he’d dreamt of for years.
26. Why did the balloon fly over south China?
(A) The wind took it in the wrong direction.

(B) The pilots were’t allowed to cross any other part.
195
GABARITOS 196
(C) The pilots were running out of time.

(D) The route made the journey shorter.
(E) The route made the journey riskier.
27. Why did the pilots get out of the capsule during the flight?
(A) To practice what to do in an emergency.

(B) To watch the sunrise.
(C) To mend something which had a fault.
(D) To check if the safety equipment was working.
(E) To test their courage in a dangerous situation.
28. What was the newspaper headline after the balloon landed?
t er
in
(A) Balloon pilot flies alone around the world.
eW
(B) Non-stop from North Africa to China.
(C) Magnificent record flight for Piccard and Jones.
(D) New record – 10,000 km in a week. in
al
(E) Balloon pilot suffers a serious fall upon returning.
-L
7
29. Choose the alternative according to the right use of adverbs.

-1
(A) The meat is cooked very bad.

1
84
(B) It is terrible hot today.

9.
(C) He is driving unusual fast.

10
(D) She writes very good.

(E) I speak German Well.
7.
06
F
CP
She left Serrinha _______ 1968 and went ______ Salvador. She will get married _______
July. The wedding is _______ July 25th.
(A) on – from – on – on.

(B) at – for – at – in.
(C) in – to – in – on.
(D) since – on – in – at.
(E) from – for – at – in.
GABARITO COMENTADO
196
GABARITOS 197
I remember ______ names, but they don’t remember ______ . ______ name is Ana and ______ name is David. I told _______
that _______ name is Carlos.
(A) their – mine – Her – his – them – my.

(B) they – my – She’s – he’s – they – mine.
(C) they – mine – She – he – their – my.
(D) their – I’m – Her – his – them – I’m.
(E) them – my – She’s – he’s – they.
O primeiro espaço é seguido pela palavra “names” (substantivo plural), logo só pode ser corretamente
preenchido com o correspondente adjetivo possessivo “their” (deles, delas). A segunda lacuna só pode ser
corretamente preenchida com o pronome possessivo “mine”, uma vez que está seguida de ponto final. Assim
sendo, e sem ser necessário olhar as outras lacunas, concluímos que apenas a alínea A responde cabalmente à
pergunta 24.
t er
Answer questions 25, 26, 27 and 28 according to the text below.
in
eW
Bertrand Piccard and his co-pilot Brian Jones were the first people to fly around the Earth in a balloon non-stop in 1999.
I learnt to fly in a balloon in a race across the Atlantic Ocean in 1992 and became fascinated by the sport. In the same way that
in
a mountain climber dreams of climbing the world’s highest mountain, I dreamed about flying non-stop around the world.
I spent six years planning the flight and failed twice before we managed to succeed. Our route took us over China, but we
al
could only get permission to travel over the south. This meant going first to North Africa to catch the right winds. That added
-L
10,000 kilometers, and another week, to our journey. But because of this, our flight broke all the records for distance and t ime
spent in the air.
7
My main memory of the trip is that we lived in the air for 20 days and the rising sun was the most amazing thing we saw. We
-1
had to go out of the balloon’s capsule, in which we were transported, three times while in the air to repair the fuel system. We
1
didn’t have any safety equipment but when you are in a situation like that, you just do what you have to do without thinking
84
about feeling afraid.

Landing was a fantastic moment. I remember when I got out of the capsule, looked at my footprint in the sand. I remembered
9.
the astronaut Neil Armstrong who was so happy to put his footprint on the moon, so far away from Earth. At that moment, I
10
was so happy to have my foot back on Earth!

(Source: Original)
7.
06
F
25. What’s Piccard’s main reason for writing this text?

CP
(A) To warn readers about the dangers of a balloon trip.

(B) To compare the sport of ballooning with mountain climbing.
(C) To recommend ballooning as a means of transport.
(D) To describe the lessons that failure has taught him.
(E) To report on succeeding at something he’d dreamt of for years.
Alínea E constitui a resposta correta, jáque, de fato, a intenção de Piccard ao escrever este texto é informar o
público em relação ao seu feito – viagem em balão ao redor do mundo. Não pretende avisar os leitores sobre os
perigos de andar de balão (a); não pretende comparar balonismo com escalada (b); não pretende recomendar o
balão com o meio de transporte (c); não pretende descrever as lições aprendidas com os seus erros e falhas.
26. Why did the balloon fly over south China?
(A) The wind took it in the wrong direction.

(B) The pilots weren’t allowed to cross any other part.
(C) The pilots were running out of time.
197
GABARITOS 198
(D) The route made the journey shorter.

(E) The route made the journey riskier.
O balão de Piccard voou pelo sul da China porque não recebeu autorização para sobre voar qualquer outra
região do país. Logo, não foi o vento que o levou pelo caminhoerrado (a), os pilotos não estavam ficando sem
tempo (c), esta rota não encortou o tempo de viagem (d) nem a tornou mais arriscada (e). Resposta correta
encontra-se naalínea B.
27. Why did the pilots get out of the capsule during the flight?
(A) To practice what to do in an emergency.

(B) To watch the sunrise.
(C) To mend something that had a fault.
(D) To check if the safety equipment was working.
er
(E) To test their courage in a dangerous situation.
t
in
Os pilotos tiveram que sair da cápsula de segurança durante o vôo para reparar o sistema de combustível. Não
eW
foi para praticar o que fazer em uma emergência (a); não foi para assistir o nascer do sol (b); não foi para
verificar se o equipamento de segurança estava funcionando (d); não foi para testar a sua coragem em situações
in
de perigo (e). Como constatámos, foi para consertar algo que estava com um defeito – resposta certa traduzida
pelaalínea C.
al
-L
28. What was the newspaper headline after the balloon landed?
7
(A) Balloon pilot flies alone around the world.

-1
(B) Non-stop from North Africa to China.

1
(C) Magnificent record flight for Piccard and Jones.

84
(D) New record – 10,000 km in a week.

(E) Balloon pilot suffers a serious fall upon returning.
9.
10
Qual foi a manchete do jornal depois que o balão aterrizou? Magnífico recorde de vôo para Piccard e Jonesalínea
C. Não poderia ser: piloto de balão voa sozinho ao redor do mundo (a); sem parar da África do Norte até à China
7.
(b); novo recorde – 10.000 km em uma semana (d); piloto de balão sofre uma queda grave em seu regresso (e).
06
29. Choose the alternative according to the right use of adverbs.

F
CP
(A) The meat is cooked very bad.

(B) It is terrible hot today.
(C) He is driving unusual fast.
(D) She writes very good.
(E) I speak German well.
Regras de utilização dos advérbios de acordo com a norma culta da Língua Inglesa: (1) Advérbio + verbo
principal: “they always arrive late”. (2) To be + advérbio: “they are always late”. (3) Verbo auxiliar + advérbio +
verbo principal: “they will always be late”.
“The meat is very badly cooked” estaria correto (a). “It is terribly hot today” estaria correto (b). “He is driving
unusually fast” estaria correto (c). “She writes very well” (“ela escreve muito bem” e não “ela escreve muito
bom”) estaria correto (d). “I speak German well” está corretíssimo –alínea E.
She left Serrinha _______ 1968 and went ______ Salvador. She will get married _______
July. The wedding is _______ July 25th.
198
GABARITOS 199
(A) on – from – on – on.

(B) at – for – at – in.
(C) in – to – in – on.
(D) since – on – in – at.
(E) from – for – at – in.
Preposição IN, no contexto de tempo, é utilizada para semanas, meses e anos: “in the following week”; “in
March”; “in 2001”.
Preposição IN, no contexto de espaço, é utilizada para países, estados, regiões, cidades e bairros: “in Brazil”; “in
Pernambuco”; “in the North”; “in Brasília”; “in Ipanema”.
Preposição ON, no contexto de tempo, é utilizada para dias (da semana ou do mês): “on Saturday”; “on April
1st”.
Preposição ON, no contexto de espaço, é utilizada para ruas, estradas e avenidas: “on the street”; “on the road”;
“on 5th Avenue”. Também cabe destacar aqui dois casos particulares da Língua Inglesa: “on the farm” e “on the
er
beach = at the beach”.
t
in
Preposição TO indica destino, finalidade, meta, objetivo.
eW
Preposição FROM indica origem, ponto de partida.
Posto isto... in
al
-L
A primeira lacuna é seguida por um ano (IN). A segunda é antecedida pelo verbo TO GO e seguida por uma
cidade (TO). A terceira é seguida por um mês (IN). A quarta e última é seguida por um dia (ON). Logo, aalínea
Cé a única que responde corretamente à questão.
7
1 -1
2012/2013
84
9.
10
01.Complete the passage below with the correct form of the verb in parentheses. Then choose the correct alternative.
7.
Ranulf Fiennes is Britain’s best known explorer, and, at 65, the perfect example of the idea that people ___________ old like
06
they used to. He ___________ an explorer since the 1960s. He ___________ 40 years ___________ the world, from polar ice
caps to deserts.
F
He ___________ many records. In 1993, for example, he and a friend tried to cross Antarctica without help. They pulled food
CP
supplies across the ice, ___________ 1,300 miles before they had to call for help.
(A) are growing – was – spent – explored – set - covering.

(B) aren’t growing – was - has spent – exploring – set - has covered.
(C) grow - has been - has spent – explored - has set - covering
(D) aren’t growing - has been - has spent – exploring - has set - covered
(E) grow – is – spent – exploring – set - covered.
02.Choose the answer with the verbs that appropriately complete the text below.
Most bank employees these days have to wear a uniform. Women employees ______wear a uniform top and matching skirt or
trousers in the company colour, and they ______.wear any jewellery. However, they ______ wear uniform shoes. Unlike some
other
financial companies they don’t have a dress-down Friday, so they ______.wear their own clothes at all.
(A) can – can – mustn’t – don’t have to

(B) must - can’t – don’t have to – mustn’t
(C) don’t have to – have to – can’t - must
(D) can – can’t – must – have to
(E) can’t – mustn’t – have to – must
199
GABARITOS 200
03.How did you like the story?
(A) It’s creepy.

(B) It’s interested.
(C) It’s amazed.
(D) It’s watery.
(E) It’s heart-broken.
04. How many glasses of water do you drink a day?
(A) Too little (incontável)

Not much (incontável)
er
(B)
(C) Not many
t
in
(D) A little (incontável)
eW
(E) Too much (incontável)
05. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the dialogue below: in
al
-L
You don’t look very _______. Are you ill? No, just a bit tired. Did you like the party last night? Yes, it was quite ______ .
(A) good - well

7
-1
(B) better - worse ( adjetivos comparativos)

(C) worse - well
1
(D) gooder - better

84
(E) well - good

9.
10
06.Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below:

7.
06
What time _______________? Sorry. I don’t know ___________

F
(A) do the bus leaves - when is it.

CP
(B) does the bus leaves - when it is.

(C) did the bus left - when it was.
(D) did the bus leave - when did it.
(E) does the bus leave - when it is.
07. Choose the alternative that correctly completes all examples below:
___ a bus; ___ the first floor; ___ a ship.
(A) on
(B) in
(C) at
(D) to
(E) for
GABARITO COMENTADO
01. Complete the passage below with the correct form of the verb. Then choose the correct alternative.
200
GABARITOS 201
Ranulf Fiennes is Britain’s best-known explorer and, at 65, the perfect example of the idea that people _______ old like they
used to. He _______ an explorer since the 1960s. He _______ 40 years _______ the world, from polar ice caps to deserts. He
_______ many records. In 1993, for example, he and a friend tried to cross Antarctica without help. They pulled food supplies
across the ice, _______ 1,300 miles before they had to call for help.
Ranulf Fiennes é o mais conhecido explorador da Grã-Bretanha e, aos 65, o exemplo perfeito da ideia que as pessoas não estão
envelhecendo como costumavam. Ele é (tem sido) um explorador desde a década de 1960. Ele passou (tem passado) 40 anos
explorando o mundo, desde calotas polares até desertos. Ele estabeleceu (tem estabelecido) muitos recordes. Em 1993, por
exemplo, ele e um amigo tentaram atravessar a Antártica sem ajuda. Eles arrastaram os seus suprimentos /comida através do
gelo, cobrindo 1.300 milhas antes de terem que pedir ajuda/assistência.
(A) are growing – was – spent – explored – set – covering

(B) aren’t growing – was – has spent – exploring – set – has covered
er
(C) grow – has been – has spent – explored – has set – covering
t
in
(D) aren’t growing – has been – has spent – exploring – has set – covered
eW
(E) grow – is – spent – exploring – set – covered
in
Por quê D e não B? Logo na segunda lacuna do texto encontramos uma frase que está no Presente Perfeito (Present Perfect)
al
que, conforme sabemos, deve ser utilizado para tempos indefinidos, ao contrário do Passado Simples (Simple Past) que deve
-L
ser utilizado para tempos definidos. Exemplo: he was an explorer in 1995 (tempo definido: 1995) VS he has been an explorer
(tempo indefinido: sem tempo) OR he has been an explorer since the 1960s (tempo indefinido: desde a década de 1960) OR he
7
has been an explorer for more than 50 years (tempo indefinido: por mais de 50 anos) OR he has been an explorer
-1
lately/recently (tempo indefinido: ultimamente/recentemente).

1
84
9.
02. Choose the answer with the verbs that appropriately complete the text below.
10
Most bank employees these days have to wear a uniform. Women employees _______ wear a
7.
uniform top and matching skirt or trousers in the company color/colour, and they _______ wear
06
any jewelry/jewellery. However, they _______ wear uniform shoes. Unlike some other financial
F
CP
companies they don’t have a dress-down Friday, so they _______ wear their own clothes at all.
A maioria dos funcionários bancários, atualmente, tem que usar uniforme. As funcionárias (mulheres) têm que usar um top
(camisa, camiseta ou blusa) com saia ou calças condizentes, nas cores da companhia, e elas não podem usar quaisquer jóias.
Contudo, elas não têm que usar sapatos de uniforme. Ao contrário de outras companhias financeiras, elas não têm uma sexta-
feira informal, por isso não podem (têm que) usar as suas próprias roupas de jeito nenhum.
(A) can – can – mustn’t – don’t have to
(B) must – can’t – don’t have to – mustn’t
(C) don’t have to – have to – can’t – must
(D) can – can’t – must – have to
(E) can’t – mustn’t – have to – must
Por quê B e não A ou D? Antes de mais, é essencial saber que: (a) have to = must (ter que: obrigação); (b) can = to be able to
(poder = ser capaz de: capacidade, habilidade). Na primeira lacuna, a noção implícita no texto é a de obrigação (as
funcionárias têm que usar uniforme), logo must é a única opção possível. Ainda assim, se a dúvida permanecesse, a segunda
lacuna tem um sentido negativo, pelo que a opção A estaria automaticamente elimanada. Ficamos, então, com as opções B ou
D. A terceira lacuna está inserida numa frase que começa com a palavra however (contudo, no entanto, porém), que sempre
inicia orações adversativas (contrárias ao que foi anteriormente exposto). Logo, a opção B seria a única capaz de responder
cabalmente a esta questão.
201
GABARITOS 202
03. How did they like the story?
O que você achou da história/estória?
(A) It’s creepy.

(B) It’s interested.
(C) It’s amazed.
(D) It’s watery.
(E) It’s heart-broken.
er
Para responder a esta questão é necessário saber a diferença entre DID YOU LIKE? e HOW DID YOU LIKE? A primeira traduz-
se como: você gostou? A segunda traduz-se como: o que você achou? Portanto, para a primeira sempre teremos respostas do
t
in
tipo: yes, I did OR no, I didn’t. Para a segunda sempre seremos solicitados a emitir a nossa opinião. Assim sendo, devemos
eW
dizer o que pensamos sobre a história/estória. Analisemos, então, cada uma das alíneas. (a) É assustadora/repugnante. (b) É
interessado/interessada. It’s interesting seria uma reposta correta. (c) É espantado/maravilhado. It’s amazing seria uma
resposta correta. (d) É aguado/aquoso (adjetivo que não classifica histórias/estórias). (e) É inconsolável (adjetivo que não
in
classifica histórias/estórias). It’s heartbreaking seria uma resposta correta.
al
-L
04. How many glasses of water do you drink a day?

7
-1
Quantos copos de água você bebe por dia?

1
84
(A) Too little

9.
(B) Not much

10
(C) Not many

(D) A little
7.
(E) Too much

06
F
CP
Nesta questão teremos que saber distinguir entre nomes contáveis e incontáveis. Ao mesmo tempo, é fundamental saber quais
são os quantitativos da língua Inglesa (contáveis: many, few; incontáveis: much, little). O substantivo “água” é incontável em
Inglês, pelo que dizemos much water (muita água) e little water (pouca água) ou a little water (um pouco de água). Já a
expressão glasses of water (copos de água) é contável, pelo que dizemos many glasses of water (muitos copos de água) e few
glasses of water (poucos copos de água). Olhemos para cada uma das alíneas. (a) Pouca demais ou pouquíssima. Too few
(poucos demais ou pouquíssimos) seria uma resposta correta. (b) Não muita. (c) Não muitos. (d) Um pouco. A few (uns
poucos, poucos) seria uma resposta correta. (e) Demasiada ou demasiado. Too many (demasiados) seria uma resposta correta.
05. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the dialogue below:
You don’t look very _______. Are you ill?

No, just a bit tired.
Did you like the party last night?
Yes, it was quite _______.
Você não parece muito bem. Está doente?
202
GABARITOS 203
Não, só um pouco cansado.
Você gostou da festa ontem à noite?
Sim, foi bastante boa.
(A) good – well

(B) better – worse
(C) worse – well
(D) gooder – better
(E) well – good
er
Nesta questão abordamos os adjetivos da língua Inglesa. Primeiramente é necessário saber que, em Inglês, os adjetivos são
invariáveis: she is beautiful (ela é bonita), he is beautiful (ele é bonito), they are beautiful (elas são bonitas, eles são bonitos).
t
in
Logo, o adjetivo beautiful signifca bonita, bonito, bonitas ou bonitos. Ao mesmo tempo, também se torna necessário conhecer
eW
os graus comparativo e superlativo dos ditos adjetivos. Para esta questão em particular, apenas o grau comparativo seria
suficiente. Analisemos cada uma das alíneas. (a) Bom, boa, bons, boas – bem. (b) Melhor (do que) – pior (do que). (c) Pior (do
que) – bem. (d) Gooder não existe em Inglês – melhor (do que). (e) Bem – boa, bom, boas, bons.
in
al
-L
06. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentence below:
7
-1
What time _______?

Sorry. I don’t know _______.
1
84
A que horas sai/parte o ônibus?

9.
Desculpe. Eu não sei quando é.

10
7.
(A) do the bus leaves – when is it.

(B) does the bus leaves – when it is.
06
(C) did the bus left – when it was.

F
(D) did the bus leave – when did it.

CP
(E) does the bus leave – when it is.
Nesta questão é essencial conhecer um dos pilares básicos da língua Inglesa: saber como fazer orações afirmativas, negativas,
interrogativas afirmativas e interrogativas negativas. REGRA: todos os verbos regulares e irregulares precisam de verbo auxiliar
(to do) para formar negativas e interrogativas, exceto o verbo ser/estar (to be). Peguemos, a título de exemplo, na frase “você
é brasileiro”. Afirmativa: you are Brazilian. Negativa: you are not Brazilan. Interrogativa afirmtiva: are you Brazilian?
Interrogativa negativa: are you not Brazilian? Olhemos, agora, para a frase “eles moram no Brasil”. Afirmativa: they live in
Brazil. Negativa: they don’t live in Brazil. Interrogativa afirmativa: do they live in Brazil? Interrogativa negativa: don’t they live in
Brazil? Outro exemplo: “ela trabalha nos EUA”. Afirmativa: she works in the USA. Negativa: she doesn’t work in the USA?
Interrogativa afirmativa: does she work in the USA? Interrogativa negativa: doesn’t she work in the USA? Passemos a analisar a
questão 29. O ônibus sai/parte às 10 da manhã: the bus (it) leaves at 10:00 a.m. (afirmativa); the bus doesn’t leave at 10:00
a.m. (negativa); what time does the bus leave?
(interrogativa afirmativa). Eu não sei quando é (a que horas parte/sai o ônibus): I don’t know when it is. Já se perguntassemos
“quando é?”: when is it? Logo, a única alínea correta é a E.
07. Choose the alternative that correctly completes all examples below:
203
GABARITOS 204
_______ a bus; _______ the first floor; _______ a ship.
Em um ônibus; no primeiro andar; em uma embarcação (navio ou nave espacial)
(A) on
(B) in
(C) at
(D) to
(E) for
As preposições são, normalmente, a matéria na qual os alunos apresentam mais dificuldades, uma vez que as regras aplicadas
er
para a sua utilização na língua Inglesa sempre têm exceções. De forma geral, podemos definir cada uma das cinco preposições
assim:
t
in
eW
AT – faz referência a espaço ou tempo determinados/específicos.
IN – dentro do espaço ou do tempo.
ON – em cima/sobre o espaço ou o tempo. in

al
-L
TO – indica destino, finalidade, meta ou objetivo (para).
FOR – indica causa, motivo ou razão (por, pelo, pela, pelos, pelas)
7
-1
Na questão 07, temos que saber que todos os meios de transporte para os quais temos que subir (ônibus, trem, bicicleta,
1
bonde, avião e cavalo, entre outros) utilizam a preposição ON. Já se estivermos no carro, dizemos IN the car. Para traduzirmos
84
a expressão “no primeiro piso/andar” sempre teremos que utilizar a preposição ON. Logo, a alínea A é a única que responde
9.
corretamente a esta questão.

10
7.
2011/2012
06
F
31. Choose the option that correctly completes the sentence:

CP
As they _________ down the street they _________ Amelia.
(A) walked – saw

(B) were walking – saw
(C) walked – were seeing
(D) was walking – was seeing
(E) were walking – were seeing
32. Choose the alternative that correctly shows the comparative form of the adjectives below:
Good – bad – ill – far – old
(A) best – worse – worst – further – elder

(B) best – worst – worse – farthest – eldest
(C) better – worse – worse – further – elder
(D) better – the worst – worse – the farther – older
(E) The best – the worst – the worse – farther – older.
33. Choose the correct alternative:
204
GABARITOS 205
(A) I like not the test.

(B) Do not be impolite.
(C) It is important to do not do it.
(D) You do not must worry about that.
(E) Remind her to not to go there again.
34. Choose the option that correctly completes the sentences:
Open the books ___ page 20. There is a mistake ___ line 10. Next week, ___ September 15th, ___ the morning, there will be a
test.
(A) on – on – at – on
er
(B) at – in – on – in
t
(C) to – at – on – in
in
(D) in – to – at – on
eW
(E) to – in – on – in
in
al
35. Choose the answer with the verbs that appropriately complete the sentences below.
-L
The children ______________ play outside today because of the rain.

As a result, they _________________ stay home and watch TV. If it doesn’t rain tomorrow, they _________________ be able
7
to ride their bikes in the street.

1 -1
(A) must – can’t – will

84
(B) will – must – should

(C) won’t – can’t – must
9.
(D) can’t – should – will

10
(E) won’t – can’t – should

7.
06
Answer questions 36 and 37 according to the text below.

F
Henry James is one of America’s greatest novelists, and the author of The Turn of the Screw, a well-known short ghost story,
CP
published in 1898. It is a story that many people have made into films and operas. One of the best operas is one written by
Benjamin Britten in the mid twentieth century. The book is about a governess who looks after two children in a house which
has no near neighbours. The story is both haunting and frightening. The children, Flora and Miles, are charming to their
teacher, but when she starts to see the figures of a man and woman in the gardens, she begins to believe that supernatural
forces possess them, and will lead to their destruction. The reader and the listener sometimes wonder if the governess is mad,
because both author and composer cleverly leave a lot of room for the reader’s / listeners’ own terrible thoughts and ideas.
Ghost stories and music have a similar effect on us. The best ghost stories try to get into our minds, and music has the power
to go past our conscious thought and appeal directly to our feelings and emotions. So the terrifying production that opened last
night at Covent Garden Opera House is successful for two reasons: first because it has a great author and composer, and
second because your imagination takes over from your sensible mind.
36. Decide if the following statements are True or False according to the text and choose the correct alternative.
I. The story takes place in a haunted castle.

II. Henry James and Benjamin Britten worked together in The Turn of the Screw.
III. The story first appeared in a book.
205
GABARITOS 206
(A) F–F–T
(B) T–T–F
(C) T–F–T
(D) F–T–F
(E) T–T–T
37. How are ghost stories and music similar?
(A) Both of them are scary.

(B) Both of them make us cry.
(C) Both of them are part of an opera.
(D) Both of them are written by the same person.
er
(E) Both of them appeal to our feelings and emotions
t
in
eW
38. Which alternative best completes the sentence below? (* means noarticle)
_______ good book is ________ best medicine for ________ loneliness. in

al
-L
(A) - the – a
(B) The - a - *
7
(C) A - the - *
-1
(D) The – * – a
(E) - the – the
1
84
9.
39. Write “T” if the sentence is grammatically correct, and “F” if it is grammatically incorrect. Then choose the alternative with
10
the correct sequence.

7.
1. ( ) Many people are dying in Haiti.

06
2. ( ) Much of the children are sick and hungry.

3. ( ) There are only a few food to eat.
F
CP
4. ( ) Not much fresh water is left.

5. ( ) They need lot money to rebuild the country.
(A) T–F–F–T–F
(B) T–T–F–F–T
(C) T–T–F–T–F
(D) F–F–F–F–T
(E) F–T–T–F–T
40. Complete the text with the missing words, then choose the correct alternative.
________ best friend´s name is Kathy. ________ is ____________ theUnited States. _________ husband Jack lives with
_________ in abeautiful house _________ Berkeley, California. Kathy comes_________Brazil every two years.
a) My – She – in – Your – him – in – to
b) My – She – from – Her – her – in – to
c) My – She – in – your – her – at – from
d) Your – She – in – His – her – in – from
e) Your – He – from – Your – her – at – from
206
GABARITOS 207
GABARITO COMENTADO
31. ALTERNATIVA (B)
O uso de PAST CONTINUOUS (uma ação longa e continuada que estava ocorrendo no passado e foi interrompida por uma
ação curta, também ocorrida no passado) .
A frase no PAST CONTINUOUS é construída da seguinte forma:
She were going to Rio when she went to São Paulo.
er
1ª parte 2ªparte
t
in
1ª parte - noun or pronoun +to be + (main verb +ing)
eW
2ªparte - noun or pronoun +main verb + ED or irregulars’ list }
in
Apesar de não apresentar WHEN na sentença, ao lê-la é possível perceber que estava ocorrendo uma ação contínua completa
al
no passado enquanto outra ação, mais curta, também completa no passado, ocorreu.
-L
7
32. ALTERNATIVA (C)

1 -1
84
a) Observe que todas as palavras em questão apresentam seus comparativos e superlativos na forma irregular. BEST e
WORST não são formas comparativas e sim formas superlativas irregulares de GOOD e BAD/ILL.
9.
b) Observe que todas as palavras em questão apresentam seus comparativos e superlativos na forma irregular. BEST,
10
WORST, FARTHEST e ELDEST não são formas comparativas e sim formas superlativas irregulares de GOOD , BAD/ILL,
FAR e OLD. Observe também que no caso de FAR, podemos utilizar tanto farther quanto further para formas corretas.
7.
c) CORRETA. Observe que todas as palavras em questão apresentam seus comparativos e superlativos na
06
forma irregular. Observe também que no caso de FAR, podemos utilizar tanto farther quanto further
para formas corretas.
F
d) Observe que todas as palavras em questão apresentam seus comparativos e superlativos na forma irregular. THE
CP
WORST não é forma comparativa e sim forma superlativa irregulare de BAD/ILL. Observe também que no caso de
FAR, podemos utilizar tanto farther quanto further para formas corretas.
e) Observe que todas as palavras em questão apresentam seus comparativos e superlativos na forma irregular. THE
BEST, THE WORST não são formas comparativas e sim formas superlativas irregulares de GOOD, BAD/ILL. Observe
também que no caso de FAR, podemos utilizar tanto farther quanto further para formas corretas.
33. ALTERNATIVA (B)
a) Em uma frase no presente simples, para se formular a negativa é necessário utilizar o auxiliar DO. A frase correta
ficaria então “I dont’t like the test.”
b) Correta. “Do not be impolite” é a forma abreviada de “Don’t be impolite”, que é uma forma usal de dizer
“não seja indelicado”.
c) Formas infinitivas não podem ir para a negativa, logo, não seria possível escrever to do not do. A frase correta seria:
“It is important to do it” ou “It is important not to do it”.
d) Diante de verbos modais não se colocam verbos auxiliares pois o verbo modal já é um tipo de verbo auxiliar. A frase
correta seria: “You must not worry about that”.
e) Formas infinitivas não podem ir para a negativa, logo, não seria possível escrever “to not to go”. A frase correta seria:
“Remind her not to go there again”.
207
GABARITOS 208
34. ALTERNATIVA (B)
a) 1ª LACUNA - ON é utilizado com o sentido de em cima/acima. Quando nos referimos a designação de local, como
quando damos orientações a alguém de como chegar em algum lugar, não utilizamos ON e sim AT.
2ª LACUNA – Quando estamos falando que algo esta constante de outro algo, ou seja, dentro de outro algo, usamos
a preposição IN e não a preposição ON.
3ª LACUNA – Apesar de meses do ano virem precedidos de preposição IN, o mês do ano, quando seguido de data
específica, vem precedido pela preposição ON e não a preposição IN ou AT.
4ª LACUNA - por se tratar de momento do dia (momentos do dia são precedidos da preposição IN, com exceção da
palavra night) deverá ser preenchida com a preposição IN.
b) Correta.
c) 1ª LACUNA – TO = para, no sentido de ir para alguma lugar; relacionado ao ato de se locomover para chegar em
er
algum lugar. Quando nos referimos a designação de local, como quando damos orientações a alguém de como chegar
t
in
em algum lugar, não utilizamos TO e sim AT.
eW
2ª LACUNA – Quando estamos falando que algo esta constante de outro algo, ou seja, dentro de outro algo, usamos
a preposição IN e não a preposição AT.
d) 1ª LACUNA - IN é utilizado com o sentido de “dentro”. Quando nos referimos a designação de local, como quando
in
damos orientações a alguém de como chegar em algum lugar, não utilizamos IN e sim AT.
al
2ª LACUNA – TO = para, no sentido de ir para alguma lugar; relacionado ao ato de se locomover para chegar em
-L
algum lugar. Quando estamos falando que algo esta constante de outro algo, ou seja, dentro de outro algo, usamos a
preposição IN e não a preposição TO.
7
3ª LACUNA – Apesar de meses do ano virem precedidos de preposição IN, o mês do ano, quando seguido de data
-1
específica, vem precedido pela preposição ON e não a preposição IN ou AT.

4ª LACUNA - por se tratar de momento do dia (momentos do dia são precedidos da preposição IN, com exceção da
1
84
palavra night) deverá ser preenchida com a preposição IN.

e) 1ª LACUNA – TO = para, no sentido de ir para alguma lugar; relacionado ao ato de se locomover para chegar em
9.
algum lugar. Quando nos referimos a designação de local, como quando damos orientações a alguém de como chegar
10
em algum lugar, não utilizamos TO e sim AT.

7.
Dica de Resolução Rápida:

06
Lembramos que em questões de preposição o aluno, para agilizar a prova, deve procurar primeiramente as lacunas que teria
F
certeza de como preencher e de posse dessa informação eliminar as alternativas incorretas.

CP
No caso da frase em questão, acreditamos ser a lacuna 4 a que apresentará maior facilidade ao aluno: ____ the morning. Essa
lacuna, por se tratar de momento do dia (momentos do dia são precedidos da preposição IN, com exceção da palavra night)
deverá ser preenchida com a preposição IN, já eliminando as alternativas A e D e tornando desnecessário ao aluno se
preocupar com a lacuna 03, já que todas as alternativas que sobraram apresentam a mesma preposição nesta lacuna.
Observando as lacunas 1 e 2 verificamos que em ambas temos 2 alternativas iguais e 1 diferente, logo, podemos optar por
escolher qualquer uma das duas pra iniciar nosso trabalho de eliminação. Pela ordem, optamos pela lacuna 1
1ª LACUNA – TO = para, no sentido de ir para alguma lugar; relacionado ao ato de se locomover para chegar em algum lugar.
Quando nos referimos a designação de local, como quando damos orientações a alguém de como chegar em algum lugar, não
utilizamos TO e sim AT.
RESULTADO: Analisando apenas as lacunas 4 e 1 é possível chegar na alternativa certa e poupar tempo ao aluno. Resposta,
alternativa B.
Se optássemos pela lacuna 2
2ª LACUNA – Quando estamos falando que algo esta constante de outro algo, ou seja, dentro de outro algo, usamos a
preposição IN e não a preposição AT.
208
GABARITOS 209
RESULTADO: Analisando apenas as lacunas 4 e 2 é possível chegar na alternativa certa e poupar tempo ao aluno. Resposta,
alternativa B.
35. ALTERNATIVA (D)
a) Se está chovendo não é possível que as crianças brinquem lá fora. Logo, o uso do modal “must”referente à
obrigatoriedade, na afirmativa, torna a alternativa incorreta.
b) Se está chovendo não é possível que as crianças brinquem lá fora. Logo, o uso do modal “will”referente à futuro
passível de ocorrer, na afirmativa, torna a alternativa incorreta.
c) Se está chovendo não é possível que as crianças brinquem lá fora, logo... WON’T é um modal perfeitamente possível
de ser usado nesta situação. Entretanto, apesar das crianças não poderem sair, nada as impede de ficarem assistindo
TV em casa, o que tornaria o uso do modal CAN’T (can+not = não poder) incorreto.
er
d) Correta.
t
in
e) Se está chovendo não é possível que as crianças brinquem lá fora, logo... WON’T é um modal perfeitamente possível
de ser usado nesta situação. Entretanto, apesar das crianças não poderem sair, nada as impede de ficarem assistindo
eW
TV em casa, o que tornaria o uso do modal CAN’T (can+not = não poder) incorreto.
Dica de Resolução Rápida: in

al
Verificando apenas a primeira e a segunda lacuna já é possível alcançar a resposta correta, sem que seja preciso verificar a
-L
terceira lacuna. Os segundos da terceira lacuna podem ser preciosos ao concursando ao final da prova.
7
-1
36. ALTERNATIVA (A)

1
84
a) Correta.
9.
b) I – é FALSA pois o texto informa que a governanta passa a acreditar que a casa está sendo assombrada e não que a
10
casa realmente é assombrada.

II – é FALSA pois Henry James escreveu o livro, enquanto Benjamin Britten adaptou o mesmo para uma ópera.
7.
III – é VERDADEIRA. É possível perceber isso lendo o primeiro parágrafo e a primeira linha do segundo parágrafo.
06
c) I – é FALSA pois o texto informa que a governanta passa a acreditar que a casa está sendo assombrada e não que a
F
d) II – é FALSA pois Henry James escreveu o livro, enquanto Benjamin Britten adaptou o mesmo para uma ópera.
CP
III – é VERDADEIRA. É possível perceber isso lendo o primeiro parágrafo e a primeira linha do segundo parágrafo.
e) I – é FALSA pois o texto informa que a governanta passa a acreditar que a casa está sendo assombrada e não que a
II – é FALSA pois Henry James escreveu o livro, enquanto Benjamin Britten adaptou o mesmo para uma ópera.
37. ALTERNATIVA (E)
No último parágrafo do texto, nas primeiras 4 linhas o autor do texto diz exatamente qual considera ser o fator comum entre as
músicas e as histórias de fantasmas. Para ele, é o fato de ambas apelarem para os sentimentos e emoções das pessoas.
Alternativa correta, letra E.
38. ALTERNATIVA (C)
a) Diante do sujeito good book pede um artigo indefinido. Caso o concursando não tenha notado essa necessidade,
poderá perceber o erro dessa alternativa ao colocar um artigo indefinido diante da palavra loneliness = solidão.
Solidão é uma palavra abstrata e, por isso não leva artigo.
209
GABARITOS 210
b) Ao se referir a good book, está se referindo a todo e qualquer livro que seja bom, logo não pode vir precedido de
artigo definido (the) e sim artigo indefinido (A). Caso o concursando não note o erro nesta lacuna, a lacuna seguinte o
ajudará a ter certeza que esta alternativa está errada, ao colocar um artigo indefinido diante de um superlativo que,
por regra, sempre vem precedido de artigo definido.
c) Correta.
d) Ao se referir a good book, está se referindo a todo e qualquer livro que seja bom, logo não pode vir precedido de
artigo definido (the) e sim artigo indefinido (A). Caso o concursando não note o erro nesta lacuna, a lacuna seguinte o
ajudará a ter certeza que esta alternativa está errada, ao não colocar artigo diante de um superlativo que, por regra,
sempre vem precedido de artigo definido.
e) Diante do sujeito good book pede um artigo indefinido. Caso o concursando não tenha notado essa necessidade,
poderá perceber o erro dessa alternativa ao colocar um artigo definido diante da palavra loneliness = solidão. Solidão
é uma palavra abstrata e, por isso não leva artigo.
er
39. ALTERNATIVA (A)
t
in
eW
(TRUE) Many people are dying in Haiti.
Poeplo = plural de person. Logo, é uma palavra contável que pode ser precedida do quantifier many e exige verbo no plural.
(FALSE) Much of the children are sick and rungry. in

al
Children = plural irregular da palavra child. Logo, é uma palavra contável e por isso deve vir precedida de um quantifier
-L
contável e não um quantifier incontável, como é o caso de MUCH.
(FALSE) There are only a few food to eat.

7
A few = algum/alguma
-1
Few = pouco/pouca
1
A frase em questão deveria conter FEW e não A FEW, para manter o sentido desejado.
84
9.
(TRUE) Not much fresh water is left.

Water = água – substantive incontável. Logo, está só pode vir precedido por um quantifier incontável, como está corretamente
10
empregado o MUCH. Lembramos que, por ser incontável, vem com verbo no singular.
7.
(FALSE) The need lot money to rebuild the country.

06
LoT = terreno, lote.

Para dar o sentido de MUITO, utilize-se A LOT ou A LOT OF.
F
CP
40. ALTERNATIVA (B)
a) Até a quarta lacuna seria perfeitamente possível completar como a alternativa apresenta se o texto terminasse nela.
Os erros iniciam a partir da quinta lacuna, que se desvincula completamente do resto do texto. Para ter coerência a
frase precisaria ser completamente modificada a partir da palavra “lives” ou que os complementos sejam modificados
de acordo com o que consta na alternativa B.
b) Correta.
c) Até a quarta lacuna seria perfeitamente possível completar como a alternativa apresenta se o texto terminasse nela.
Os erros iniciam a partir da quinta lacuna, que se desvincula completamente do resto do texto. Para ter coerência a
frase precisaria ser completamente modificada a partir da palavra “lives” (até porque, dizer que o marido da pessoa
com que você está falando vive com sua melhor amiga é algo que definitivamente não condiz com a ideia da questão)
ou que os complementos sejam modificados de acordo com o que consta na alternativa B.
d) Até a terceira lacuna seria perfeitamente possível completar como a alternativa apresenta se o texto terminasse nela.
Os erros iniciam a partir da quarta lacuna, quando se utiliza o possessivo HIS diante de HUSBAND, sendo que no texto
se torna evidente que o marido é de Kathy – como Kathy é mulher o possessivo correto seria Her.
e) Kathy é mulher e o pronome correto para designar sua condição feminina é SHE e não HE – que se refere a condição
de ser humano do sexo masculino.
210
GABARITOS 211
2010/2011
Answer questions 31 and 32 according to the texts below:
ADVERTISEMENT 1
FOR A HEALTHY LIFE
EAT SMART is a new show on food and nutrition. Dr. Don Shubert is the host. Last week, Dr. Shubert talked about foods that
fight disease.
· Did you know oranges help fight cataracts?
er
Nearly half of all Americans over 75 get cataracts. Cataracts cloud over the lens of the eye and can cause blindness. So drink
t
in
your orange juice, and eat other food rich in vitamin C.
eW
· Eating at least seven cloves of garlic a day can lower your blood pressure!
· in
A new vegetable is broccoflower. It’s a cross betweens a cauliflower and broccoli. It has lots of beta carotene. Beta
al
carotene fights certain types of cancers. It also has lost of vitamin C.
-L
EAT SMART is on Bay City Cable, Channel 3, Tuerday at 10.

7
From: Success – coommunicating in English2.Michael Walker. Add – Wesley. 1994, p.38.

1 -1
84
ADVERTISEMENT 2
9.
Low Fat Cooking Classes

10
7.
Eat a proper diet. You’ll live longer. You can lower the risk of heart disease, strokes, and cancer. Sign up for twelve weeks of
06
low fat cookig. The classes include recipes, an audiotape, handouts, and snacks.
F
WHEN: Mondays, 11 a.m.

CP
Wednesdays, 7 p.m.
WHERE: Community Center
For more information, call 495-2231
From: Success – Communicating in English 2.Michael Walker. Add – Wesley. 1994. p. 38.
ADVERTISEMENTE 3
COOKERY BOOK
211
GABARITOS 212
Read Chinese Vegetable and Vegetarian Cooking and you wil never think of vegetables as dull again. Go on further and try
some of the recipes. No special expertise is needed, the methods of preparation and cooking are explainet step bay step and no
previous knowledge of Chinese cooking is required.
Kenneth Lo, well known expert on Chinese food, makes it all so straightforward. The book is arranged according to method of
cooking, so that you can quickly master stir-frying, for example, and can try the many recipes which can be made in this way
before going on to another method. There are also sections on sauces, soups, rice, pasta, eggs, beancurd, hot and cold salads
and sweets.
From: Outlines. Andy Hopkins and Chris Tribble, Longman, 1989. p. 65.
31.Choose the correct alternative about the advertisements above:
t er
in
a) In advertisement 3, the author teaches the reader how to write a book about Chinese food.
b) According to advertisement 2, classes will be given once a week.
eW
c) Advertisement 1 presents the tips given by a doctor in a TV show.
d) According to advertisement 1, a lot of American teenagers can’t see properly because of cataracts.
e) in
According to advertisement 2, no recipes will be given during the course.
al
-L
32.If you read Kenneth Lo’s cookery book you.

7
-1
a) Will have a different opinion about vegetables.

b) Will have to have previous knowledge of Chinese cooking.
1
c) Will not be able to cook soup.

84
d) Will need a translator to understand the recipes.

9.
e) Will become a great Chinese cook.

10
7.
33.Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentence:

06
The dog bit ____ tail.

F
CP
a) his
b) it
c) it’s
d) her
e) its
34. Choose the alternative that correctly shows the past tense of the verbs below:
See – lie – throw – put
a) saw – lied – threw – put.

b) seen – laid – thrown – putted.
c) saw – lain - throwed – put.
d) seen – lied – throwed – putted.
e) seed – laid – threw – put.
35.Choose the correct altenative:
a) I like the flowers very much.
212
GABARITOS 213
b) She listens to radio every night.

c) He is a honest person.
d) This car goes as fast as 160 Km na hour.
e) The Mount Everest is the highest mountain on earth.
36. Choose the best alternative to complete the question below:
Which vegetable is _____________: carrots, onions or patatoes?
a) healthier
b) most healthy
c) the healthiest
er
d) a lot healthy
e) little healthy
t
in
eW
37. Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below in the right order:
in
I play tennis _____ Sundays ____ the morning. My husband prefers to play _____ night.
al
-L
a) in – on – in
b) on – in – at
7
c) at – in – on
-1
d) in – at – at
1
e) on – at – in
84
9.
38. Choose the answer with the verbs that appropriately complete the sentences below:
10
7.
Anna ____ go to school today because she ___ walk. Her mother told her she ____ see a doctor.
06
a) will – must – should

b) must – can’t – will
F
c) can’t – should – must

CP
d) won’t – can – must

e) won’t – can’t – should
39.Choose the alternative that shows the correct question for the answer below:
Joana likes her school very much.
a) Do Joana likes her school?

b) What does Joana like?
c) How is Joana?
d) How does Joana like her school?
e) Does Joana likes schools?
40.Choose the alternative that correctly completes the sentences below in the right order:
We don’t have _______ money, just ____ rais. Let’s take only ___ milk.
a) many – few – a few
b) much – a few – some
213
GABARITOS 214
c) a loto of – many – few

d) few – some – many
e) many – few – some
GABARITO COMENTADO
31. ALTERNATIVA (D)
a) A propaganda 3 fala sobre um livro que ensina a fazer alguns tipos de comida Chinesa, não ensina a escrever um livro
sobre o assunto(como diz o item em questão).
b) As aulas são 2 vezes na semana, não 1 vez apenas.
c) Correta
er
d) A propaganda fala sobre aulas para aprender a se alimentar corretamente e prevenir algumas possíveis doenças. Em
t
momento algum fala sobre adolescentes e a proporção deles com a cegueira provocada por catarata.
in
e) Receitas serão fornecidas durante o curso e o item em questão dizia o oposto.
eW
32. ALTERNATIVA (A) in
al
-L
a) CORRETA. A propaganda diz que as pessoas nunca irão pensar novamente que legumes e vegetais são “monótonos”,
logo, terão uma visão diferentes da que tinham antes.
b) Não é necessário ter conhecimento prévio sobre culinária Chinesa.
7
c) Poderá preparar vários tipos de pratos, entre eles, sopa.

-1
d) Não é dito nada na propaganda que leve a crer que seria necessário um tradutor para compreender as receitas.
1
e) Ele garante que as receitas são boas e variadas, mas não que a pessoa se tornará um bom cozinheiro de comidas
84
Chinesas.
9.
10
33. ALTERNATIVA (E)

7.
a) Não pode ser usado por ser referente à pessoas ou animais de estimação. Neste caso o cachorro não está
06
especificado como animal de estimação e, por isso, se enquadra na situação de animal e para todos os animais se
utiliza o pronome IT, em suas variação apropriadas.
F
CP
b) “It” não é utilizado neste formato para pronomes possessivos. Todos os pronomes possessivos são escritos como
“Its”.
c) ’s deverá vir sempre junto ao sujeito possuidor do objeto.
d) Não pode ser usado por ser referente à pessoas ou animais de estimação. Neste caso o cachorro não está
especificado como animal de estimação e, por isso, se enquadra na situação de animal e para todos os animais se
utiliza o pronome IT, em suas variação apropriadas.
e) CORRETA. Adjetivo possessivo concordando com o possuidor do objeto.
34. ALTERNATIVA (D)
a) INCORRETA - “Eu gosto muito de flores”. No caso desta frase, as flores são representantes de um nome amplo por
representar toda e qualquer flor, portanto, não devem vir precedidas de artigo definido (THE).
b) INCORRETA - Não se utiliza a preposição TO (para) sozinha nesta frase. O correto seria utilizar TO THE radio.
c) INCORRETA - Nesta frase o artigo indefinido está empregado de forma incorreta. O correto seria utilizar AN, pois o H
é de som mudo preponderando o som da vogal seguinte O.
d) CORRETA - Neste caso a frase está gramatical e semanticamente correta. Em nossa opinião esta é a resposta
completamente correta.
e) CORRETA - Esta frase, em nossa opinião, também está completamente correta, apesar de haver a repetição da
palavra THE (cacofonia), fato que não invalida a sua correção gramatical e semântica.
214
GABARITOS 215
PRESENTE PASSADO PARTICÍPIO PASSADO

SEE SAW SEEN
LIE LIED LIED
THROW THREW THROWN
PUT PUT PUT
35. ALTERNATIVA (D) e (E)
a) INCORRETA - “Eu gosto muito de flores”. No caso desta frase, as flores são representantes de um nome amplo por
representar toda e qualquer flor, portanto, não devem vir precedidas de artigo definido (THE).
b) INCORRETA - Não se utiliza a preposição TO (para) sozinha nesta frase. O correto seria utilizar TO THE radio.
c) INCORRETA - Nesta frase o artigo indefinido está empregado de forma incorreta. O correto seria utilizar AN, pois o H
er
é de som mudo preponderando o som da vogal seguinte O.
t
d) CORRETA - Neste caso a frase está gramatical e semanticamente correta. Em nossa opinião esta é a resposta
in
completamente correta.
eW
e) CORRETA - Esta frase, em nossa opinião, também está completamente correta, apesar de haver a repetição da
palavra THE (cacofonia), fato que não invalida a sua correção gramatical e semântica.
in
al
36. ALTERNATIVA (C)
-L
a) Comparativos de superioridade, não utilizado neste caso.

7
b) Em adjetivos com até duas sílabas não se utiliza as palavras MOST, LEAST, MORE ou LESS.
-1
c) CORRETA. Superlativo que evidencia a necessidade de escolher O MAIS SAUDÁVEL de todos.

1
d) “Muita saúde” não se encaixa na frase.

84
e) “Pouca saúde” não se encaixa na frase.

9.
10
37. ALTERNATIVA (B)

7.
a) Para dias da semana sempre se utiliza preposição ON

06
b) Correta
c) Para dias da semana sempre se utiliza preposição ON
F
d) Para dias da semana sempre se utiliza preposição ON

CP
e) Para períodos do dia sempre se utiliza preposição IN; menos no caso de night, onde se utiliza a preposição AT.
38. ALTERNATIVA (E)
a) Não faz sentido dizer que ela irá ( Will GO) para a escola porque ela tem que (MUST) caminhar.
b) Não faz sentido dizer que ela tem que (MUST) ir para a escola porque ela não pode (CAN’T) caminhar.
c) Não faz sentido dizer que ela não pode (CAN’T) ir para a escola porque ela deveria (SHOULD) caminhar.
d) Não faz sentido dizer que ela não irá (WON’T) para a escola porque ela pode (CAN) caminhar.
e) Correta.
39. ALTERNATIVA (D)
Tradução da Frase do Enuncidado: Joana gosta muito da escola dela.

a) Não se pode usar Do para Joana. Joana = SHE = terceira pessoa do singular. Na conjugação do verbo TO DO temos
SHE DOES.
b) Significa: Do que a Joana gosta?. Não condiz com a resposta em questão.
c) Significa: "Como vai Joana?". A pergunta não condiz com a resposta em questão.
215
GABARITOS 216
d) Significa: "Quanto Joana gosta de sua escola?". A pergunta condiz com a resposta em questão.
e) Com o auxiliar DOES o verbo principal permanece em sua forma base, que é o mesmo que a forma infinitiva sem o
TO, logo, o verbo LIKES não poderia estar sendo conjugado, logo, não estaria vindo com este S no final.
40. ALTERNATIVA (D)
a) MANY é utilizado apenas para coisas contáveis e a palavra “Money” é incontável.

b) Correta.
c) A FEW é utilizado apenas para coisas contáveis e a palavra “Milk” é incontável.
d) FEW é utilizado apenas para coisas contáveis e a palavra “Money” é incontável.
e) MANY é utilizado apenas para coisas contáveis e a palavra “Money” é incontável.
2009/2010
t er
in
eW
Answer questions 31and 32 according to the text below.
TEXT I
in
al
AMERICAN INDIANS
-L
The ancestors of today’s Indians once had the whole of North America for their hunting grounds. They were descendants of
7
migrants who crossed over from Asia at least before the last ice age ended, about eleven thousand years ago. A land bridge
-1
probably existed where Bering Strait is now. The Indians who stayed north of Mexico roamed the continent’s green forests and
1
swift rivers at will. Then came the white man. Slowly, irrevocably, the Indian was driven from his land. Long, painful years of
84
adjustment followed, during which attempts were made to pay the Indian for his losses, and some Indians tried to fit into the
white man’s society.
9.
Both the American and Canadian governments set aside for the Indians tracts of land called reservation or reserves. There the
10
Indians could pursue their traditional pattern of living without interference. At the same time the governments provided the
7.
reservations with roads, schools, doctors, hospital service, often farming advisers and social workers. Funds were also available
06
to help some Indians obtain a college education.

(Lands and Peoples –the world in color, New York: Grolier Incorporated, 1970, vol 6, p.17)
F
CP
31. According to the text, the Indians:
a) were migrants.
b) pursued the white man.
c) crossed over from Asia.
d) drove to Mexico to escape.
e) were paid for their losses.
32. On line 15, the word “pursue” means:
a) to convince someone of something.

b) to continue doing something.
c) to promise.
d) to ask.
e) to chase or follow someone.
33. Choose the answer that appropriately completes the sentence:
“Maria wants to talk to me but I don’t want to talk to ____.”
216
GABARITOS 217
a) she
b) he
c) her
d) hers
e) him
34. Which alternative best completes the dialogue below:
A. ________ do you do?

B. I am a student.
A. ______ do you go to school?
er
B. I am studying law _____ UFRJ.
t
in
A. ______ do you like it?
eW
B. I like it very much, it is a great course.
a) What – Where – at – How in

al
b) How – When – in – What
-L
c) When – Where – on – Which

d) What – When – in – What
e) How – What – at – When
7
1-1
35. What is the superlative form of the following adjectives “hot – young – bad – easy”?
84
9.
a) The hottest – the more young – the worse – the more easy
10
b) The hottest – the youngest – the worst – the easiest

c) The more hot – the youngest – the worst – the easiest
7.
d) The more hot – the more young – the worst – the more easy
06
e) The hottest – the youngest – the worse – the easiest

F
CP
There _________ seventeen different types of penguins. They can be _________ forty centimeters to more than one meter tall.
They all _________ in the south part of the world. In winter, they swim _________ long way to find warm weather.
a) are – from – live – a

b) be – by – lived –the
c) was – between – will live – a
d) were – at – live – an
e) are – from – lived – an
37. Choose the alternative that best completes the dialogue below.
A. ____________ different types of penguins inhabit

the South Pole?
B. I don’t know. Ten, maybe.
A. No, fifteen. And _____________ tall can they grow?
217
GABARITOS 218
B. I have no idea. One meter?
A. That’s right. ___________ do they leave the South Pole?
B. Probably in winter.
A. Excellent.
B. _________ are you asking me all these questions?
A. Because I want to see if you did your homework!
a) How much – who – When – How

b) How many – how – Where – Which
c) How much – when – Who – Why
er
d) How many – who – When – How
t
e) How many – how – When – Why
in
eW
38. Choose the answer with the verbs that appropriately completes the text below:
in
al
“My flight to São Paulo ______ at 10 pm. I bought tickets for the theater. I _________ a musical, and after I _______ with my
-L
friends.”
a) leaves – go to – am going to
7
b) is going to leave – am going to – am going to

-1
c) will leave – am going to – am having

1
d) is leaving – will watch – will have

84
e) leaves – am going to – am having.

9.
10
39. Write “T” if the sentence is grammatically correct, and “F” if it is grammatically incorrect. Then choose the alternative with
7.
the correct sequence.

06
1. ( ) Many animals are disappearing because of the greenhouse effect.

F
2. ( ) Most of the animals in the zoo are sick.

CP
3. ( ) There are only a little monkeys in the zoo.

4. ( ) Birds need few water to live.
5. ( ) Lions eat a lot of meat.
a) T–F–F–T–F
b) F–T–T–F–T
c) T–T–F–F–T
d) F–F–F–F–T
e) T–T–T–T–F
Which animal do you like _________, tigers or lions?
a) most
b) the most
c) many
d) more
218
GABARITOS 219
e) much
GABARITO COMENTADO
31. Resposta Correta: E
a) Eles não eram migrantes, mas sim descendentes de migrantes.

b) Eles puderam manter o padrão de vida deles e não PERSEGUIR o homem branco.
c) Eles eram descentes de migrantes que atravessaram a Ásia, mas ELES não o fizeram.
d) Eles não procuraram escapar para o México, eles viviam AO NORTE do México.
e) Correta.
t er
in
32. Resposta Correta: B
eW
Tradução da Frase da linha 11: Lá os índios poderiam seguir com o seu padrão de vida tradicional, sem interferências.
a) in
“convencer alguém de alguma coisa”. Eles não tentaram convencer ninguém, apenas seguir com seu próprio padrão
al
de vida em área reservada especificamente para eles.
-L
b) CORRETA. “continuar a fazer ALGO” = “seguir com”

c) “prometer”. Eles não prometeram nada.
d) “perguntar”. Eles não perguntaram nada.
7
-1
e) “perseguir ou seguir alguém”. Eles não fizeram isso (embora o verbo TO PURSUE também tenha esse significado)
1
84
33. Resposta Correta: C

9.
10
Na frase “Maria wants to talk to me but I don’t want to talk to ____” é preciso que a lacuna em branco seja preenchida
pelo pronome OBJETO feminino HER – já que é referente à Maria – pronome OBJETO que, POR DEFINIÇÃO, sofre ação.
7.
06
a) SHE = subject pronoun. PRATICA a ação, não sofre a ação.

b) HE = subject pronoun
F
No caso do HE temos dois erros:

CP
1 – É um pronome masculino e a lacuna é referente à Maria, que exige pronome feminino.

2 – É um subject pronoun e por isso PRATICA a ação, não sofre a ação.
c) HER = object pronoun. Pronome feminino que sofre a ação.
d) HERS = possessive pronoun. Na fase não se trata de um caso de posse.
e) HIM = object pronoun. Apesar de ser um tipo de pronome que sofre a ação, a lacuna é referente à Maria, que exige
pronome feminino
34. Resposta Correta: A
a) Correta.
b) HOW do you do? = “Como vai você?” / Não poderia ser respondido com “I’m a STUDENT.” = “Eu sou estudante”.
c) WHEN do you do? = “Quando você faz?” / Além de estar GRAMATICALMENTE incompleta, não poderia ser
respondido com “I’m a STUDENT.” = “Eu sou estudante”.
d) WHEN do you go to school? = “Quando você vai para a escola?” / Não poderia ser respondido com “I am studying
Law at UFRJ.” = “Eu estou esdudando Direito na UFRJ.
e) HOW do you do? = “Como vai você?” / Não poderia ser respondido com “I’m a STUDENT.” = “Eu sou estudante”.
35. Resposta Correta: B
219
GABARITOS 220
a) Palavras com até 2 sílabas, como YOUNG e EASY, FORMAM seus superlativos com o acréscimo de artigo definido
(THE) antes delas e A TERMINAÇÃO ”EST” ao final da palavra. Logo, o superlativo dessas palavras seria: THE
YOUNGEST e THE EASIEST. (veja que no caso de EASY, por ser terminada em Y o Y dá lugar ao I antes de se
acrescentar EST ao final).
b) CORRETA.
c) Palavras com até 2 sílabas possuem seus superlativos feitos com o acréscimo de artigo definido diante delas e EST ao
final da palavra. Quando estas palavras VÊM no esquema de 3 letras C+V+C, a terceira letra é dobrada. Logo, na
palavra HOT, teremos THE HOTTEST.
d) Palavras com até 2 sílabas possuem seus superlativos feitos com o acréscimo de artigo definido diante delas e EST ao
final da palavra. Logo, teremos para a palavra EASY o superlativo THE EASIEST. (veja que no caso de EASY, por ser
terminada em Y o Y dá lugar ao I antes de se acrescentar EST ao final).
Quando estas palavras vem no esquema de 3 letras C+V+C, a terceira letra é dobrada. Logo, na palavra HOT,
teremos THE HOTTEST.
er
OBS.: A regra CVC não se aplica a BAD, pois ESTA tem superlativos e comparativos irregulares.
t
e) WORSE é comparativo irregular de BAD. THE WORST é o superlativo correto para BAD.
in
eW
36. Resposta Correta: A
a) Correta.
in
al
b) THERE, neste caso, REFERE-SE AOS VERBOS HAVER/EXISTIR E, portanto, deve ser ACRESCIDO com uma forma do
-L
verbo TO BE designativa de presente, passado ou futuro, de acordo com o sentido da frase. A forma base seria,
então, inapropriada.
7
c) “seventeen different types of penguins” = “17 tipos deferentes de pinguins” é plural. Logo não se pode usar o verbo
-1
to be, mesmo que no passado, no singular (WAS).

1
d) Logo é possível notar a incoerência produzida pela combinação de tempos verbais da primeira sentença – passado –
84
com a segunda – modal designativo de possibilidade de futuro.

Caso o aluno não consiga perceber esta incoerência, pode-se continuar com o erro na escolha da preposição AT. Na
9.
frase “They can be _________ forty centimeters to more than one meter tall.” o autor do texto quer mostrar desde
10
qual altura – altura mínima - o pinguím poderia até a altura máxima já encontrada e a preposição AT não se enquadra
a este tipo de comparação.
7.
e) Logo é possível notar a incoerência produzida pela combinação de tempos verbais da primeira sentença – presente –,
06
com a segunda – modal designativo de possibilidade de futuro – e a terceira – passado.

Caso o aluno não consiga perceber esta incoerência, pode-se continuar com o erro na escolha do artigo AN.
F
Anteriormente à palavra LONG, por se iniciar com som de consoante, não se utiliza o artigo indefinido AN e sim o
CP
artigo indefinido A.
37. Resposta Correta: E
a) “types of penguins” = tipos de pinguins. Tipos de pingüins é contável e HOW MUCH é referente à coisas incontáveis.
b) A pergunta “WHERE do they leave the South Pole?” = “Aonde eles deixam o Pólo Sul?”, além de não fazer sentido,
jamais poderia ter como resposta “Probably in winter.” = “Provavelmente no inverno”. “No inverno”= período de
tempo = WHEN.
c) “types of penguins” = tipos de pinguins. Tipos de pingüins é contável e HOW MUCH é referente à coisas incontáveis.
d) WHO = quem. WHO tall não existe como pergunta. O correto seria HOW tall = “o quão alto”.
e) CORRETA.
38. Resposta Correta: ANULADA
“(…) and after I _______ with my friends.”

Nenhuma das opções completaria de forma gramaticalmente correta tal lacuna.
39. Resposta Correta: C
220
GABARITOS 221
a) 3 Alternativas incorretas. T – F – F – T – F
A alternativa diz que a frase “Most of the animals in the zoo are sick.” está gramaticalmente incorreta. Entretanto, não
há nenhum erro nesta frase. A frase “Birds need few water to live” está incorreta, pois FEW é usado para coisas
contáveis e WATER é incontável. E a última frase está gramaticalmente correta.
b) 2 Alternativas incorretas: F – T – T – F – T
A alternativa diz que a frase “Many animals are disappearing because of the greenhouse effect.” está gramaticalmente
incorreta. Entretanto, não há nenhum erro nesta frase. A alternative diz que as frases “There are only a little monkeys
in the zoo.” Está correta, mas A LITTLE é usado para coisas INCONTÁVEIS e macaco é contável.
c) CORRETA.
d) 2 Alternativas incorretas: F – F – F – F – T
A alternativa diz que as frases “Many animals are disappearing because of the greenhouse effect.” e “Most of the
animals in the zoo are sick.” estão gramaticalmente incorretas. Entretanto, não há nenhum erro nestas frases.
e) 3 Alternativas incorretas: T – T – T – T – F
A alternative diz que as frases “There are only a little monkeys in the zoo.” e “Birds need few water to live” estão
er
corretas. Entretanto, A LITTLE é usado para coisas INCONTÁVEIS e macaco é contável; enquanto FEW é usado para
t
coisas contáveis e WATER é incontável. Todas as outras frases da questão estão gramaticalmente corretas.
in
eW
40. Resposta Correta: D
in
“Which animal do you like _________, tigers or lions?” = “De qual animal você gosta mais, tigres ou leões?” É uma pergunta
comparativa. A pessoa está querendo que seja comparado o gostar de tigre (qualquer tigre) com o gostar de leão (qualquer
al
leão).
-L
a) Most = forma incorreta de superlativo. A forma correta de superlativo seria THE MOST, entretanto, a pergunta em
7
questão é comparativa.
-1
b) The most = superlativo. A pergunta é comparativa.

1
c) Many = determiner. Não se aplica por falta de sentido.

84
d) Correta.
e) Much = determiner. Não se aplica por falta de sentido.
9.
10
2008/2009
7.
06

F
CP
THANKSGIVING
In 1620 one of the first British settlements in America was established in Massachusetts. These settlers, known as Pilgrims, had
come to America to freely practise their religion. They arrived in November, when it was too late to plant crops. Although many
people died, the Pilgrim settlement survived the winter because of help from Indians who lived nearby. The Indians taught the
Pilgrims about corn and showed them where to fish. The next November, after the crops were harvested, the Pilgrims gave
thanks to God at a feast to which they invited the Indians.
Every year, Americans celebrate Thanksgiving. Families and friends get together for a big feast. The meal usually includes roast
turkey with stuffing and gravy, a sweet sauce made from cranberries, sweet potatoes, and pumpkin pie. What a meal! It’s not
surprising that a recent Thanksgiving tradition is to sit after dinner in front of the TV watching a professional football game.
(FALK, R. Spotlight on the USA. New York: Oxford University Press, 1993, p. 14.)
41. According to the text, the Pilgrims:
a) learned how to plant with the Indians.

b) watched TV after dinner.
c) reached America at the right time to grow crops.
d) and the Indians had a great feast after the first crop was harvested.
221
GABARITOS 222
e) and their religion were of great importance to the Indians since they had no God.
42.What does the pronoun WHICH refer to in the following sentence?
“…the Pilgrims gave thanks to God at a feast to which they invited the Indians.” (lines 9-10)
a) the Pilgrims.
b) a feast.
c) the Indians.
d) God.
e) the crops.
43.Choose the alternative that best completes the note below.
t er
Dear Mrs. Jones,
in
Please_______my daughter Jennifer for missing school yesterday.
eW
We_______to take the Sunday paper off the porch and when we
________it on Monday we ________it was Sunday.

in
al
-L
Your
Laura Grey
7
a) excused – forget – find – think

-1
b) excuse – forgot – found – thought

1
c) will excuse – forgetting – finding – thinking

84
d) will excuse – will forget – will find – will think

9.
e) excuse – will forget – will find – thought

10
7.
44.Which alternative best completes the dialogue below?

06
A: What ____________ for Christmas?

F
B: We are not sure yet. Bob thinks we __________ visit

CP
his parents but I’d rather spend the holiday at home.
A: If you stay here, you _________ come to our house
and celebrate it with us.
B: That’s a great idea! I _________ talk to Bob and see
what he thinks.
a) do you do – can – should – can

b) are you doing – should – will – can
c) do you do – are to – can – will
d) are you doing – should – can – will
e) are you doing – will – should – will
45.Which alternative best completes the paragraph below? (* means no article).
_____Americans celebrate ______Thanksgiving with ______ big feast. They eat _____turkey and pumpkin pie.
222
GABARITOS 223
a) *–a–*
b) The – * – a – a
c) the – * – a
d) The – a – a – the
e) * – the – the
46.Which alternative best completes the dialogue below?
A: _________did the Pilgrims arrive in America?

B: In 1620.
A: And ________ did they get there?
er
B: In a big ship called the Mayflower.
t
in
A: _________ did they first settle in?
eW
B: In Massachusetts.
A: __________ helped them?

in
al
-L
B: The Indians.
7
a) When – when – What – Who

-1
b) Who – how – When – What

1
c) When – how – Where – Who

84
d) What – who – Where – How

e) How – when – Who – Where
9.
10
47. Which alternative completes this sentence?

7.
06
Which holiday do you enjoy ___________: Christmas, Thanksgiving or Halloween?

F
a) most
CP
b) the most
c) much
d) the more
e) more
48.Which alternative best completes the sentence below?
__________ of the new toys cost so ___________ money that only __________ people can afford them.
a) Much – a few – many

b) Some – much – a few
c) Some – many – a few
d) Much – some – some
e) Many – much – a few
49.Choose the answer with the verbs that appropriately complete the sentences below.
223
GABARITOS 224
Yesterday I _________ to my daughter’s dance recital. I had never been to a dance recital before. I _________ dancing lessons
when I _________ a child.
a) went – haven’t taken – was

b) have gone – didn’t take – have been
c) went – didn’t take – have been
d) have been – have never been – was
e) went – didn’t take – was
50.Choose the answer with the verbs that appropriately complete the sentences below.
Joan speaks Russian, so she _________ rely on an interpreter when she is there. However, when she’s in Japan, she
_________ contract an interpreter because she _________ speak Japanese.
t er
a) can’t – has to – couldn’t
in
b) must not – can – has to
eW
c) shouldn’t – can’t – can
d) doesn’t have to – must – can’t
e) couldn’t – must – doesn’t have to
in
al
-L
GABARITO COMENTADO
7
-1
41. Resposta: Letra D

1
84
a) Incorreta – Os índios não ensinaram os peregrinos a plantar, ensinaram sobre milho e a pescar.
9.
b) Incorreta – Quem assiste TV após o jantar são as pessoas da atualidade, como forma de tradição após o jantar de
10
Ação de Graças.
c) Incorreta – Eles chegaram em Novembro, quando já era muito tarde para o plantio.
7.
d) Correta
06
e) Nada se fala sobre a troca cultural religiosa entre Índios e Peregrinos no texto
F
CP
“… os Peregrinos agradeceram a Deus em um banquete no qual convidaram os Índios.”

De acordo com a compreensão do texto, torna-se evidente que o “no qual” é referente ao banquete. Logo, a palavra
correspondente ao banquete é a alternativa correta.
Banquete = feast = Alternativa B
a) Incorreta – O bilhete é um pedido de desculpas, logo, a palavra excuse (= desculpa/desculpe) não poder vir no
passado “excused”, pois significaria “desculpado”.
b) Correta
c) Incorreta - O bilhete é um pedido de desculpas. Complete a frase com will excuse daria o sentido de
ordem/obrigação. Desviando assim o objetivo do bilhete.
224
GABARITOS 225
d) Incorreta - O bilhete é um pedido de desculpas. Complete a frase com will excuse daria o sentido de
ordem/obrigação. Desviando assim o objetivo do bilhete.
e) Incorreta – A segunda frase do pedido de desculpas é um relato do que ocorreu para que a filha perdesse a aula
naquele dia. Logo, fala de algo que ocorreu no passado, impossibilitando que os verbos sejam utilizados no futuro.
a) Incorreta. Para que a resposta seja feita com o verbo TO BE, como é o caso da resposta dada pela pessoa B, a
pergunta deve conter o verbo TO BE. Além disto, esta pergunta refere-se a um conceito de ação futura, o que
impossibilitaria o emprego do verbo TO DO no presente.
b) Incorreta – “are you doing – sould” estão corretas, entretanto o will não se emprega nessa situação. A está fazendo
um convite à B, logo, se utilizarmos WILL parecerá que B é obrigado a fazer algo. O ideal seria a utilização de CAN.
c) Incorreta. Para que a resposta seja feita com o verbo TO BE, como é o caso da resposta dada pela pessoa B, a
er
pergunta deve conter o verbo TO BE. Além disto, esta pergunta refere-se a um conceito de ação futura, o que
t
impossibilitaria o emprego do verbo TO DO no presente
in
d) Correta
eW
e) Incorreta – “are you doing” está correta, entretanto o will não se emprega nessa situação. B está comentando sobre
uma algo que BOB acredita que deveriam fazer juntos, mas não necessariamente que farão. Tanto que no início na
in
mesma sentença B afirma não saber o que será feito. O ideal seria a utilização de SHOULD.
al
-L

7
a) Correta
-1
b) Incorreta – não se utilize artigo definido antes de nomes que simbolizem generalizade. Neste caso, AMERICANS está
1
simbolizando o povo americano, mas nenhum americano especificamente.

84
c) Incorreta – não se utiliza artigo diante do nome de feriados comemorativos, como NATAL, ANO NOVO, etc
d) Incorreta – não se utilize artigo definite antes de nomes que simbolizem generalizade. Neste caso, AMERICANS está
9.
simbolizando o povo americano, mas nenhum americano especificamente.

10
e) Incorreto – não se usa artigo definido quando se deseja falar de coisas não específicas. No caso do banquete, casa
7.
americano faz o seu, logo, deveria ser utilizado artigo indefinido. Para se utilizar o artigo definido seria necessário que
fosse apenas um único banquete, específico, para todos os americanos.
06
F
CP
a) Para a resposta “In a big ship called the Mayflower”, a pergunta correta seria HOW e não WHEN. WHEN = quando ;
HOW = como. “Em um grande navio chamado Flor de Maio” é como ele foi e não quando.
b) Para a resposta “In 1620”, a pergunta correta seria WHEN e não WHO. WHEN = quando ; WHO = Quem. “Em 1620”
é QUANDO eles chegaram na América e não QUEM eles chegaram na America. Para a resposta “In Massachusetts”,
a pergunta correta seria WHERE e não WHEN. WHEN = quando ; WHERE = aonde. “Em Massachusetts” é ONDE eles
primeiro se acomodaram e não QUANDO eles primeiro se acomodaram.
c) Correta
d) Para a resposta “In 1620”, a pergunta correta seria WHEN e não WHAT. WHEN = quando ; WHO = O que. “Em 1620”
é QUANDO eles chegaram na América e não O QUE eles chegaram na America.
e) Para a resposta “In 1620”, a pergunta correta seria WHEN e não HOW. WHEN = quando ; HOW = como. “Em 1620” é
QUANDO eles chegaram na América e não COMO eles chegaram na America
Resolução: Esta questão coloca um problema de interpretação:

1) Comparativo: “Which holiday do you enjoy more/better?”
225
GABARITOS 226
2) Superlativo: “Which holiday do you enjoy most/best?”
Conclusão: A questão é suscetível de ser anulada, visto que tanto a alínea A como a alínea B estão corretas.
a) Correta
b) Na questão não cabe, porque é exclusivamente utilizada para fazer afirmações (the most beautiful / expensive / etc...)
c) Na questão ele está fazendo um tipo comparação, querendo saber qual dos feriados em questão é o que a pessoa
mão gosta. (???)
d) Em comparações onde se utilizar “more”, não é possível utilizar o artigo definido (THE) na frente.
e) Correta
48. Resposta: Anulada
er
a) NEW TOYS é contável, logo não é possível se utilizar a palavra MUCH nesta situação.
b) Correta, assim como a alternativa E.
t
in
c) MONEY é uma palavra considerada incontável, logo não seria possível utilizar quantifier MANY, pois ele é usado
eW
apenas com coisas contáveis.
d) NEW TOYS é contável, logo não é possível se utilizar a palavra MUCH nesta situação, afinal, este quantifier é usado
apenas com substantivos incontáveis.
e) Correta, assim como a B. in
al
-L
43. Resposta: Letra E

7
-1
a) YESTERDEY é designativo de passado, logo toda a sentence deve estar no passado. HAVEN`T TAKEN é um tempo
1
verbal incorreto, pois o tempo verbal é presente.

84
b) YESTERDEY é designativo de passado, logo toda a sentence deve estar no passado. HAVE GONE é um tempo verbal
incorreto, pois o tempo verbal é presente.
9.
c) YESTERDEY é designativo de passado, logo toda a sentence deve estar no passado. HAVE BEEN é um tempo verbal
10

d) YESTERDEY é designativo de passado, logo toda a sentence deve estar no passado. HAVE BEEN é um tempo verbal
7.

06
e) Correta
F
CP
a) CAN`T é um modal referente a permissão (poder/não poder). Por estar na negativa, informa que Joan NÃO PODE
“contar com um intérprete” quando está na Rússia pois ele já fala Russo. Entretanto, essa proibição é incorreta já o
fato dele falar Russo não o proíbe de ter um intérprete.
b) MUST NOT é um modal referente a necessidade/ obrigação (dever/não dever). Por estar na negativa, informa que
Joan NÃO DEVE “contar com um intérprete” quando está na Rússia pois ele já fala Russo. Entretanto, essa proibição
é incorreta já o fato dele falar Russo não o impossibilita de ter um intérprete caso ele assim o queira.
c) SOULDN`T é um modal referente a recomendação (deveria/não deveria). Por estar na negativa, informa que Joan
NÃO DEVERIA “contar com um intérprete” quando está na Rússia pois ele já fala Russo. Apesar desta frase fazer
sentido, sua continuação torna a alternativa completamente incorreta. Veja:
Na sequencia ele informa que Joan NÃO PODE (can`t) contratar um intérprete pois ele PODE (can) falar Japonês.
Entretanto, essa proibição é incorreta já o fato dele falar japonês não o proíbe de ter um intérprete desta língua.
d) Correta.
e) MUST NOT é um modal referente a necessidade/ obrigação (dever/não dever). Por estar na negativa, informa que
Joan NÃO DEVE “contar com um intérprete” quando está na Rússia pois ele já fala Russo. Entretanto, essa proibição
é incorreta já o fato dele falar Russo não o impossibilita de ter um intérprete caso ele assim o queira.
226
GABARITOS 227
2007/2008
41.Choose the best alternative to complete the following dialogue.
A: Where are _____ car keys?

B: There are some keys over there.
A: Those are not _____. Those are Sara’s.
B: I thought _____ car was in the garage.
A: That was last week. Ah! Here they are.
er
a) your – hers – my.
b) her – yours – yours.
t
in
c) my – mine – her.
eW
d) my – hers – your.
e) her – mine – your.
in
al
42.Choose the alternative that best completes the sentence below.
-L
When Mr Wong _____, the police _____ out that he _____ a fortune under his bed.
7
-1
a) died – found – was hiding.

1
b) was dying – was fiding – was hiding.

84
c) dead – find – hide.

d) died – finds – hides.
9.
e) dead – found – hides.

10
7.
43.Which group of verbs complete the dialogue below appropriately?

06
DOCTOR – How are you today?

F
PATIENT – Bad. My back hurts.

CP
DOCTOR – _____ you bend over and touch your knee?
PATIENT – I _____ but it hurts a lot.
DOCTOR – Well, you _____ take some aspirin and lie
down. Oh, and you _____ lift any weight.
PATIENT – OK. Thanks.
a) Must – mustn’t – have to – don’t have to.

b) Can – can – should – shouldn’t.
c) Should – shouldn’t – can – can’t.
d) Will – won’t – could – couldn’t.
e) Could – couldn’t – must – mustn’t.
44. Choose the sentence in which the adverbs are in the standard position.
227
GABARITOS 228
a) At the concert Sunday last beautifully they played.

b) Beautifully they played at the concert last Sunday.
c) Last Sunday at the concert they beautifully played.
d) They played beautifully at the concert last Sunday.
e) They played last Sunday at the concert beautifully.
45. Choose the sentence in which the preposition on can be appropriately used.
a) Wait for me _____ the intersection, will you?

b) Joseph went _____ the farm yesterday.
c) You can buy batteries _____ the corner store.
d) It was crowded _____ the cafeteria today.
e) There’s a good show _____ TV tonight.
t er
in
eW
46. Which answer contains the articles that appropriately complete the sentences below?
Frank’s farm is near _____ university. Many of us,

in
al
biology students from _____ university, go to his farm
-L
to observe _____ animals which live on _____ farm.

7
-1
Last time I went there I had to observe two mammals,

1
so I chose to observe _____ horse and _____ ox.

84
9.
a) an – the – the – the – the – an.

10
b) a – the – a – the – a – the.

c) an – a – a – the – an – an.
7.
d) a – the – the – the – a – an.

06
e) an – a – the – the – a – a.
F
CP
47. Choose the answer whose items appropriately complete the sentence below.
There were _____ people at the flea market yesterday, but very _____ things were sold.
a) many – many.
b) few – few.
c) many – a little.
d) much – a few.
e) many – few.
48.All the sentences below are correct, except:
a) The police were here yesterday.

b) I’m afraid the news are not good.
c) There are a lot of sheep in the barn.
d) Could you give me some informations?
e) There are many furnitures in the room.
228
GABARITOS 229
WHAT’S IN A NAME
People from cultures around the globe have always believed names have magical powers, and that just by giving a certain
name, you can instill positive qualities in your baby. It is such “magical” or even sub-conscious thinking that may have been
behind names such as Faith, Hope, and Charity, which were popular many years ago in the U.S.Astrological names, for
example, are chosen according to the time of birth, in the hopes that such names will be lucky and work with harmony under
the stars. A child born under the sign of Leo might be given a name that means lion – the zodiac symbol of Leo. Oriental
astrologers believe there must be a balance of the basic elements – earth, fire, metal, water, air and wood – to have a smooth
course in life. When a baby’s horoscope is read, if there appears to be too much of one element, metal for example, the baby
might be given a name which means “Earth” to balance the elements in his/her life.Names are chosen for a variety of reasons.
Sometimes, names have deep personal meaning for the parents, or they have traditionally been names given to children in their
families. Some names have religious significance for the parents, and others are chosen simply because the parents like the
er
sound of the name. Whatever the reason, it is important for parents to remember that, like it or not, others will form opinions
about their child according to their name. Research has shown that people are often stereotyped as successful, plain, popular or
t
in
otherwise all because of their name.
eW
49. Choose the statement which is supported by the information in the text.
a) A baby named Jupiter will be adventurous and impulsive. in

al
b) A person’s image is influenced by his or her name.
-L
c) Parents hire astrologers to choose a name for their baby.

d) Catholics do not care about their babies’ names.
7
e) Names can give people magical powers.

1 -1
84
50. All the statements below are true, except:

9.
10
7.
a) Many people believe that a name can influence a baby’s personality.

06
b) Oriental astrologers believe that a name can help balance the elements of life.
c) Astrological names are considered unlucky.
F
d) Parents choose names for several different reasons.

CP
e) Religion may influence parents when they choose a name for their baby.
GABARITO COMENTADO
41.
a) Para se acertar essa questão é importante perceber que a primeira pregunta de A tem relação com sua afirmação
seguinte. Logo, a 1ª lacuna e a 2ª lacuna são referentes à mesma pessoa – ao proprietário da chave do carro.
Partindo dessa compreensão podemos concluir que se utilizarnos YOUR na primeira lacuna, deveremos
obrigatóriamente utilizar YOURS na segunda lacuna para que continuemos a nos referir à mesma pessoa.
b) Para se acertar essa questão é importante perceber que a primeira pregunta de A tem relação com sua afirmação
Partindo dessa compreensão podemos concluir que se utilizarnos HER na primeira lacuna, deveremos
obrigatóriamente utilizar HERS na segunda lacuna para que continuemos a nos referir à mesma pessoa.
c) Correta
d) Para se acertar essa questão é importante perceber que a primeira pregunta de A tem relação com sua afirmação
229
GABARITOS 230
Partindo dessa compreensão podemos concluir que se utilizarnos MY na primeira lacuna, deveremos obrigatóriamente
utilizar MINE na segunda lacuna para que continuemos a nos referir à mesma pessoa.
e) Para se acertar essa questão é importante perceber que a primeira pregunta de A tem relação com sua afirmação
Partindo dessa compreensão podemos concluir que se utilizarnos HER na primeira lacuna, deveremos
obrigatóriamente utilizar HERS na segunda lacuna para que continuemos a nos referir à mesma pessoa.
42.
a) Correta
b) Finding = conclusão / descoberta. Was finding out é uma expressão que não existe. Find out = descobrir. Não é
possível “estar descobrindo”algo. Ou se descobre ou não se descobre. Atenção: DYE ≠ DIE; dye = tintura/ tingir ; die
= morrer
er
c) DEAD = subst./adjetivo = morto; DIE = verbo = morrer. Na lacuna em questão deveria ser utilizado um verbo e não
um substantivo ou adjetivo. Vale lembrar que os adjetivos costumam vir antes do nome que estão adjetivando e a
t
in
lacuna em questão está a pós o nome.
eW
d) Se utilizarmos o simples past na primeira lacuna será impossível construir uma frase com sentido adequado em um
contexto colocando os verbos seguintes no presente simples. Ne ste caso, temos como mais adequado o uso de uma
in
fase no PAST CONTINUOUS que trata de uma longa ação – estar escondendo uma grande fortuna debaixo da cama -
que foi interrompida por uma ação curta – a morte de Mr Wong.
al
e) DEAD = subst./adjetivo = morto; DIE = verbo = morrer. Na lacuna em questão deveria ser utilizado um verbo e não
-L
um substantivo ou adjetivo. Vale lembrar que os adjetivos costumam vir antes do nome que estão adjetivando e a
lacuna em questão está a pós o nome.
7
1 -1
43.
84
a) MUST – modal relativo a obrigatoriedade. Em uma pergunta de consulta médica o mais condizente seria perguntar se
9.
a pessoa “pode” / “consegue” fazer algo e não se ela “tem que” fazer algo.
10
b) Correta
c) SHOULD - modal relacionado à sugestão “dever/não dever fazer algo”. Em uma pergunta de consulta médica o mais
7.
condizente seria perguntar se a pessoa “pode” / “consegue” fazer algo e não se ela “deveria” fazer algo.
06
d) WILL – designativo de futuro. Em uma pergunta de consulta médica o mais condizente seria perguntar se a pessoa
“pode” / “consegue” fazer algo e não se ela “irá” fazer algo.
F
e) COULD – forma educada de se solicitar o mesmo que se solicitaria com CAN. Se, ao invés de optar por completar a
CP
primeira lacuna com CAN optasse em completar com COULD, este poderia ser considerado correto. Entretanto, o
complemento da segunda lacuna – que é a resposta para a pergunta anterior – faz com que esta opção fique
incorreta. A frase “I couldn`t but it hurts a lot” = “Eu não poderia, mas isso dói muito”, simplesmente não faz sentido.
44.
a) Beautifully – advérbio de modo. Os advérbios de modo vem após o verbo principal, porém antes de particípios. Nesta
frase ele está antes do substantivo e do verbo da frase, o que o torna errado. A posição de LAST na frase também se
encontra incorreta. Last está adjetivando Sunday, formando, em conjunto com ele, um advérbio de tempo. Advérbios
de tempo geralmente vem no final da frase, mas podem vir no início da frase se seguidos de vírgula. Todo o resto da
estrutura gramatical também encontra-se em ordem inversa.Tornando a mesma gramaticalmente incorreta em vários
níveis,
b) B eautifully – advérbio de modo. Os advérbios de modo vem após o verbo principal, porém antes de particípios. Nesta
frase ele está antes do substantivo e do verbo da frase, o que o torna errado.
c) Last Month – advérbio de tempo. Os advérbios de tempo geralmente vem no final da frase, mas podem vir no início
da frase se seguidos de vírgula. Nesta frase a vírgula após o advérbio foi omitida, tornando-a incorreta.
d) Correta.
e) Last Month – advérbio de tempo. Os advérbios de tempo geralmente vem no final da frase, mas podem vir no início
da frase se seguidos de vírgula. Caso venha a ser posto em qualquer outra posição em uma frase, deve ser posto
230
GABARITOS 231
entre vírgulas para ressaltar que aquela não é a sua posição regular em uma frase. Nesta frase a vírgula após o
advérbio foi omitida, tornando-a incorreta.
45.
A preposição ON é utilizada para:
• Dar sentido de em cima, ou “no/na” (O livro está na mesa. – não é dentro e sim em cima dela/ nela)
• Antes dos dias da semana
• Lugar ou moradia em uma rua, se o número não estiver mencionado.
a) Esta frase não se enquadra em nenhuma das características que permitem o uso de ON. Quando nos referimos a
locais onde alguma coisa irá ocorrer, onde um encontro será marcada ou que é caminho para algum lugar, utilizamos
a preposição AT.
er
b) Esta frase não se enquadra em nenhuma das características que permitem o uso de ON. WENT = passado de GO.
Quem vai, vai a algum lugar. GO TO.
t
in
c) Esta frase não se enquadra em nenhuma das características que permitem o uso de ON. Quando nos referimos a
eW
a preposição AT.
d) Esta frase não se enquadra em nenhuma das características que permitem o uso de ON. Quando nos referimos a
in
al
a preposição AT.
-L
e) Correta.
46.
7
-1
a) O artigo A é usado, em caráter de exceção, antes palavras iniciadas com as vogais U/EW/EU and Wi quando as
1
mesmas possuem som de “iu” .Exemplo: a useful thing; a ewe; a European.

84
b) “a animal” – terceria lacuna – é incorreto pois o artigo indefinido é utilizado apenas diante de palavras no singular.
c) artigo A é usado, em caráter de exceção, antes palavras iniciadas com as vogais U/EW/EU and Wi quando as mesmas
9.
possuem som de “iu” .Exemplo: a useful thing; a ewe; a European.

10
d) Correta.
e) artigo A é usado, em caráter de exceção, antes palavras iniciadas com as vogais U/EW/EU and Wi quando as mesmas
7.
possuem som de “iu” .Exemplo: a useful thing; a ewe; a European.

06
F
47.
CP
a) very many – não é possível de ser utilizado junto de forma gramaticalmente correta. Very pode ser usado apenas com
determiners incontáveis.
b) Few – few não daria o sentido de contrariedade solicitado por BUT.
c) Alittle – determiner utilizado para INCONTÁVEIS. THINGS é uma palavra considerada contável.
d) MUCH – determiner utilizado para INCONTÁVEIS. PEOPLE é uma palavra considerada contável.
e) Correta.
48.
Tanto a palabra INFORMATION quanto a palabra FORNITURE são consideradas palavras incontáves e, por isso, nenhuma das
duas poderia ir para o plural. Logo, teríamos duas respostas corretas: D e E.
49.
231
GABARITOS 232
a) É ditto que os nomes podem ser escolhidos com influências nos astros, mas nada é dito sobre qual é a influência do
nome Jupiter na vida de uma pessoa.
b) Correta.
c) Alguns buscam os nomes de seus filhos com base nos astros. Mas isso não quer dizer que todos os pais contratarão
astrólogos para escolher o nome de seus filhos.
d) Nada é dito sobre católicos se importarem ou não na escolha do nome de seus filhos. É dito, sim, que em alguns
casos os nomes são escolhidos por motivos religiosos.
e) Os nomes podem influenciar na forma como as pessoas vêem aquela pessoa, mas não lhes dão poderes mágicos.
50.
a) Essa crença é a razão dada para as diferentes escolhas feitas pelos país na maior parte do texto.
b) Dito nas linhas 11 a 13.
c) Opção Correta - No texto fala exatamente o oposto do que é dito nesta sentença.
er
d) As varias razões diferentes são enumeradas durante todo o texto.
t
e) Dito nas linhas 19 e 20.
in
eW
2006/2007
in
al
-L
TEXT I
7
Read the text below to answer the items 61, 62, 63 and 64:
1 -1
84
I used to think I could quit checking my e-mail any time I wanted to, but I stopped kidding myself years ago. My e-mail
program is up and running 24 hours a day, and once I submit to its siren call, whole hours can go missing. I have a friend who
9.
recently found herself stuck on a cruise ship near Panama that didn´t offer e-mail, so she chartered a helicopter to take her to
10
the nearest internet café.

7.
There was nothing in her queue but junk mail and other spam, but she thought the trip was worth it. I know how she felt.
You never know when you´re going to get that note from Uncle Eric about your inheritance. Or that White House dinner
06
invitation with a time-sensitive R.S.V.P.

F
Time, June 10, 2002.

CP
61.The passage tell us that the writer:
a) believes it´s about time he stopped thinking he can break the e-mail habit any time.
b) is fully aware that he´s a compulsive e-mail checker.
c) used to think only kids wasted whole hours checking their e-mail.
d) didn´t think it would take him years to break the e-mail habit.
e) thinks that once he´s able to stay away from his e-mail for 24 hours, he´ll get rid of his addiction.
62.Choose the correct translation for “... whole hours can go missing”. (line 4):
a) não sinto falta das horas perdidas.

b) vale a pena desperdiçar várias horas.
c) sou capaz de perder horas inteiras.
d) posso perder totalmente a noção das horas.
e) não me importo em ficar até altas horas.
63.What did the writer´s friend find in her inbox?
232
GABARITOS 233
a) Unimportant messages.
b) The writer´s message.
c) An invitation to dinner.
d) No messages at all.
e) Her uncle´s message.
64.According to the passage, the writer´s friend:
a) was flown to Panama because the cruise ship had made her feel sick.
b) regretted having chartered a helicopter, after she checked her e-mail in the café.
c) left the cruise ship on a helicopter sent by her uncle to check her e-mail in the nearest Internet café.
d) was offered a helicopter to take her to Panama because her cruise ship was stuck.
e) was glad she had left the cruise ship on a helicopter to check her e-mail in the café.
t er
in
65.Choose the correct alternative that completes the following sentence. _______ you in Miami last month?
eW
a) Were.
b)
c)
Are.
Is.
in
al
d) Was.
-L
e) Am.
7
-1
66.Which alternative contains the right answer to the following sentences.

1
84
1. There are __________ irrigated areas in the northeastern region of Brasil.

2. There is not __________ water in the refrigerator.
9.
3. There is __________ superstition among ancient civilizations.

10
4. We see __________ people destroying natural resourches today.

7.
06
a) many; much; many; many.

F
b) much; many; many; much.

CP
c) many; many; much; much.

d) many; much; much; many.
e) many; much; much; much.
67.Choose the correct alternative that completes the following sentence.
Romeo is telling Juliet that ________ loves ________.
a) him; hers.
b) she; her.
c) he; her.
d) she; him.
e) he; she.
233
GABARITOS 234
Einstein, __________ theory is very famous, was not American.
a) whom.
b) which.
c) whose.
d) what.
e) who.
69.The owl, a bird of prey of the order strigiformes is chieftly nocturnal, __________ a broad head __________ large eyes.
There are a lot of owls __________ the Mato Grosso Wetherlands.
The blanks of this passage can be adequately filled by:
er
a) and; with; at.
t
b) with; and; in.
in
c) of; and; around.
eW
d) with; of; near.
e) and; into; on.
in
al
-L
Your shoes are nice. I like ___________.

a) they.
7
b) it.
-1
c) theirs.
1
d) their.
84
e) them.
9.
10
71.Choose the best alternative which completes the sentence:

7.
06
This radio is old, but _______ sound is good.

F
a) it.
CP
b) their.
c) its.
d) his.
e) her.
72.Which alternative best completes the question?
Who is _________________ singer in your country?
a) the more famous.

b) the most famous.
c) more famous than.
d) as famous as.
e) most famous.
73.Which alternative is the right one to fill in the blank in “Do you have _______ luggage”?
234
GABARITOS 235
a) a.
b) an.
c) some.
d) any.
e) no.
74.Choose the alternative which contains the correct sentence.
a) Bob and I am nice friends.

b) My family and John is here
c) The cat is under the table.
d) Melissa and you am over there.
er
e) Bob’s is a nice boy.
t
in
eW
75.Which sentence contains the correct use of “a” or “an”?
a)
b)
Margaret wears an uniform every day.
Peter likes to drink a orange juice.
in
al
c) Tom has a new leather coat.
-L
d) My teacher is a honest man.

e) The Smiths bought an house in the center of Rio de Janeiro.
7
-1
76. Put the words in order. Choose the correct alternative.

1
84
apples large two green beautiful

9.
a) Two beautiful large green apples.

10
b) Two green large beautiful apples.

7.
c) Two apples beautiful green large.

06
d) Apples two beautiful large green.

e) Two large green beautiful apples.
F
CP
77.Choose the alternative that best completes the following statement.
My sister is _________ her thirties. She _________ long hair, and she _________ medium height. She _________ contact
lenses.
a) at; does; has; wears.

b) on; has; is; wears.
c) in; is; have; uses.
d) in; have; does; uses.
e) in; has; is; wears.
Dave and Sue ___________ at the meeting last night.
a) was.
b) are.
235
GABARITOS 236
c) is.
d) be.
e) were.
79.Choose the alternative that completes the following sentences.
Look at that yacht _______ the water!

We study English _______ Tuesdays and Fridays.
Janet is _______ the door waiting for her mother.
The money is _______ the box. Just open it.
er
a) in; at; on; on.
b) on; on; at; in.
t
in
c) on; on; in; at.
eW
d) on; in; at; in.
80.Choose the best answer that completes the sentences.

in
al
-L
Jane _______________ a baby in the summer.

Bye for now. Perhaps _______________ you later.
7
-1
a) will have; I see.

1
b) will have; I´m going to see.

84
c) is going to have; I´ll see.

d) are going to have; I´ll see.
9.
e) is going to have; I´m going to see.

10
7.
GABARITO COMENTADO
06
F
CP
61. Resolução:
a) Ele já percebeu que não consegue ficar sem verificar seus emails diariamente, que já está dependente dessa
rotina.
b) Correta. Está perfeitamente ciente de que está viciado em verificar seus emails.
c) No texto não faz nenhuma referência às crianças, apenas a pessoas adultas.
d) Cuidado com essa alternativa, ela é uma pegadinha. “Não achava que iria levar anos para quebrar o hábito de
verificar os emails” está INCORRETO, pois ele conclui que é impossível quebrar tal hábito, que ele não conseguirá
quebrar.
e) Ele não acredita que poderá ficar sem verificar o email dele e se livrar de tal hábito.
62. Resolução:
“... whole hours can go missing” = horas inteiras podem ser perdidas.
Tal tradução diz exatamente o mesmo que é dito na alternativa C.
236
GABARITOS 237
63. Resolução:
Correta. Mensagens não importantes/ sem importancia
“There was nothing in her queue but junk mail and other spam”.
Junk = porcaria / besteira ; junk mail = emails com bobagens, nada importantes
SPAM = programas que se recebe por email e direcionam para outras páginas de internet, geralmente relacionados à
vendas de produtos. Na maioria das caixas de email atuais já são automaticamente direcionados para a lixeira devido à sua
insignificância.
Ela não nenhuma mensagem do escritor da matéria. De acordo com o texto “There was nothing in her queue but junk mail
and other spam”.
ter
in
eW
insignificância.
in
al
Ela não encontrou nenhum convite para jantar. De acordo com o texto “There was nothing in her queue but junk mail and
-L
other spam”.
7
-1
1
84
insignificância.
9.
Na caixa de emails dela haviam várias mensagens, embora nenhuma delas fosse importante. De acordo com o texto
10
“There was nothing in her queue but junk mail and other spam”.
7.
06
F
CP
insignificância.
Ela não recebeu nenhuma mensagem do tio dela, embora o autor do texto brinque com tal possibilidade. De acordo com o
texto, “There was nothing in her queue but junk mail and other spam”.
insignificância.
64. Resolução:
a) Ela não voou para o Panamá porque o cruzeiro estava lhe fazendo passar mal. Ela pegou um helicóptero do cruzeiro
onde se encontrava para a Lan House mais próxima, pois no cruzeiro não era fornecido acesso à internet e ela sentia
a necessidade de verificar seus emails.
b) Ela não se arrependeu em momento algum de ter fretado o helicóptero. Mesmo percebendo que em sua caixa de
email não havia nada de importante, ela considerou que valeu a pena.
237
GABARITOS 238
c) Ela própria fretou o helicóptero, pois queria verificar seus emails e o cruzeiro não fornecia serviço de internet.
d) Não havia nenhum problema com o cruzeiro. Ela pegou um helicóptero do cruzeiro onde ela estava para a Lan House
mais próxima, pois no cruzeiro não era fornecido acesso à internet e ela sentia a necessidade de verificar seus emails.
e) Correta. Ficou satisfeita de ter fretado o helicóptero para ir à um “café”/ lan house para verificar seus emails.
65. Resolução:
a) Correta. LAST NIGHT = Simple Past. Afirmativa: YOU WERE; Interrogativa: WERE YOU.
b) LAST NIGHT = Simple Past. Afirmativa: YOU WERE; Interrogativa: WERE YOU.
Afirmativa: YOU ARE; Interrogativa ARE YOU … é relativo a Simple Present.
c) LAST NIGHT = Simple Past. Afirmativa: YOU WERE; Interrogativa: WERE YOU.
Afirmativa: YOU ARE; Interrogativa ARE YOU … é relativo a Simple Present. YOU IS é completamente incorreta!
er
d) LAST NIGHT = Simple Past. Afirmativa: YOU WERE; Interrogativa: WERE YOU.
t
in
WAS é referente à HE, SHE e IT.
eW
e) LAST NIGHT = Simple Past. Afirmativa: YOU WERE; Interrogativa: WERE YOU.
AM é relativo à I e é SIMPLE PRESENT.
in
al
-L
66. Resolução:
7
a) Na lacuna da alternativa 3 temos que utilizar um quantifier referente à palavra SUPERSTITION. Superstition é uma
-1
palavra abstrata e por isso considerada incontável. O quantifier utilizado para palavras incontáveis é MUCH e não
1
MANY.
84
b) Na lacuna da alternativa 1 temos que utilizar um quantifier referente à palavra AREAS. Areas é uma palavra
9.
considerada contável. O quantifier utilizado para palavras contáveis é MANY e não MUCH.
c) Na lacuna da alternativa 3 temos que utilizar um quantifier referente à palavra WATER. Water é uma palavra
10
considerada incontável. O quantifier utilizado para palavras incontáveis é MUCH e não MANY.
7.
d) Correta.
e) Na lacuna da alternativa 4 temos que utilizar um quantifier referente à palavra PEOPLE. People é uma palavra
06
considerada contável, sendo o plural irregular da palavra person. O quantifier utilizado para palavras contáveis é
MANY e não MUCH.
F
CP
67. Resolução:
a) A primeira lacuna precisa ser preenchida com o sujeito da ação AMAR. O sujeito da ação é representado por um
SUBJECT PRONOUN e HIM é um OBJECT PRONOUN.
b) A conversa é entre Romeo e Juliet, um homem e uma mulher, a lógica é que um deles esteja realizando a ação de
amar e o outro de ser amado. SHE – ela, fazendo a ação; HER – ela, recebendo a ação.
c) Correta. A primeira lacuna precisa ser preenchida com o sujeito da ação AMAR enquanto a segunda lacuna deve ser
representada por um pronome que sofre a ação de ser amado. O sujeito da ação é representado por HE (Romeo), um
SUBJECT PRONOUN, enquanto quem sofre a é representado por HER (Juliet), um OBJECT PRONOUN.
d) Correta. A primeira lacuna precisa ser preenchida com o sujeito da ação AMAR enquanto a segunda lacuna deve ser
representada por um pronome que sofre a ação de ser amado. O sujeito da ação é representado por SHE (Juliet), um
SUBJECT PRONOUN, enquanto quem sofre a é representado por HE (Romeo), um OBJECT PRONOUN.
e) A primeira lacuna precisa ser preenchida com o sujeito da ação AMAR enquanto a segunda lacuna deve ser
representada por um pronome que sofre a ação de ser amado. HE e SHE são ambos pronomes relativos a sujeito que
faz a ação.
238
GABARITOS 239
68. Resolução:
a) WHOM – utilizado para se referir “quem” em função de objeto. No caso da alternativa, a lacuna está se referindo à
teoria que também está em função de sujeito na frase em destaque entre vírgulas e não seria adequado.
b) Correta. WHICH – utilizado para escolhas e também para se equivaler a CUJO(A) ou CUJOS(AS). Na frase em análise
obteríamos a seguinte tradução: “Einstein, cuja a teoria é muito famosa, não era Americano”.
c) Correta.
d) WHAT = o que. Não é possível ser empregado corretamente nessa sentença.
e) WHO - utilizado para se referir “quem” em função de sujeito. No caso da alternativa, a lacuna está se referindo à
teoria e não ao sujeito principal da sentença maior, Einstein.
er
69. Resolução:
t
in
eW
Tradução da sentença:
a) “A coruja, uma ave de rapina da Ordem Strigiforme, é sobretudo noturna, ____________ uma cabeça larga/ampla
in
_______ olhos largos. Existem várias corujas ________ nas terras pantanosas do Mato Grosso.”
al
b) “A coruja (...) é sobretudo noturna e uma cabeça larga com olhos largos” é uma sentença que não faz sentido
-L
gramatical. Correta.
c) Of = DE no sentido de pertencer a/ ser de. Não se empregaria adequadamente à lacuna em questão.
d) Of = DE no sentido de pertencer a/ ser de. Não se empregaria adequadamente à lacuna em questão.
7
-1
e) “A coruja (...) é sobretudo noturna e uma cabeça”já seria uma sentença que não faz sentido gramatical. Caso o
concursando não tenha notado essa questão, o uso da palavra into= movimento para dentro de algo no
1
84
preenchimento da segunda lacuna deixaria completamente evidente a impossibilidade de tal alternativa ser
considerada a correta.
9.
10
70. Resolução:
7.
06
a) Iniciando a análise pela sentença aonde se encontra a lacuna, verificamos que é uma sentença que já possui sujeito e
verbo, faltando apenas o complemento da frase que, no caso, deveria ser um objeto. Quem gosta, gosta DE ALGUMA
F
COISA – no caso, seus sapatos.

CP
Sapatos = They. They = sujeito - se transformado para objetdo = them.

b) Iniciando a análise pela sentença aonde se encontra a lacuna, verificamos que é uma sentença que já possui sujeito e
IT é utilizado para coisas e animais quando na terceira pessoa do singular e não do plural.
c) Iniciando a análise pela sentença aonde se encontra a lacuna, verificamos que é uma sentença que já possui sujeito e
Theirs = possessivo.
d) Iniciando a análise pela sentença aonde se encontra a lacuna, verificamos que é uma sentença que já possui sujeito e
Their = possessivo.
e) Correta.
239
GABARITOS 240
71. Resolução:
a) Iniciando a análise pela sentença aonde se encontra a lacuna, verificamos que a mesma é referente ao rádio e ao
som. Logo, ela quer dizer que o som do rádio é bom. O som do rádio quer dizer posse e, apesar de IT ser o pronome
correto para substituir rádio, é incorreto em casos de posse. Em casos de posse utilizamos ITS.
b) Iniciando a análise pela sentença aonde se encontra a lacuna, verificamos que a mesma é referente ao rádio e ao
som. Logo, ela quer dizer que o som do rádio é bom. Apesar de their ser um possessivo, não seria possível utilizá-lo
como substituto à palavra rádio, que é um objeto. Objetos são substituídos pelos pronomes IT e seus relativos, no
caso do possessivo é ITS.
c) Correta.
d) Iniciando a análise pela sentença aonde se encontra a lacuna, verificamos que a mesma é referente ao rádio e ao
som. Logo, ela quer dizer que o som do rádio é bom. Apesar de HIS ser um possessivo, não seria possível utilizá-lo
er
como substituto à palavra rádio, que é um objeto. Objetos são substituídos pelos pronomes IT e seus relativos, no
caso do possessivo é ITS.
t
in
e) Iniciando a análise pela sentença aonde se encontra a lacuna, verificamos que a mesma é referente ao rádio e ao
eW
som. Logo, ela quer dizer que o som do rádio é bom. Apesar de HER ser um tipo de possessivo, não seria possível
utilizá-lo como substituto à palavra rádio, que é um objeto. Objetos são substituídos pelos pronomes IT e seus
relativos, no caso do possessivo é ITS.
in
al
-L
72. Resolução:
7
a) A lacuna em questão pede um superlativo. MORE é comparativo e não costuma vir precedido de artigo definido (the).
-1
b) Correta.
1
c) A lacuna em questão pede um superlativo. MORE…THAN é comparativo.

84
d) A lacuna em questão pede um superlativo. AS…AS é comparativo de igualdade.

e) A lacuna em questão pede um superlativo. MOST é designativo de superlativo, mas para ficar correto precisar ser
9.
precedido de artigo definido (the).

10
7.
73. Resolução:
06
a) Luggage é uma palavra incontável. Palavras incontáveis não utilizam artigo indefinido.
F
b) Luggage é uma palavra incontável. Palavras incontáveis não utilizam artigo indefinido.
CP
c) Para interrogativas e negativas utiliza-se ANY, para afirmativas utiliza-se SOME. No caso da lacuna em questão,
pretendemos completar uma interrogativa.
d) Correta.
e) Para interrogativas e negativas utiliza-se ANY, para afirmativas utiliza-se SOME. NO é usado para se referir a
NENHUM. “Do you have no luggage?” poderia ser traduzido como “Você tem nenhuma bagagem?”, o que é
gramaticalmente incorreto tanto em português quanto em inglês.
74. Resolução:
a) Bob and I = WE. Na conjugação do verbo TO BE temos WE ARE.

b) My family and John = They. Na conjugação do verbo TO BE temos THEY ARE.
c) Correta.
d) Melissa and you = YOU. Na conjugação do verbo TO BE temos YOU ARE.
e) Bob`s is - neste pedaço temos duas possibilidades de erro:
1ª - se ’s for abreviação de IS - teríamos então 2 verbos TO BE seguidos, o que é gramaticalmente incorreto.
2ª – se ’ s for possessivo – não se utiliza verbo TO BE após possessivo.
240
GABARITOS 241
75. Resolução:
a) Utilizamos “A” diante de palavras inicias com U e som de IU. É uma excessão à regra de que “A” é utilizado apenas
diante de palavras iniciadas com som de consoante.
b) Regra padrão de artigo indefinido: “A” é utilizado apenas diante de palavras iniciadas com som de consoante. Orange
inicia com som de vogal, logo, não pode utilizar o artigo indefinido “A”.
c) Correta.
d) Utilizamos “AN” diante de palavras inicias com H mudo/sem som, pois esta se torna uma palavra que, apesar de
iniciar com uma letra que pode ser considerada consoante, possui som inicial de vogal.A regra padrão de artigo
indefinido é que “AN” é utilizado apenas diante de palavras iniciadas com som de vogal – veja bem o detalhe, é SOM
DE VOGAL e não com uma letra que seja vogal.
e) A regra padrão de artigo indefinido é que “AN” é utilizado apenas diante de palavras iniciadas com som de vogal.
er
HOUSE possui som inicial de R, ou seja, som de consoante e por isso deveria vir precedido do artigo indefinido ‘A’ e
não ‘AN’.
t
in
eW
76. Resolução:
a) Correta.
in
al
A ordem correta dos adjetivos deve ser : determinante (no caso, a quantidade) > observação
-L
(bonito/feio/gostoso/desagradável...) > características físicas (essas seguem uma ordem interna específica: tamanho,
forma, idade/antiguidade, cor) > ... > nome que está sendo adjetivado.
7
b) Na frase em questão, tirando o determinante e o nome a ser adjetivado (apples), os adjetivos estão em ordens
-1
invertidas. A frase correta sertia “Two beautiful large green apples”.

1
84
9.
c) Na frase em questão, o nome a ser adjetivado está vindo após o determinante de quantidade e antes de todos os
10
outros adjetivos, o que a torna incorreta.

7.
06
d) Na frase em questão o nome a ser adjetivado está vindo antes de todos os adjetivos, o que a toda incorreta, já que
F
os adjetivos devem sempre vir antes do nome a ser adjetivado.

CP
e) Na frase em questão, tirando o determinante e o nome a ser adjetivado (apples), os adjetivos estão em ordens
invertidas. A frase correta seria “Two beautiful large green
f) apples”.
77. Resolução:
Para facilitar ao aluno localizar erros em sentenças que possuam muitas lacunas, sugerimos os alunos deixarem as lacunas
que consideram mais difíceis para serem analisadas por último, assim, já terão eliminado várias alternativas e talvez nem
precisem utilizar seus conhecimentos para decidir algo naquela lacuna. Como a maior parte dos alunos costuma relatar
dificuldades em preposições, deixaremos a análise das preposições da primeira lacuna como a última a ser vista, apenas se
necessária como critério de desempate entre alternativas com todas as outras lacunas idênticas.
241
GABARITOS 242
Lacuna 2 – “she does long hair” = “ela faz cabelo longo”, essa frase não faz sentido e é gramaticamente incorreta nesse
tipo de sentença. Atente ao fato de ser NESSE TIPO DE SENTENÇA - se estivéssemos falando de um cabeleireiro em um
salão a frase poderia ser considerada correta ao se relacionar que “fazer o cabelo longo” seria equivalente a fazer
penteados, cortes, tinturas ou coisas do gênero.
FIQUEM ATENTOS À PEGADINHA:
O erro da 3ª lacuna pode passar desapercebido para muitos concursandos distraídos e, caso esse fosse o único erro de
toda a alternativa, poderia lhe custar a questão. “she has medium height” = “ela tem altura mediana”.
Diferente do Português, no Inglês a altura e a idade não são algo que a pessoa tenha e sim algo que ela seja. A explicação
para isso é que a altura e a idade não são algo que a pessoa possui e possa deixar de possuir ou alterar conforme seu
desejo, é algo que faz parte dela. Não é opcional. Então, assim como para idade, para altura utilizamos verbo TO BE e
não verbo TO HAVE, fazendo com que a frase correta seja “she IS medium height”.
er
DICA: Nesta alternativa as lacunas 2, 3 e 4 estão corretas. Logo, a única forma de se descobrir se ela está correta ou
t
incorreta é utilizando seus conhecimentos sobre preposição e completando a lacuna 1. Sugerimos aos alunos que, nestes
in
casos, antes de “se torturarem” tentando lembrar algo sobre preposições que talvez os deixem em dúvida, verifiquem se
eW
há alguma outra alternativa com as lacunas 2, 3 e 4 corretas também.
in
Caso não haja, esta alternativa será a correta e a tática terá lhe poupado preciosos segundos em uma prova de concurso.
al
Caso haja, seus conhecimentos terão que ser utilizados para decidir em qual das duas ou mais está a alternativa correta.
-L
EXPLICAÇÃO DA ALTERNATIVA: Utilizamos a preposição IN e não a preposição ON quando nos referimos à anos ou
7
décadas. Na lacuna em questão estamos dizendo que ela estava em sua 30ª década de vida, podendo ter qualquer idade
-1
entre 30 e 39.
1
84
Lacuna 2 – “she is long hair” = “ela é cabelo longo”. O cabelo é algo que pode ser mudado a qualquer momento, mediante
o desejo da pessoa. Ele não faz parte do que ela é e sim de como ela está, ele é algo que ela tem. Por este motivo o
9.
correto seria utilizar HAS no lugar de IS.

10
Caso o aluno não tenha percebido o erro na 2ª lacuna, uma forma fácil de perceber o erro da alternativa é na 3ª lacuna,
7.
quando eles colocam “she have” como alternativa correta. Ignorante a pegadinha existente na lacuna, o fato de associar
06
SHE – terceira pessoa do singular – à HAVE torna a alternativa gritantemente incorreta. A conjugação correta seria SHE
HAS. Agora... FIQUEM ATENTOS À PEGADINHA:
F
CP
Outro erro na 3ª lacuna pode passar desapercebido para muitos concursandos distraídos e, caso esse fosse o único erro de
toda a alternativa, poderia lhe custar a questão. “she has medium height” = “ela tem altura mediana”.
Diferente do Português, no Inglês a altura e a idade não são algo que a pessoa tenha e sim algo que ela seja. A explicação
para isso é que a altura e a idade não são algo que a pessoa possui e possa deixar de possuir ou alterar conforme seu
desejo, é algo que faz parte dela. Não é opcional. Então, assim como para idade, para altura utilizamos verbo TO BE e
não verbo TO HAVE, fazendo com que a frase correta seja “she IS medium height”.
FIQUEM ATENTO À PEGADINHA – PARTE 2:
Na lacuna 4 temos USE no lugar de WEAR. Qual seria a diferença do uso entre um e outro? Por que USE não poderia ser
usado?
Utilizamos USE quando nos referimos a “usar” algo e WEAR quando nos referimos à “vestir”algo. Em português “usamos”
óculos, chapeis, lentes de contato... mas em Inglês, tudo que vai no corpo é vestido e não usado. Logo, em Inglês
VESTIMOS óculos, chapéus, LENTES DE COTNATO, perfumes, maquiagens...
ATENÇÃO – não é porque em Inglês se fala/escreve de forma diferente que em Português que na hora de fazer uma
tradução se colocará “she wears contact lenses” = “ela veste lentes de contato”. Em uma tradução será posto do Inglês
242
GABARITOS 243
para seu equivalente dito em Português e não seu equivalente literal, logo teremos “she wears contact lenses” = “ela usa
lentes de contato”.
Lacuna 2 – A conjugação correta para o verbo TO HAVE na terceira pessoa (HE, SHE ou IT) é HAS. Então, o correto seria
SHE HAS.
FIQUEM ATENTOS À PEGADINHA:
Na lacuna 4 temos USE no lugar de WEAR. Qual seria a diferença do uso entre um e outro? Por que USE não poderia ser
usado?
Utilizamos USE quando nos referimos a “usar” algo e WEAR quando nos referimos à “vestir”algo. Em português “usamos”
óculos, chapeis, lentes de contato... mas em Inglês, tudo que vai no corpo é vestido e não usado. Logo, em Inglês
er
VESTIMOS óculos, chapéus, LENTES DE COTNATO, perfumes, maquiagens...
t
in
ATENÇÃO – não é porque em Inglês se fala/escreve de forma diferente que em Português que na hora de fazer uma
eW
tradução se colocará “she wears contact lenses” = “ela veste lentes de contato”. Em uma tradução será posto do Inglês
para seu equivalente dito em Português e não seu equivalente literal, logo teremos “she wears contact lenses” = “ela usa
lentes de contato”.
in
al
Correta.
-L
7
-1
78. Resolução:
1
84
a) Last night = passado. David and Sue = They. THEY WERE.

b) Last night = passado. David and Sue = They. THEY WERE. They are = present.
9.
c) David and Sue = They. They are. Is é utilizado para a Terceira pessoa do singular. Esse é o primeiro erro. O segundo
10
erro é que a opção dá um verbo no presente, enquanto a frase está no passado (last night).
d) Be é a forma infinitiva do verbo. A frase está no passado e, portanto, o verbo deveria estar conjugado na forma de
7.
passado. THEY WERE.

06
e) Correta.
F
CP
79. Resolução:
IN = dentro. Se o yate estivese “in the water”, ele estaria dentro da água e portanto estaria afundado.
Caso o concursando não consiga perceber como completar a primeira lacuna, existe a possibilidade de se descobrir o erro
nessa alternativa pelas lacunas 2 e 3.
Na lacuna 2 temos os dias da semana e com dias da semana utilizamos a preposição ON e não a preposição AT.
Na lacuna 3 temos que Jane está à porta, logo ela está AT the door e não ON the door – que seria NA porta (pendurada
ou algo assim).
Correta.
Lacuna 3 – “in the door” = “dentro da porta”. Não há como a pessoa estar dentro de uma porta.
O Yate está sob a água e por isso a preposição adequada na primeira lacuna é ON e não AT. Caso o concursando não
consiga perceber o erro no emprego da preposição da primeira lacuna, pode optar pela 2ª lacuna, que apresenta a
preposição IN para dias da semana. Como já foi possível aprender durante os estudos, com dias da semana se utiliza a
preposição ON e não a preposição IN.
243
GABARITOS 244
80. Resolução:
Lacuna 2 – “later” nesta sentence é igual à “depois”. “depois” é designativo de futuro, logo o tempo verbal utilizado para
completar a lacuna 2 deveria ser no futuro e está no presente.
Correta. “Will have”é um futuro sem 100% e “to be going to” é um futuro com 100% . Independente de ter 100% certeza
ou não ambos estão no futuro e, com isso, se aplicam às duas lacunas na questão.
DICA: Caso uma questão como esta caia em sua prova (onde as alternativas B, C e D possuem respostas válidas e que
podem ser consideradas corretas), dê preferência para marcar a resposta que você considera a mais correta. No caso
er
dessa questão, sugeriríamos que marcassem a alternativa B pois, apesar da questão ter sido anulada, poderia ter sido
t
alegado pela banca que o fato dela estar grávida não implica necessariamente que ela terá o bebê naquele mês pois o
in
bebê pode nascer prematura ou ela pode perder o bebê.
eW
Correta. “To be going to” é um futuro com 100% e “will have”é um futuro sem 100%. Independente de ter 100% certeza
in
ou não ambos estão no futuro e, com isso, se aplicam às duas lacunas na questão.
al
-L
7
-1

1
84
Jane = SHE. Conjugação do verbo to be para she = SHE IS.

9.
Correta. “To be going to” é um futuro com 100% e, com isso, se aplica às duas lacunas na questão.
10
7.
06
F

CP
244

EsPCEx.1. Apostila de Inglês - GramáticaLalineWinter

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

EsPCEx.1. Apostila de Inglês - GramáticaLalineWinter

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

INGLÊS

Prezado aluno do Curso de Inglês

TI que executou excelente trabalho de formatação e

à resolução das questões aqui apresentadas irá melhorar

Nosso principal objetivo, com este material, é contribuir

Esperamos que você utilize esta obra, exercitando com

bibliografia àqueles que apresentaram maior grau de fato, queira aprender.

Aceite nossa companhia nesta viagem de treinamento Equipe de Inglês

Professores dos Concursos

EQUIPE Sormany Fernandes – História Geral e do Brasil

Profº Dr. Daniel Soares Filho Cirelene E. Martins - Direito

Secretaria Rodrigo Flórido Brum – Ciências Contábeis

Evilin Drunoski Mache Ricardo Sant'Ana – Informática

Fausto Santos – Informática

Suporte Técnico Rômulo Santos – Informática

Fernnanda Moreira Teodoro

Lídia Maciel Cruz

Editoração Gráfica Murilo Roballo – Matemática

Edilva de Lima do Nascimento Fernando Cunha Córes - Matemática

Fonoaudióloga e Psicopedagoga Andrei Buslik – Física e Matemática

Mariana Ramos – CRFa 12482-RJ/T-DF Mauro – Química

Assessoria de Línguas Estrangeiras

4.6. THE SAME AS SINGULAR .................................................................................................................. 25

5.1 SUBJECT PRONOUNS ......................................................................................................................... 28

5.2. OBJECT PRONOUNS .......................................................................................................................... 29

5.3. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS (AND ADJECTIVES) ....................................................................... 29

5.5. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS AND POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES ......................................................... 31

5.6. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS .................................................................................................................... 31

6.2. CATEGORY .......................................................................................................................................... 38

6.3. FORMS ................................................................................................................................................. 39

8. ORDER AND CATEGORY OF ADJECTIVES ........................................................................................ 44

10. PRESENT TENSE ................................................................................................................................ 48

11. PAST TENSE ....................................................................................................................................... 55

12. FUTURE ............................................................................................................................................... 63

INTERMEDIATE LEVEL ................................................................................................... 74

1.6. DOUBT .................................................................................................................................................. 76

2.1. GENERAL PREPOSITIONS ................................................................................................................. 83

2.2 PREPOSITIONS OF PLACE ................................................................................................................. 88

2.3. PREPOSITIONS OF DIRECTION ........................................................................................................ 88

2.5. PREPOSITIONS OF POSSESSION .................................................................................................... 89

2.6. PREPOSITIONS OF WAY .................................................................................................................... 89

2.7. OTHER PREPOSITIONS ..................................................................................................................... 89

3.1. COORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS .................................................................................................... 90

4. MODAL VERBS ....................................................................................................................................... 95

5. WISH ...................................................................................................................................................... 102

6. IF CLAUSES AND/OR CONDITIONAL CLAUSES .............................................................................. 106

7. ACTIVE AND PASSIVE VOICES .......................................................................................................... 109

8. DIRECT AND INDIRECT SPEECHES................................................................................................... 114

8.2. INDIRECT SPEECH ........................................................................................................................... 114

9. APPOSITIVE .......................................................................................................................................... 119

ADVANCED LEVEL ........................................................................................................ 120

1. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE ................................................................................................................ 120

3.1. INFINITIVE .......................................................................................................................................... 125

3.3. PARTICIPLES ..................................................................................................................................... 131

4. COMPARING GERUNDS, PARTIPLES AND INFINITIVES ................................................................. 135

EXERCISES ............................................................................................................................................... 140

5. MAIN CLAUSE....................................................................................................................................... 142

EXERCISES ............................................................................................................................................... 142

6. SUBORDINATE CLAUSE ..................................................................................................................... 143

EXERCISES ............................................................................................................................................... 145

6.2. ADJECTIVE CLAUSE ......................................................................................................................... 146

7. IRREGULAR VERBS LIST .................................................................................................................... 155

BASIC LEVEL ............................................................................................................................................... 160

10. PRESENT TENSE ............................................................................................................................... 169

15th – ____ 27 – _ 27th – _____

49 –_ 49th – 32 – ___

32nd – ____ 11 – _ 11th – ______

68 –_ 68th – 76 – ___

76th –_ 12 – 12th – __

99 – _ 99th – 14 – ___

14th – 100 – 100th – _